May 09, 2024  
Official Course Syllabi 2020-2021 
    
Official Course Syllabi 2020-2021 [ARCHIVED CATALOG]

Course Syllabi


 

Humanities

  
  • HUMN 1300 - Theater Arts

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: None

    This course is designed to increase understanding and appreciation of the theater. Discussions, writing, and performance activities will focus on theater history, dramatic writing, and production elements. Related field trips are a part of the course.

    Contact Hours: 4
    Billable Contact Hours: 4
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe characteristics of theater in key historical periods.

    Objectives: During the course, students will:

    1. Identify types of drama.
    2. Discuss styles of presentation.
    3. Identify the physical aspects of a variety of theaters.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to discuss the differences between reading dramatic works and other forms of fiction.

    Objectives: During the course, students will:

    1. Utilize vocabulary of dramatic writing in discussions and written work.
    2. Discuss strategies useful in approaching the reading of dramatic works.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain the functions of various production personnel.

    Objectives: During the course, students will:

    1. Identify production personnel.
    2. Discuss activities and responsibilities associated with each position.
    3. Utilize vocabulary of production in discussions and written work.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify the physical components of the theater.

    Objectives: During the course, students will:

    1. Discuss the front of the house.
    2. Discuss the auditorium.
    3. Discuss backstage.
    4. Utilize vocabulary of theater physical components in discussions and written work.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to critically analyze a theater production.

    Objectives: During the course, students will:

    1. Discuss the role of the audience.
    2. Discuss the role of a theatrical critic.
    3. Discuss components of dramatic criticism.
    4. Compose a critical review of a theatrical presentation.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to apply theatrical knowledge acquired in the course in the production and presentation of a playlet.

    Objectives: During the course, students will:

    1. Write dialog.
    2. Construct a set.
    3. Direct the production.
    4. Perform.
    5. Utilize vocabulary of theater and drama in discussions and written work.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Week Topic

    1. Course introduction, limitations of a survey course
      Theater history
    2. Theater history
    3. Theater history
    4. Theater history
    5. Architecture of a script
      How to read a play
      Elements of criticism
    6. Play reading (hopefully of a play that will be performed in the area during the term)
    7. Play reading (hopefully of a play that will be performed in the area during the term)
    8. Presentation of student‐generated critical reviews
      Comparison of student reviews to published reviews
    9. “Architecture” of a theater
      Field trip to Macomb Center
    10. The “players” and their functions
    11. The “players” and their functions
    12. Organize production teams; begin script writing
    13. Script writing
    14. Rehearsal
    15. Rehearsal
    16. Performance

    Primary Faculty
    Scott, Stuart
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • HUMN 1460 - The Film As Art

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: None

    Analysis and evaluation of a variety of films as art media. Aesthetic considerations in film techniques; production and editing. Important feature films as well as film shorts will be screened and provide the basis for discussion.

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, the student will able to analyze the basic components of film.

    Objectives: During the course, students will:

    1. Compare film types.
    2. Explore the elements of art that contribute to the cinematic experience.
    3. Recognize basic concepts that all films share.
    4. Determine the focus within a film and its relationship to the dramatic question.

     

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to analyze aspects of acting, character, and story as they pertain to film.

    Objectives: During the course, students will use appropriate terminology to analyze:

    1. approaches to acting theory.
    2. actor attributes.
    3. character roles.
    4. elements of the story within a film:

     

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to analyze aspects of the mise en scene as it applies to film.

    Objectives: During the course, students will use appropriate terminology to give rationale as to the effectiveness of lighting, costuming, properties, sets, locations, and make-up within:

    1. Historicity.
    2. Verisimilitude.
    3. Character development.
    4. Continuity.

     

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to analyze aspects of the cinematography within a film.

    Objectives: During the course, the student will use appropriate terminology to give rationale as to the effectiveness of cinematography as it applies to the:

    1. Frame
    2. Focus
    3. Vantage point.
    4. Point of View.
    5. Camera movement.
    6. Lens movement.

     

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to analyze aspects of the editing within a film.

    Objectives: During the course, the student will use appropriate terminology to give rationale as to the effectiveness of the editing as it applies to the:

    1. Structural design.
    2. Pacing.
    3. Montage.
    4. Narrative advancement.

     

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to analyze aspects of the sound within a film.

    Objectives: During the course, the student will use appropriate terminology to give rationale as to the effectiveness of sound as it applies within the:

    1. Film type and genre.
    2. Synchronization.
    3. Editing.
    4. Continuity.
    5. Source.

     

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to analyze aspects of the music within a film.

    Objectives: During the course, the student will use appropriate terminology to give rationale as to the effectiveness of music as it applies within the:

    1. Elements.
    2. Functions.
    3. Source.
    4. Continuity.

     

    Outcome 8: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to analyze cultural relevance within a film.

    Objectives: During the course, students will reflect on aspects that are specific to a culture within a foreign film:

    1. Visual elements.
    2. Formal elements.
    3. Cultural markers.

     

    Outcome 9: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to contextualize historically relevant aspects of film.

    Objectives: During the course, students will be able to historically contextualize the:

    1. genesis of film.
    2. significance of the rating system.
    3. characteristics of various eras, movements, and novelties.
    4. technical developments of film.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Testing - quiz and full examination form.
    2. Classroom discussion - student participation in general discussion(s) and specific response to direct questioning.
    3. Writing - formal, out‐of‐class papers; informal, in‐class exercises.

    Primary Faculty
    Scott, Stuart
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • HUMN 1473 - Selected Studies in Film: Gangsters

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: None

    A course to permit the student further development of specialized interest in film. This will be done through background readings, screening, and analytical writing concerning major motion pictures. Such topics as film history, the documentary, film production, or the study of a major film artist will be offered.

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to discuss “the gang” as a subjective definition.

    Objectives:

    1. Discuss the historical record of American gangster activity.
    2. Discuss the myth of the American gangster created by Hollywood.
    3. Differentiate between the subjective content of the narrative film and the objective nature of the documentary.
    4. Compare/contrast history vs. Hollywood.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to interpret the genre of gangster films as a reflection of America at large.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify major films and filmmakers of the genre.
    2. Discuss the portrayal of gangsters and gangster activity by Hollywood.
    3. Define positive American cultural values.
    4. Compare/contrast culturally‐accepted values with values depicted by gangsters in films.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to apply the concept of the epic to gangster films.

    Objectives:

    1. Define epic.
    2. Analyze gangster films in terms of an epic.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Films may vary from one semester to the next, at the discretion of the instructor.
    Class discussions precede/follow each film.
    Class Content

    1. Distribution of course material
      1. General introduction
      2. Scope of the course
      3. Use of the journal
      4. Film: Point Blank (1967)
    2. Film: Taking of Pelham One Two Three (1974)
    3. Film: Thief (1981)
    4. Film: The Usual Suspects (1995)
    5. Film: The Long Good Friday (1979)
    6. Film: Bound (1996)
    7. Film: Last Seduction (1994)
    8. Film: Bonnie and Clyde (1967)
    9. Film: Grifters (1990)
    10. Film: Donnie Brasco (1997)
    11. Begin Godfather project
    12. Film: Friends of Eddie Coyle (1973)
    13. Film: Reservoir Dogs (1992)
    14. Quiz/discussion: Godfather
      1. Film: Things Change (1988)
    15. Film: Goodfellas (1990)
    16. Film: Fargo (1996)
    17. Class and self‐evaluations

    Primary Faculty
    Scott, Stuart
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • HUMN 1476 - Selected Studies in Film: Science Fiction

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: None

    A course to permit the student further development of specialized interest in film. This will be done through background readings, screening, and analytical writing concerning major motion pictures. Such topics as film history, the documentary, film production, or the study of a major film artist will be offered.

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify the conflict between science and authority, as portrayed in film.

    Objectives:

    1. Discuss the goals of science in approaching unusual/unexplained things and events.
    2. Discuss the goals of the military, the police, national security in approaching unusual/unexplained things and events.
    3. Compare/contrast these two approaches.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify three major narrative plot structures of science fiction film.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify major films and filmmakers of the genre.
    2. Discuss Invasion plot structure.
    3. Discuss Off Earth plot structure.
    4. Discuss Futuristic plot structure.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to document the growth of special effects used in science fiction films.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the types of special effects used in early through current science fiction films.
    2. Discuss technological advances enabling the advancement of special effects in science fiction films.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Films may vary from one semester to the next, at the discretion of the instructor.
    Class discussions precede/follow each film.
    Class Content

    1. Distribution of course material
      1. General introduction
      2. Scope of the course
      3. Use of the journal
      4. Film: Trip to the Moon (1902)
    2. Film: Them (1954)
    3. Film: The Day the Earth Stood Still (1951)
    4. Film: The Thing (1951)
    5. Film: The Thing (1982)
    6. Film: Colossus: The Forbin Project (1970)
    7. Film: Terminator (1984)
    8. Film: Andromeda Strain (1971)
    9. Film: Blade Runner (1982)
    10. Film: Destination Moon (1950)
    11. Film: Alien (1979)
    12. Film: to be determined
    13. Film: to be determined
    14. Film: Galaxy Quest (1999)
    15. Film: to be determined
    16. Film: to be determined
    17. Class Evaluations

    Primary Faculty
    Scott, Stuart
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • HUMN 1700 - Comparative Religions

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: None

    The course begins by exploring the dimensions and functions of religion in the lives of human beings. Then basic beliefs of a variety of eastern and western religions are surveyed and discussed, noting similarities and differences among these traditions. Field trips to a variety of religious services supplement classroom lecture and discussion.

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
     Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the major characteristics of five world religions.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify and discuss major themes in the religions studied.
    2. Identify and discuss core beliefs of the religions studied.
    3. Describe and discuss aspects of the year and life cycle of adherents of the religions studied.
    4. Discuss the development of the religions studied in a historical context.
    5. Discuss customs and habits associated with religion and explain how they reflect the society.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to compare and contrast the religions studied.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify fundamental similarities and differences between religious ideas like: afterlife, evil, the human condition, etc.
    2. Describe how particular religious concepts are reinforced by the history or structure of the religion.
    3. Identify and discuss different approaches to current events and contemporary topics within the religions studied.
    4. Discuss the impact Western society has had on traditional views and values in the religions studied.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of the ritual practices and gathering places of the religions studied.

    Objectives:

    1. Attend 3 of 5 field trips to various religious locations.
    2. Compose response papers that reflect understanding of activities and rituals witnesses.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Week Topic

    1. Orientation: Syllabus and course overview
      Brief introduction to the study of religion and theories of study
    2. Hinduism: Historical periods and development
    3. Hinduism: Major concepts and beliefs
    4. Hinduism: Contemporary movements, life and year cycles

    Test 1

    1. Buddhism: Historical periods and development
    2. Buddhism: Major concepts and beliefs
    3. Buddhism: Contemporary movements, life and year cycles

    Test 2

    1. Judaism: Historical periods and development
    2. Judaism: Major concepts and beliefs
    3. Judaism: Contemporary movements, life and year cycles

    Test 3

    1. Christianity: Historical periods and development
    2. Christianity: Major concepts and beliefs
    3. Christianity: Contemporary movements, life and year cycles

    Test 4

    1. Islam: Historical periods and development
    2. Islam: Major concepts and beliefs
    3. Islam: Contemporary movements, life and year cycles
      Final Exam

    Primary Faculty
    Messana, Jason
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • HUMN 1750 - Introduction to Mythology

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: None

    An introductory outline of myths and legends from ancient Greece, Rome, the Middle East and Northern Europe, together with more recent and non-European parallels. Recurring themes and structures will be examined. Students will be introduced in stages to the subject matter for its own sake while analyzing the human thought behind each myth, plus its influence on literature, art and film.

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify characters common to Greek and/or Roman myths, in terms of name, Greek-Roman equivalency, functions, and attributes.

    Objectives: In class discussions, in response to video presentations, and on multiple choice tests:

    1. Identify Greek-Roman equivalency of mythological character names.
    2. Discuss functions of mythological characters.
    3. Discuss attributes of mythological characters.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to identify or recognize sources of myths from ancient Greek and Roman poets to recent collectors, and to locate such sources in their appropriate geographical and chronological context.

    Objectives: Discuss the following works in terms of general context in time and place:

    1. Ancient Greek myths: Homer (especially Odyssey), Hesiod (especially Theogony).
    2. Roman sources: Vergil (Aeneid) and/or Ovid (Metamorphoses).
    3. Other mythologies (substantial samples of any two of the following: Norse or other Germanic material; Native American myths; Indian or other Asian traditions; Hawaiian myths.)

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to apply theories which have been developed to interpret specific motifs in myth.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify at least 6 of the following modes of interpretation.
      1. Allegory
      2. Euhemerism
      3. Solar imagery and/or other implicit nature-etiology
      4. Problems of historical origin (when given in class)
      5. Linguistic issues (when given in class)
      6. Ritual-based etiologies
      7. Shamanic references
      8. Psychological interpretations (including Jung’s archetype theory and Campbell’s application of it to the neo-subjectivist approach)
      9. Structural analysis (including Propp’s linear approach and Lévi-Strauss’ non-linear polarization technique)
    2. Associate above theories with an appropriate ancient or modern theorist.
    3. Apply such theories to the students’ own discussions (in class, in essays and on tests) in order to elucidate multiple meanings from specified myths.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to exhibit use of mythological terminology.

    Objectives: Define and use (in class, in essays, and on tests) the following terms.

    1. Allegory
    2. Euhemerism
    3. Etiological myth
    4. Solar myth
    5. Lunar myth
    6. Chthonic myth
    7. Katabasis
    8. Initiatory ritual
    9. Shamanism
    10. Totemism
    11. Motif
    12. Structure
    13. Archetype
    14. Stereotype
    15. Trickster
    16. Linear sequence
    17. Polarization

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to analyze myths.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the structure of myths.
    2. Assign myths to specific categories (such as trickster-myths, creation-myths, etiologies, allegories, etc.).
    3. Critically analyze myths.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    The term’s work will be scheduled in the following units.
    UNIT 1 Attitudes to myth; definitions; Modern critics and their contributions to the subject.
    UNIT 2 Greek gods and goddesses, their roles and functions, especially in Homer’s Odyssey. Monsters, Tricksters, importance of the Psychopomp. UNIT 3 Modern critics (continued): structural devices and observations. Introduction to Norse culture and myths. Examples of Creation-Myths.
    UNIT 4 Greek creation myths. Symbolism; Sympathetic Magic; Totem; Taboo. Psychology-based criticism of myths.
    Attitudes to life vs. death; Afterlife, Underworld, Immortality, Sacral Kingship and fertility ritual.
    UNIT 5 Conclusion of the course: Application of all criticism-theories to the Odyssey as a whole. At the end of each unit there will be a Unit Test.
    Test #5 is the Final Examination.
    Primary Faculty
    Farrow, Jim
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • HUMN 2000 - Introduction to Asian Religions & Culture

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: None

    The religious traditions of India, China and Japan form the backdrop for studying the impact of religion on community and culture. Special focus will be on the interaction of religion with community life and social change in the twentieth century.

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to describe the major characteristics of Asian religions.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify and discuss major themes in the religions studied.
    2. Identify and discuss core beliefs of the religions studied.
    3. Describe and discuss aspects of the year and life cycle of adherents of the religions studied.
    4. Discuss the development of the religions studied in a historical context.
    5. Discuss customs and habits associated with religion and explain how they reflect the society.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to compare and contrast the religions and cultures studied.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify fundamental similarities and differences between ideas like: afterlife, evil, the human condition, etc.
    2. Describe how particular religious and cultural concepts are reinforced by the history or structure of the religion.
    3. Identify and discuss different approaches to current events and contemporary topics within the cultures studied.
    4. Discuss the impact Western society has had on traditional views and values in the religions/cultures studied.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Week Topic

    1. Orientation: Syllabus and course overview
      Brief introduction to the study of religion and theories of study
    2. India and Hinduism: Historical periods and development
    3. Hinduism: Major concepts and beliefs
    4. India: Contemporary movements, life and year cycles. Politics and religion

    Test 1

    1. China - Ancient history and philosophical trends
    2. China - Confucianism
    3. China - Taoism
    4. Japan - Ancient history and philosophy
    5. Japan - Shinto
    6. Japan - Religion and the Arts
    7. Japan - Shinto and the State
    8. China and Japan - Comparison of thought
    9. Buddhism: Historical periods and development
    10. Buddhism: Major concepts and beliefs
    11. Buddhism: Contemporary movements, life and year cycles
    12. Final comparisons and evaluation of Asian culture and religion
      Final Exam

    Primary Faculty
    Messana, Jason
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • HUMN 2100 - Western Religious Traditions: Judaism, Christianity, & Islam

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: None

    HUMN 2100 focuses on the traditions of Judaism, Christianity, and Islam. Through textbook, primary sources, and other materials, students will develop an understanding of the historical as well as modern-day manifestations of the religions covered. By the end of the class, students will possess an understanding of the history, system, and dynamics of these traditions. This class will also look at how these religions are being portrayed and dealt with in popular culture and the media.

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to describe the major characteristics of the three monotheistic religions:

    Objectives:

    1. Identify and discuss major themes in the religions studied.
    2. Identify and discuss core beliefs of the religions studied
    3. Describe and discuss aspects of the year and life cycle of adherents of the religions studied.
    4. Discuss the development of the religions studied in a historical context.
    5. Discuss customs and habits associated with religion and explain how they reflect the beliefs.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to compare and contrast the religions studied.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify fundamental similarities and differences between religious ideas like: afterlife, evil, the human condition, etc.
    2. Describe how particular religious concepts are reinforced by the history or structure of the religion.
    3. Identify and discuss different approaches to current events and contemporary topics within the religions studied.
    4. Discuss the impact Western society and the media has had on traditional views and values in the religions studied.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of the ritual practices and gathering places of the religions studied.

    Objectives:

    1. Attend 3 field trips to various religious locations.
    2. Compose response papers that reflect understanding of activities and rituals witnessed.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Week Topic

    1. Orientation: Syllabus and course overview
      Brief introduction to the study of religion and theories of study
    2. Comparative analysis of Monotheistic systems covered in class.
    3. Judaism: History and development
    4. Judaism: Scriptures and theology
    5. Judaism: System of faith and practices of belief
    6. Judaism: Jewish modernism and Judaism test
    7. Christianity: History and development
    8. Christianity: Scriptures and theology
    9. Christianity: System of faith and Practices of belief
    10. Christianity: contemporary issues and Christianity test
    11. Islam: History and development
    12. Islam: Scriptures and theology
    13. Islam: System of faith and practices of belief
    14. Islam: politics, fundamentalism, and Islam test
    15. Modernity and Monotheism- challenges to the 3 religions
    16. Wrap up, Review, and Final Exam.

    Primary Faculty
    Messana, Jason
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


International Studies

  
  • INTL 2000 - Introduction to Latin America

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: None

    (Humanities credit) This multidisciplinary course will draw on the arts, humanities, social science, history, and geography to examine significant questions using Latin America as the basis. These questions relate to the encounter of cultures, of forging community, notions of rights, revolution, and dependence and change in a globalizing world. The course will also explore an understanding of the roots of Latin America civilization with its ethnic diversity, including a profile on the Latin Americans descendants in the United States and an analysis of the role of military and US policies toward Latin America, the impact of the external debt, free trade agreements and their effects on the environment.

    Contact Hours: 4
    Billable Contact Hours: 4
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will gain understanding of Latin American people and their culture.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify and discuss significant topics of Latin American geography and history.
    2. Identify and discuss significant topics of Latin American politics and economics.
    3. Identify and discuss different art expressions in Latin America.
    4. Recognize the contribution of Latin American culture to the depths and breadths of humanities and social sciences.

    Outcome 2: Upon the completion of this course, students will gain better understanding of the diverse ethnic groups and cultures of the world and the special challenges of developing regions of the globe.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify ethnic and cultural differences in the world in general.
    2. Identify ethnic and cultural related challenges of developing regions.

    Outcome 3: Upon the completion of this course, students will recognize some of the rights and responsibilities of citizens in a democratic society and interconnected world, focusing on Latin Americans in the United States.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify some of the rights of Latin Americans in the United States.
    2. Identify some of the responsibilities of Latin Americans in the United States.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to apply critical thinking and writing skills to Latin American related topics and issues.

    Objectives:

    1. Discuss Analytical methods and processes.
    2. Write essays presenting critical analysis.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Orientation: Syllabus and course overview
      Present situation of Latin America (statistical portrait)
    2. Geography of the Land: Regional overview (map assignments) - North and Central America, Caribbean and South America
    3. Pre-Columbian Civilizations: The Mayas, the Aztecs, the Inca Empire
    4. Indigenous Groups and Iberian Invasions: Understanding cultural and ethnic background of the Iberia peninsula and its impact on the new World
    5. African Slavery: The African contribution to Latin America civilization; the race mixing
    6. Independence: Rebellion, the Spanish American patriotism and the unfinished revolution
    7. Exam 1
    8. The Postcolonial Blues: The liberal disappointment, the Caudillo leadership, the difference of Brazil; Journals due
    9. Nationalism and Revolutions: The new immigrants, Populist leaders
      Cuban revolution - Zapatistas in Mexico
    10. The Reaction: The church in Latin America - Argentinean dictatorship, Development and Decay - The war in the Falklands; Exam 2
    11. Military Rule: The Chilean coup. Cold wars in Central America - The “Ethnic cleansing” in Guatemala
    12. Environment: Deforestation, pesticides and pollution - the vanishing rain forest
    13. Women’s work: From homemakers to presidents - women writers Latin American fiction
    14. Industrialization and Department Crisis: NAFTA - The politics of corruption
      Poverty, Drugs; Paper due
    15. Latinos in the United States: Migration and the quest for identity; Journals due
    16. Review - Final Exam

    Primary Faculty
    Ramos, Maria
    Secondary Faculty
    Williams, Susanna
    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • INTL 2010 - Introduction to Russia & Eastern Europe

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: None

    (formerly INTL 2913)

    (Social Science credit) This course introduces students to the geography, history, economics, politics, and arts of Russia and Eastern Europe. This interdisciplinary introduction will help students better understand the values and experiences of other peoples as the world becomes a global community.

    Contact Hours: 4
    Billable Contact Hours: 4
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of the impact of geography on economics and politics in the world in general, as well as Russia and Eastern Europe specifically.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify general principles of geography as they relate to the pursuit of national security.
    2. Discuss geographic characteristics of Russia and Eastern Europe as they relate to the pursuit of national security.
    3. Identify general principles of geography as they relate to economic growth.
    4. Discuss specific geographic characteristics of Russia and Eastern Europe as they relate to economic growth.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of the peoples and cultures of Russia and Eastern Europe.

    Objectives:

    1. Analyze and criticize current religious and political conflicts in the area and contrast and compare the geopolitical processes of nationalism and regionalism.
    2. Identify the major languages, religious and folk customs, and traditions of the area and explain how they have contributed to popular culture.
    3. Discuss trends in literature, music, and film and explain how they reflect the region’s response to social and political modernization.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of how diverse races and cultures of the world adapted to modernization and globalization.

    Objectives:

    1. Discuss the distribution of resources across Eastern Europe and Russia and how they impact economic growth.
    2. Identify the basics of international markets and trade and illustrate them with examples from Russia and Eastern Europe.
    3. Describe how current economic events are tied to this region.
    4. Analyze the patterns and consequence of economic policies on the economic growth of Russia and Eastern Europe.
    5. Discuss the customs, rules, and traditions influencing the making of political decisions and explain how they reflect the culture of Russia and the Eastern European countries.
    6. Locate the main political arenas in which decisions are made.
    7. Identify the main participants in political decision-making and explain how they interact to establish policy.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to recognize how interconnected the world is.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify general principles of globalization.
    2. Discuss Russia’s place in global economy.
    3. Discuss Eastern Europe’s place in global economy.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to apply general analytical skills in writing about Russian and Eastern European issues.

    Objectives:

    1. Write papers reacting to journal articles read.
    2. Compose written reactions to films viewed.
    3. Compose a written critique to a book read.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Introduction and Definition of Russia and Eastern Europe
      1. Geographic Definition
      2. Political Definition
      3. Ethnic Definition
      4. Cultural Definition
    2. Geography
      1. General principles of geography as they relate to the pursuit of national security
      2. Specific geographic characteristics of Russia and Eastern Europe as they relate to pursuit of national security
      3. General principles of geography as they relate to economic growth
      4. Specific geographic characteristics of Russia and Eastern Europe as they relate to economic growth
    3. Political Culture
      1. General principles of nationalism and political and social culture
      2. Specific political and social culture of Western Civilization
      3. Specific political and social culture and nationalism of Russia and Eastern Europe
      4. Artistic expressions of Russia and Eastern Europe social and political culture and nationalism
    4. Modernization
      1. General definition of modernization
      2. General aspects of social development and mobilization
      3. General principles of economic growth and development
      4. Consequences of rapid economic growth
      5. Social mobilization/slow economic growth
      6. General principles of political modernization
    5. Modernization Phase I
      1. General principles of mercantilism
      2. Specific Russian and Eastern European mercantilist policies
    6. Modernization Phase II
      1. General principles of Marxism/Leninism
      2. Specific Russian and Mid Eastern European Marxist/Leninist policies
    7. Modernization Phase III
      1. General Principles of Colonial Liberalism
      2. Specific Russian and Mid Eastern European Liberalism policies
    8. Globalization
      1. General principles of globalization
      2. Russia’s place in global economy
      3. Eastern Europe’s place in global economy

    Primary Faculty
    Flemming, Gary
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Williams-Chehmani, Angie
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • INTL 2300 - Introduction to Japan

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: None

    (formerly INTL 2911)

    (Humanities credit) This course draws on the arts, humanities, social science, history, and geography of Japan. This course discusses the encounter of cultures, centrality of family, veneration of nature, synthesis of foreign ideas, and Japan’s role in the global community.

    Contact Hours: 4
    Billable Contact Hours: 4
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe major characteristics of Japan - the country, the people, and the culture.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify and discuss significant topics of Japanese geography, history, and economics, including how they relate to other areas of the world.
    2. Identify and discuss significant topics of Japanese art, history, religion, and society.
    3. Describe and discuss aspects of Japanese popular and traditional culture, including the significance of change in a traditional society.
    4. Discuss the development of Japanese political phenomena.
    5. Discuss customs and habits (both cultural and linguistic) and explain how they reflect Japanese values.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to compare and contrast Japanese approaches to economics, education, warfare, and individual and group responsibilities with those of the United States.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify fundamental social differences between Japanese and American culture.
    2. Describe how Japanese culture assimilated and modified various concepts and practices from other cultures.
    3. Identify and discuss different artistic expressions in Japan and what is uniquely non-Western about them.
    4. Discuss the impact Western society has had on traditional Japanese concepts and contemporary Japanese society.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate competency in writing related to Japan.

    Objectives:

    1. Research topics related to Japan.
    2. Compose a paper that evaluates Japanese concepts (social, religious, artistic) in light of a global community.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Orientation: Syllabus and course overview
      Thumbnail Sketch of Japan: education, religion, economy, government, industry, etc.
    2. Geography of the Land: Japan and the Pacific Rim, how Japan’s geography influenced various cultural expressions
    3. Arrival of ethnic groups on the Japanese Islands: Ainu, Japanese
      The early history of Japan: Jomon, Yayoi, Kofun periods
    4. Political and Economic beginnings: The Yamato ascendancy and the establishment of the Imperial House
      Rice agriculture and family identity
    5. Religion in Japan: Shinto and Buddhism from the Asuka to the Heian periods

    Test 1

    1. Art and literature from classical to modern Japan: Genji and Heike, Hokusai and Mishima
    2. Philosophy and Theology: ‘awe in the face of nature’
    3. Feudalism: The rise of the Shogunate and the Warring States period
    4. From Isolation to Modernity: The Tokugawa Period
    5. Isolation during Tokugawa Japan: Flowering of Japanese culture and the Samurai ideal
    6. The Black Ships: Fall of the Tokugawa and forced interaction with the West

    Test 2

    1. Modernity and Militarization: The Pacific War
    2. Reconstruction: Politics and the economics of a modern global Japan
    3. Godzilla and the homeless Samurai: Japan’s economic prosperity and the burst of the bubble economy
    4. Anime and Zen: :Japan’s popular culture and its impact on the West
    5. Review
      Final Exam

    Primary Faculty
    Messana, Jason
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • INTL 2800 - Introduction to the Middle East

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: None

    This multi-disciplinary introductory course offers a general survey of the arts, humanities, social science, history and geography of the Middle East. Topics will be drawn from historical and contemporary issues relevant to the analysis of the Middle East as a complex and rich regional system within a changing globalized world. The course will also explore Middle Eastern diversity and its expressions in music, art, literature, and film produced by the cultures of the region. Special attention will be given to the consistent contact between the West and the Middle East, beginning in the middle ages through the crusades and perpetuating to current times, as manifested in different western economic and military policies implemented in the region. In addition, the curriculum will touch on critical issues such as the veil and women’s rights, the Middle-Eastern experience in the US, the war on terror, the Israeli-Palestinian conflict, and the Arab Spring. A central objective of the course is targeted towards increasing sensitivity to racial bias and improving students’ awareness of multicultural issues.

    Contact Hours: 4
    Billable Contact Hours: 4
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate knowledge of Middle Eastern peoples and their cultures.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify and discuss significant topics of Middle Eastern geography and history.
    2. Identify and discuss significant topics of Middle Eastern politics and economics.
    3. Identify and discuss different art expressions in and about the Middle East.
    4. Recognize the contribution of Middle Eastern culture and sciences to the depths and breadths of humanities and social sciences.

    Outcome 2: Upon the completion of this course, students will be able to compare and contrast the diverse ethnic groups and cultures of the world and the special challenges of developing regions of the globe.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify ethnic and cultural differences in the world in general.
    2. Identify ethnic, social, and cultural related challenges of developing regions.

    Outcome 3: Upon the completion of this course, students will recognize some of the rights and responsibilities of citizens in a democratic society and interconnected world, focusing on Middle Easterners in the United States.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify some of the rights of Middle Easterners in the United States.
    2. Identify some of the responsibilities of Middle Easterners in the United States.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to apply critical thinking and writing skills to topics and issues related to the Middle East.

    Objectives:

    1. Discuss Analytical methods and processes.
    2. Write essays presenting critical analysis.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Week 1:
    Syllabus: Course and student introduction
    The Middle East: Myths and stereotypes… (quiz)
    Geography, climate and population of the Modern Middle East

    Week 2:
    The Middle East before Islam : the pattern of Mesopotamia’s conquest; conquest, consolidation, expansion, degeneration, conquest - The Sumerians, the Babylonians, the Chaldeans, the Persians…

    Week 3:
    The advent of Islam : Mohammed, the divinely-guided caliphes and the Umayyads and Abassid dinasties.

    Week 4:
    The Golden Age and foreign assaults: Cordoba in Andalousia and Baghdad - the Crusaders from the west and the Monghols from the east.

    Week 5:
    Rebirth after the Mongol Holocaust: The Othoman empire, the Safavids and the Moghuls.

    Week 6:
    Islam, Empire of faith: In-class viewing of documentary - Exam 1

    Week 7:
    West comes East: Merchants and consultants - the need for reform, industrialization, and constitutions.

    Week 8:
    Western colonialism: Sykes-Picot Agreement, the birth of the Jewish state and the rise of secular nationalists - Exam 2

    Week 9:
    The crisis of Modernity: The Arab defeats to Israel, the Palestinian question and the consolidation of dictatorships - Paper topic due

    Week 10:
    The United States and the Middle East: The cold war and the politics of oil, the Iranian revolution, the Iraq wars and the question of terrorism - Paper outline due

    Week 11:
    Political Economy of Development: Analysis of indicators of economic development - Incoherence of economic structures and development strategies in oil-rich and oil-poor countries - Economic costs of war and developmental challenges in the global economy.

    Week 12:
    Political Participation and Democratic Transition: Formal and informal networks of participation - Social movements, women and and the Arab Spring - Political Islam or the dilemma of democratization? - First draft of paper due.

    Week 13:
    Hibridity: post-colonial Middle Eastern identities and its expressions in the Arts and the Arab-American experience - Exam 3

    Week 14:
    Middle Eastern story-telling : from the oral tradition to the modern novel , “The Arabian Nights” and Tayeb Salih’s “Season of migration to the north”.

    Week 15:
    Orientalism: the manufacturing of the Middle Eastern ‘Other’ in Western arts - In-class viewing of the documentary “Reel Bad Arabs” - Final Paper due.

    Week 16:
    Review and Final Exam


    Primary Faculty
    Rahmouni El Idrissi, Amine
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


Italian Language

  
  • ITAL 1460 - Elementary Italian 1

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: None

    (formerly ITAL 1260

    This course is designed to introduce students to the Italian speaking world and Italian vocabulary and grammatical structures necessary to express personal meaning on basic topics. Students will engage in these activities within contextualized cultural settings. The vocabulary and grammatical structures are integrated into interactive and communicative activities that emphasize all four language skills: speaking, listening, reading, and writing. Students are required to use computer based technology to practice these skills.

    Contact Hours: 4
    Billable Contact Hours: 4
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate competency in basic oral language skills.

    Objectives:

    1. Pronounce individual sounds, including appropriate intonation and stress, with little or no interference in order to be understood by a Native Speaker.
    2. Form and produce entire sentences with no hesitation and natural pauses.
    3. Engage in small conversations with a Native Speaker in the present, future, or past tense about the following topics (includes both initiating conversations as well as responding appropriately to speech of a Native Speaker):
      1. Greet each other, introduce yourself and say goodbye.
      2. Exchange personal information and ask and answer questions.
      3. Discuss your classes and school day.
      4. Describe people and physical states and needs.
      5. Express likes and dislikes.
      6. Talk about family and family relationships.
      7. Describe residences.
      8. Indicate ownership and possession.
      9. Talk about season, weather, dates and schedules.
      10. Talk about cloth items.
      11. Talk about sports and leisure activities.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the ability to use basic Italian vocabulary.

    Objectives: Regarding topics such as school, work, free time, family, and social interactions:

    1. Use vocabulary when speaking.
    2. Respond to a Native Speaker who has used the vocabulary.
    3. Use vocabulary in writing.
    4. Demonstrate reading comprehension skills by discussing subject matter and/or answering questions based on the passage read.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the ability to use basic grammar structures in speaking and writing.

    Objectives:

    1. Conjugate regular and irregular present tense verbs.
    2. Achieve adjective and article agreement.
    3. Formulate questions and answers.
    4. Conjugate reflexive, reciprocal and modal verbs.
    5. Use possessive adjectives and pronouns.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to recognize and discuss aspects of Italian culture.

    Objectives:

    1. Recognize and discuss some basic geographical, economic and cultural aspects of various Italian regions.
    2. Compare cultural differences.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Preliminary Chapter

    1. The Italian Pronunciation (use textbook together with workbook to practice various sounds)

    Capitolo Preliminare: Piacere! Io mi chiamo
    Vocabulary: Alphabet, sounds and pronunciation
    Greetings and Salutations, Questions and Expressions, Months of the year and dates, Numbers

    Grammar: The verbs to be (essere and stare)
    Come si dice you?
    Come si dice Mr., Miss, Professor,….?
    Come si dice e-mail and website addresses

    Culture: Italia: Piazza del Mediterraneo
    Andiamo in piazza!
    Piazza della Signoria (Firenze)
    Piazza di Spagna (Roma)
    Piazza del Campo (Siena)
    Piazza San Marco (Venezia)
    Video: Presentazioni
    Esamino sul Capitolo Preliminare (orale)

    Capitolo 1: In piazza dopo le lezioni
    Vocabulary: The classroom, Subject matter, Description and colors, Nationalities!
    Grammar: Nouns, Articles, Adjectives

    Grammar: Present tense of avere and idiomatic uses
    Come si dice I like it?
    Reading & Writing: Leggiamo! La Feltrinelli Libri e Musica Scriviamo!
    Write a Postcard about a Piazza
    Learning, Reading and Writing Strategies

    Culture: Nel cuore della regione: Campania and Puglia
    Andiamo in piazza!
    Piazza San Domenico Maggiore (Napoli)
    Piazza Sant’Oronzo (Lecce)
    Angolo culturale
    Video: Parliamo di scuola
    Esamino sul Capitolo 1 (orale e scritio)
    Return exam on chapter 1
    Review for Midterm Exam
    MIDTERM Exam in class

    Capitolo 2: La vita in piazza e in famiglia
    Vocabulary: Family and extended family, Family relationships, Residence and furnishings, Places inside and outside of the residence
    Grammar: Possessive adjectives and pronouns, Regular verbs ending in -are, Reflexive verbs and reciprocal actions in -are
    Grammar: Irregular verbs in -are (andare, dare, fare, stare), Come si dice ‘s (possession / ownership)?
    Reading & Writing: Leggiamo! Nonni e nipoti, benvenuti in famiglia Scriviamo! Write a narrative about your family
    Learning, Reading and Writing Strategies

    Culture: Nel cuore della regione: Veneto
    Andiamo in piazza!
    Piazza San Marco (Venezia)
    Piazza Bra (Verona)
    Angolo culturale Video: Dove festeggi le feste di famiglia?

    Esamino sul Capitolo 2 (orale e scritio)

    Capitolo 3: Lo sport in piazza
    Vocabulary: Weather and seasons, Sports activities, Places and locations in the city, Directions
    Grammar: Simple and compounds prepositions, Verbs ending in -ere, Modal verbs (dovere, potere, volere), Verbs ending in -ire, Come si dice what time is it?

    Reading & Writing: Leggiamo! GiocAosta
    Scriviamo! Write a dialogue about past times
    Learning, Reading and Writing Strategies

    Culture: Nel cuore della regione: Piemonte and Valle d’Aosta
    Andiamo in piazza!
    Piazza Castello (Torino)
    Piazza Emile Chanoux (Aosta)
    Angolo culturale
    Video: Tempo libero e sport

    Esamino sul Capitolo 3 (orale e scritio) a. Review for Oral and Written Exam

    FINAL EXAMS

    1. Written Exam
    2. Oral Exam

    Primary Faculty
    Williams, Susanna
    Secondary Faculty
    Ramos, Maria
    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ITAL 1470 - Elementary Italian 2

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: ITAL 1460 or two or more years of high school Italian

    (formerly ITAL 1270)

    This course continues students’ development of Italian language and culture by building and expanding on the culture, vocabulary and language structures learned in ITAL 1460. New language functions will be presented in meaningful activities that emphasize all four language skills: speaking, listening, reading, and writing and allow for further cultural exposure. Students are required to use computer based technology to practice these skills.

    Contact Hours: 4
    Billable Contact Hours: 4
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate competency in oral language skills beyond Elementary Italian 1.

    Objectives:

    1. Pronounce individual sounds, including appropriate intonation and stress, with little or no interference in order to be understood by a Native Speaker.
    2. Form and produce entire sentences with no hesitation and natural pauses.
    3. Engage in small conversations with a Native Speaker in the present, future, and past tense about the following topics (includes both initiating conversations as well as responding appropriately to speech of a Native Speaker):
      1. Talk about music, theater and cinema.
      2. Talk about leisure activities.
      3. Refer to people and things that have already been mentioned.
      4. Narrate and describe memories of events.
      5. Talk about holidays, traditions and celebrations.
      6. Recount childhood and adolescent experiences and recall childhood friends.
      7. Talk about social and cultural events.
      8. Talk about ordering a meal in a restaurant.
      9. Talk about grocery shopping, quantities, preparing meals.
      10. Discuss likes and dislikes.
      11. Talk about professions and internships.
      12. Talk about things we had done.
      13. Talk about vacations and taking trips.
      14. Discuss methods of transportations and Make hotel or rooms reservations.
      15. Express plans and intentions.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate competency in basic oral language skills beyond Elementary Italian 1.

    Objectives: Regarding topics such as traveling, grocery shopping, restaurants and food, social and cultural events, holidays and traditions, professions, childhood events and future plans:

    1. Use vocabulary when speaking.
    2. Respond to a Native Speaker who has used the vocabulary.
    3. Use vocabulary in writing.
    4. Demonstrate reading comprehension skills by discussing subject matter and/or answering questions based on the passage read.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the ability to use basic grammar structures beyond Elementary Italian 1 in speaking and writing.

    Objectives:

    1. Conjugate present and past of Piacere.
    2. Use of partitives.
    3. Use and demonstrative adjectives and pronouns.
    4. Use and conjugate regular & irregular past tenses (imperfect and present perfect).
    5. Use prepositions, adverbs and ci and ne.
    6. Use impersonal forms.
    7. Conjugate future tense.
    8. Use direct, indirect, and double pronouns.
    9. Agreement between past participle and direct object pronouns.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to recognize and discuss aspects of Italian culture beyond Elementary Italian 1.

    Objectives:

    1. Recognize Italian favorite foods and drinks and special dishes of various regions; Italian holidays and traditions and the function of the media.
    2. Compare cultural differences.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Week 1 Review of ITAL-1460

    Capitolo 4: Che bello spettacolo in piazza!

    Vocabulary & Communication:
    Talk about music, theater and cinema
    Talk about leisure activities

    Grammar:
    Direct Object pronouns
    Simple Past with Avere

    Week 2 Vocabulary & Communication:

    Refer to people and things that have already been mentioned
    Talk about past events

    Grammar:
    Simple Past with Essere
    Agreement between past participle and direct object pronouns
    Come si dice “how long”?

    Reading and Writing Strategies and Activities

    Week 3 Culture:

    Nel cuore della regione: Umbria e Le Marche
    Andiamo in piazza!
    Angolo culturale
    Video: Il cinema e la musica
    Esamino scritto e orale sul capitolo 4

    Week 4 Capitolo 5: Feste in piazza

    Vocabulary & Communication:
    Narrate and describe memories of events
    Talk about holidays, traditions and celebrations
    Recount childhood and adolescent experiences

    Grammar:

    Imperfect tense
    Past tense and imperfect

    Imperfect with modal verbs

    Week 5 Vocabulary & Communication:

    Recall childhood friends
    Talk about social and cultural events

    Grammar:

    Adverbs
    Indirect object pronouns
    Come si dice “time/times”?

    Reading and Writing Strategies and Activities

    Week 6 Culture:

    Nel cuore della regione: Toscana
    Andiamo in Piazza!
    Angolo culturale
    Video: Ricordi d’infanzia

    Week 7 Esamino scritto e orale sul capitolo 5

    Review for midterm

    Week 8 Midterm

    Capitolo 6: Al ristorante della piazza con i colleghi

    Vocabulary & Communication:
    Talk about ordering a meal in a restaurant
    Talk about grocery shopping, quantities, preparing meals
    Talk about likes and dislikes

    Grammar:

    Partitives
    Piacere (present and past)

    Weeks 9 Vocabulary & Communication:

    Talk about professions and internships
    Talk about things we had done

    Grammar:

    Past Perfect
    Come si dice “which”?
    Reading and Writing Strategies and Activities

    Week 10 Culture:

    Nel cuore della regione: Emilia-Romagna
    Andiamo in piazza!
    Angolo culturale
    Video: Al ristorante della piazza con amici e colleghi

    Week 11 Esamino scritto e orale sul capitolo 6

    Week 12 Capitolo 7: In vacanza tra piazze e bellezze naturali

    Vocabulary & Communication:
    Talk about vacations and taking trips
    Discuss methods of transportations

    Grammar:

    Impersonal form
    Future tense

    Week 13 Vocabulary & Communication:

    Express plans and intentions
    Make hotel or rooms reservations

    Grammar:

    Double pronouns
    Demonstrative adjectives and pronouns
    Come si dice “people”?

    Reading and Writing Strategies and Activities

    Week 14 Culture:

    Nel cuore della regione: Sicilia e Sardegna
    Andiamo in piazza!
    Angolo culturale

    Video: In vacanza

    Week 15 Esamino scritto e orale sul capitolo 7

    Ripasso per l’Esame Finale

    Week 16 Esami Finali

    First session: Written Exam
    Second session: Oral Exam


    Primary Faculty
    Williams, Susanna
    Secondary Faculty
    Ramos, Maria
    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ITAL 2460 - Intermediate Italian 1

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: ITAL 1470

    (formerly ITAL 2360)

    Third-semester Italian picks up where ITAL 1470 has ended. The central goal is to advance the student’s communicative ability and cultural competency with an emphasis on assimilating the language for complex communicative purposes. New language functions will be presented in meaningful activities that emphasize all four language skills: speaking, listening, reading and writing, and empower further cultural exploration. Students are required to use computer based technology to practice these skills.

    Contact Hours: 4
    Billable Contact Hours: 4
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate competency in oral language skills beyond Elementary Italian 2.

    Objectives:

    1. Pronounce individual sounds, including appropriate intonation and stress, with little or no interference in order to be understood by a Native Speaker.
    2. Form and produce entire sentences with no hesitation and natural pauses.
    3. Engage in conversations with a Native Speaker in the present, future, past tense and subjunctive about the following topics (includes both initiating conversations as well as responding appropriately to speech of a Native Speaker):
      1. Discussing health problems, symptoms, and treatments.
      2. Talk about maintaining a healthy lifestyle.
      3. Discussing the environment.
      4. Talking about geographical characteristics and landscape and make comparisons.
      5. Expressing opinions about new technologies.
      6. Talking about progress and contemporary society.
      7. Talking about multiethnic societies in Italy and other countries.
      8. Express opinions about past events.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the ability to use Italian vocabulary beyond Elementary Italian 2.

    Objectives: Regarding topics such as health, environment, progress and technology, fashion, globalization & immigration:

    1. Use vocabulary when speaking.
    2. Respond to a Native Speaker who has used the vocabulary.
    3. Use vocabulary in writing.
    4. Demonstrate reading comprehension skills by discussing subject matter and/or answering questions based on the passage read.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the ability to use grammar structures beyond Elementary Italian 2 in speaking and writing.

    Objectives:

    1. Conjugate imperative and use it with pronouns.
    2. Use of stressed pronouns.
    3. Conjugate conditional present and past.
    4. Use and form comparative and superlative.
    5. Use indefinite and negative expressions.
    6. Use present progressive.
    7. Conjugate and use regular and irregular present and past subjunctive.
    8. Use of relative pronouns.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to recognize and discuss aspects of Italian culture beyond Elementary Italian 2.

    Objectives:

    1. Recognize and discuss more Italian customs related to health, environment, progress and technology, fashion, globalization & immigration:
    2. Compare cultural difference.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Week 1 Review of Ital-1270

    Capitolo 8: In piazza per promuovere la salute!

    Vocabulary & Communication:
    Identify parts of the body
    Talk about health and physical conditions

    Week 2 01 - 03 setiembre

    Grammar:
    Imperative
    Imperative with pronouns

    Quiz on Vocabulary & Grammar

    Vocabulary & Communication:
    Give and receive advice about wellness
    Talk about maintaining a healthy life

    Week 3
    Grammar:
    Indefinite and negative expressions
    Progressive tense (stare + gerundio)
    Come si dice “first, second, last” (ordinal numbers)?

    Reading and Writing Strategies and Activities

    Culture:
    Nel cuore della regione: Trentino Alto Adige and Friuli Venezia Giulia
    Andiamo in piazza!
    Angolo culturale
    Video: In piazza per promuovere la salute

    Week 4

    Esamino scritio e orale sul capitolo 8

    Capitolo 9: In piazza per un ambiente sano

    Vocabulary & Communication:
    Discuss the environment
    Talk about ways to improve the environment

    Week 5

    Grammar:
    Simple conditional
    Past conditional

    Quiz on Vocabulary & Grammar

    Week 6

    Vocabulary & Communication:
    Talk about geographical characteristics and landscape
    Make comparisons

    Grammar:
    Stressed pronouns
    Comparatives
    Come si dice “I wish”?

    Week 7

    Reading and Writing Strategies and Activities

    Culture:
    Nel cuore della regione: Calabria and Basilicata
    Andiamo in Piazza!
    Angolo culturale
    Video: L’ambiente e la natura

    Esamino scritio e orale sul capitolo 9

    Week 8

    Review for midterm

    Midterm

    Week 9

    Capitolo 10: Moda e tecnologia s’incontrano in piazza

    Vocabulary & Communication:
    Talk about progress and contemporary society
    Talk about technology: computers, text messaging, social networks

    Grammar:
    Present subjunctive
    Expressions that require the subjunctive

    Week 10

    Quiz on Vocabulary & Grammar

    Vocabulary & Communication:
    Express opinions about new technologies
    Express opinions about “the best” or “the worst”

    Grammar:
    Past subjunctive
    Superlative
    Come si dice i<3u “I love you”?

    Reading and Writing Strategies and Activities

    Week 11

    Culture:
    Nel cuore della regione: Lombardia and Liguria
    Andiamo in piazza!
    Angolo culturale
    Video: La moda e la tecnologia

    Esamino scritio e orale sul capitolo 10

    Week 12
    Capitolo 11: Piazze multiculturali

    Vocabulary & Communication:
    Talk about multiethnic societies in Italy and other countries
    Talk about immigration

    Grammar:
    Imperfect subjunctive
    Relative pronouns

    Week 13

    Quiz on Vocabulary & Grammar

    Vocabulary & Communication:
    Express opinions about past events
    Discuss the effects of globalization and new economies

    Grammar:
    Past perfect subjunctive
    Sequence of tenses with subjunctive
    Come si dice “He who laughs last, laughs best”?

    Week 14

    Reading and Writing Strategies and Activities

    Culture:
    Nel cuore della regione: Abruzzo and Molise
    Andiamo in piazza!
    Angolo culturale
    Video: Un mondo multiculturale

    Esamino scritio e orale sul capitolo 11

    Week 15

    Culture of chapter 12
    Nel cuore della regione: Lazio
    Andiamo in piazza!
    Angolo culturale
    Video: L’Italia e gli italiani nel mondo

    Ripasso per gli Esami Finali

    Week 16
    Esami Finali
    First session: Written Exam
    Second session: Oral Exam


    Primary Faculty
    Williams, Susanna
    Secondary Faculty
    Ramos, Maria
    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ITAL 2470 - Intermediate Italian 2

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: ITAL 2460

    (formerly ITAL 2370)

    This course will stress the expansion of the student’s vocabulary, language skills and cultural competency. Classroom activities will center on a thorough review of the most important aspects of Italian grammar, as well as active oral and written use of the language. The oral exercises will expose students to extended discourse and will develop content and context as appropriate for students moving from the intermediate to the more advanced proficiency levels. Authentic material will provide the student with opportunities to critically engage with elaborate cultural situations. Students are required to use computer based technology to practice these skills.

    Contact Hours: 4
    Billable Contact Hours: 4
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate competency in oral language skills beyond Intermediate Italian 1.

    Objectives:

    1. Pronounce individual sounds, including appropriate intonation and stress, with Little or no interference in order to be understood by a Native Speaker.
    2. Form and produce entire sentences with no hesitation and natural pauses.
    3. Engage in conversations with a Native Speaker in the present, future, and past tense about the following topics (includes both initiating conversations as well as responding appropriately to speech of a Native Speaker).
      1. Extending, accepting, and declining an invitation.
      2. Offering, soliciting a service, making acquisitions, and asking for prices.
      3. Using language related to university life, expressing uncertainties and frustrations, expressing relief after an exam.
      4. Talking about education, career and personal interests.
      5. Discussing trends and tastes in food recipes.
      6. Debating national and international economic issues.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the ability to use Italian vocabulary beyond Intermediate Italian 1.

    Objectives: Regarding topics such as education and careers, descriptions, technology, economy, business, social, and financial terms, entertainment, food and recipes, sports and outdoor activities:

    1. Use vocabulary when speaking.
    2. Respond to a Native Speaker who has used the vocabulary.
    3. Use vocabulary in writing.
    4. Demonstrate reading comprehension skills by discussing subject matter and/or answering questions based on the passage read.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the ability to use grammatical structures beyond Intermediate Italian 1 in speaking and writing.

    Objectives: Students will review grammatical structures, including:

    1. Form and use of present and past participles; use of present perfect versus imperfect.
    2. Conjugate and use present and past perfect tenses.
    3. Conjugate and use formal and informal commands.
    4. Conjugate and use subjunctive.
    5. Review prepositions (in the sentences or after specific verbs).
    6. Conjugate and use future and conditional tenses.
    7. Conjugate and use imperfect subjunctive.
    8. Conjugate and use compound tenses of subjunctive.
    9. Use direct and indirect object pronouns.
    10. Conjugate and use “to like” and similar verbs.
    11. Use reflexives constructions.
    12. Discuss uses of if.
    13. Discuss if clauses.
    14. Construct comparative and superlative clauses.
    15. Form causative clauses.
    16. Use direct and indirect discourse.
    17. Form indefinite and negative expressions.
    18. Use demonstrative adjectives and pronouns.
    19. Use the relative pronouns.
    20. Use the passive voice.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to recognize and discuss aspects of Italian culture beyond Intermediate Italian 1.

    Objectives:

    1. Recognize and discuss some geographical, economical and cultural aspects of some Italian-speaking regions and/or communities such as health systems, hospitals, hotels classification, and personal identifications.
    2. Examine media of Italian-speaking countries (literature, visual art, music and songs, and/or cinema).
    3. Compare cultural differences.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the ability to critically discuss, in Italian, literary and/or journalistic works read in Italian.

    Objectives:

    1. Convey desired message.
    2. Analyze the meaning of the work.
    3. Support ideas conveyed using examples from the work.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Week: Chapters

    1. 1 and 2 Reading; To communicate
    2. 2 Reading; To communicate; Tales: Life in the City, The Bus Number 75 (Gianni Rodari)
    3. 3 Reading; To communicate
    4. 4 Reading; To communicate; Tales: Life in the City; the Crossing of the Old People (Stefano Benni)
    5. 5 Exam
    6. 5 and 6 Reading; To communicate; Tales: Family Discussions; At Lunch Time (Carlo Castellaneta)
    7. 6 and 7 Reading; To communicate
    8. 7 and 8 Reading; To communicate; Tales: Family Discussions; The Ideal Woman (Giovanni Guareschi); Midterm
    9. 8 Reading; To communicate
    10. 9 Tales: The Individualism and the Society; The 501 of Providence (Piero Chiara)
    11. 9 and 10 Reading; To communicate
    12. 10 and 11 Reading; To communicate; Tales: Life and progress - progress’ Advantages (Dino Buzzati)
    13. 11 Reading; To communicate
    14. 12 Reading; To communicate
    15. 13 Reading; To communicate
    16. Final Exams: Oral and Written Exam

    Primary Faculty
    Williams, Susanna
    Secondary Faculty
    Ramos, Maria
    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


IT-Aplications Professional

  
  • ITAP 1000 - Foundations of Computer Applications

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: None

    (replaces but does not equate to ITML 1000)

    ITAP 1000 is specifically designed as a foundation for students with little or no experience using personal computers. The course provides an introduction to the use of standard business applications, fundamental computer concepts, and keyboarding skills. Students will be introduced to the fundamentals of word processing, spreadsheet, database, and presentation software. Core computer concepts such as using the Windows Operating System, file management, email, and Internet use will also be covered.

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will use Microsoft Office productivity software.

    Objectives:

    1. Create, edit, and format a Word Document.
    2. Create, edit, format, an Excel Spreadsheet.
    3. Build basic formulas, functions and charts in Excel.
    4. Design and build an Access table.
    5. Query an Access database.
    6. Design and build a slide shows using Microsoft PowerPoint.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will perform standard tasks within the operating system, including managing files and using the Internet effectively.

    Objectives:

    1. Create folders and sub-folders.
    2. Save files into specific location.
    3. Copy, move or copy/paste files between folders to organize content.
    4. Access websites and search the Internet effectively.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will effectively use a personal information manager to manage business communications.

    Objectives:

    1. Send and receive emails using Microsoft Outlook.
    2. Create and manage appointments and meetings using Microsoft Outlook.
    3. Manage contact lists and create tasks using Microsoft Outlook.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will improve accuracy on the keyboard.

    Objectives:

    1. Perform keyboarding exercises to improve accuracy and proficiency.
    2. Demonstrate proper typing technique, body posture, and control.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Introduction to Keyboarding
      1. Proper typing techniques
      2. Touch method
      3. Speed and Accuracy improvement
    2. Windows and File Management
      1. Windows fundamentals
      2. Creating and naming files
      3. Navigating a file system
      4. Copy/Move files in a file system
      5. Use the Web effectively
      6. Search the Web effectively
    3. Outlook
      1. Send and Receive Emails
      2. Create and manage appointments
      3. Manage contact lists
      4. Create and manage task lists
    4. Microsoft Word
      1. Create a Word Document
      2. Edit a Word Document
      3. Format Text and Documents
    5. Microsoft Excel
      1. Create an Excel Spreadsheet
      2. Edit an Excel Spreadsheet
      3. Format an Excel Spreadsheet
      4. Create a Chart in Excel
    6. Microsoft Access
      1. Design and Build an Access table
      2. Design and Apply Basic Queries to an Access Database
    7. Microsoft PowerPoint
      1. Design and Build a Slide using Microsoft PowerPoint
      2. Design and Build a Slide Show using Microsoft PowerPoint

    Primary Faculty
    Banta, Robert
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Johnson, Elise
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ITAP 2050 - Microsoft SharePoint-Information Management 1

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: ITCS 1010

    (formerly ITAP 2001)

    Students will utilize Microsoft SharePoint to gain a fundamental understanding of and appreciation for effective document management, workflow/business process management, compliance requirements, document lifecycles, and content management strategy. Students will also be introduced to various Information Management fundamentals including the use of Enterprise Content Management (ECM) systems.

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of the course, students will use SharePoint as an ECM.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Recognize business challenges of implementing ECM.
    2. Recognize trends and legal requirements related to content management.
    3. Create solutions that bringing together people, process, and content through collaboration.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of the course, students will summarize the document lifecycle as a component of ECM.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Describe document management capabilities in SharePoint.
    2. Manage both traditional content types as well as new electronic objects throughout the lifecycle of that content.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of the course, students will apply ECM fundamentals using SharePoint.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Create and format content in SharePoint.
    2. Understand how SharePoint works with Microsoft Office.
    3. Build team sites in SharePoint.
    4. Modify and edit basic settings in SharePoint.
    5. Manage documents in SharePoint.
    6. Implement SharePoint Apps, Lists, and Libraries.
    7. Create and manage document libraries.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of the course, students will explain Content and Information Management fundamentals.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Identify the six domains of Information Management (Access, Capture, Collaborate, Secure, Architecture, Plan).
    2. Define the six domain areas of Information management and classify processes and techniques within each domain.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of the course, students will create taxonomies that employ ECM fundamentals.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Describe specific business needs for content management.
    2. Trace the evolution of ECM.
    3. Define structured versus unstructured information.
    4. Recognize the importance of compliance and corporate government specifically related to content management.
    5. Differentiate between ECM implementations of on-site, cloud, and hybrid solutions.
    6. Create a Content Management taxonomy based on a business case.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Topic 1: Information and Content Management

    1. Define Information Management
    2. Define the six domains of Information Management
      1. Access
      2. Capture
      3. Collaborate
      4. Secure
      5. Architecture
      6. Plan
    3. Define ECM
    4. Define ECM components and technologies
      1. Capture
      2. Manage
      3. Store
      4. Deliver
      5. Preserve
      6. Disposition

    Topic 2: Business Challenges and Trends - The Key Issue for Users

    1. Collaboration Challenge
    2. Continuity
    3. Compliance
    4. Cost
    5. Legal and Regulatory and Compliance Issues
      1. Understanding the problem of compliance and non-compliance
      2. Industries affected
      3. Examples - Sarbanes-Oxley, HIPAA, Freedom of Information, Basel II

    Topic 3: Document Lifecycle

    1. Define what constitutes a document
    2. Recognize difference between a document and a record
    3. Document management technologies
    4. Successful management of documents
    5. Industry standards

    Topic 4: Implement Content Management with SharePoint

    1. Navigating a SharePoint Site
    2. Creating and Managing Team Sites
    3. Create content within SharePoint

    Topic 5: Manage documents and Information using SharePoint

    1. Working with Lists
    2. Managing Libraries
    3. Creating Workspaces

    Topic 6: Workflow/Business Process Management

    1. Understanding the need for Workflows
    2. Implement Workflows in SharePoint
    3. Manage Workflows in SharePoint

    Topic 7: Collaboration using SharePoint

    1. Creating Wiki’s and Blogs
    2. Creating Survey’s and Discussion Boards
    3. Utilize SharePoint Apps for communication and collaboration

    Primary Faculty
    Banta, Robert
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Johnson, Elise
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


IT-Cloud Computing (Course)

  
  • ITCC 1000 - Cloud Administrator 1

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: ITNT 1500 or ITNC 1010

    ITCC 1000 is intended for students who seek an overall understanding of cloud computing concepts. Topics may include cloud terminology, cloud service and deployment models, cloud security principles and the fundamentals of application deployment and operation in the cloud.

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to outline the components of cloud computing.

    Objectives:

    1. Define cloud computing
    2. Explain the characteristics of cloud operation
    3. Explain the cloud service models
    4. Explain the cloud deployment models

     

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to outline cloud best practice design principles.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain application scalability
    2. Explain resource elasticity
    3. Explain operation automation
    4. Explain the fundamental principles of cloud security

     

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to develop a TCO (total cost of ownership) of a cloud application.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the value proposition of cloud services
    2. Calculate the cost of a simple cloud design
    3. Compare cloud service costs to traditional data center costs

     

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to choose basic cloud services.

    Objectives:

    1. Choose compute resources based on application need
    2. Choose networking services based on application need
    3. Choose storage resources based on application need

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

     

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.

    3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.

    4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.

    5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.


    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Basic Concepts
      1. Definition of a cloud
      2. Global cloud Infrastructure
    2. Detailed Concepts
      1. Basic cloud architectural principles
      2. Cloud value proposition
      3. Cloud billing, account management, and pricing models
      4. Deploying new cloud services
      5. Migrating to the cloud
    3. Cloud Services
      1. Compute
      2. Storage
      3. Database
      4. Analytics
      5. Infrastructure
    4. Cloud Security
      1. Service Security
      2. Compliance
      3. Security Models

    Primary Faculty
    Koss, John
    Secondary Faculty
    Nabozny, Keith
    Associate Dean
    Johnson, Elise
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ITCC 2000 - Cloud Administrator 2

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: ITCC 1000

    Corequisites: ITOS 1710

    ITCC 2000 teaches students how to architect modern applications using cloud services. Students will learn how to provision compute, network, and storage web services. Students will also be introduced to cloud security, high-availability, and automation tools used to manage cloud applications. 

    Contact Hours: 4
    Billable Contact Hours: 4
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to analyze high performing cloud architectures.

    Objectives:

    1. Compare and contrast high performing cloud architectures
    2. Analyze multi-tier cloud architectures
    3. Evaluate the resiliency of example cloud application architectures

     

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to design a high performance cloud architecture using core cloud services.

    Objectives:

    1. Choose compute services for high performing cloud application
    2. Choose storage services for high performing cloud application
    3. Choose databases services for high performing cloud application
    4. Design network services for high performing cloud application

     

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to design a secure cloud application.

    Objectives:

    1. Design secure user access to cloud applications
    2. Design secure administrator access to cloud services
    3. Monitor user and administrator access to cloud applications and services

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.

    3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.

    4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.

    5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.


    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Cloud Services
      1. Compute
      2. Storage
      3. Database
      4. Infrastructure
    2. Monitoring Cloud Performance
      1. Compute
      2. Storage
      3. Database
      4. Infrastructure
    3. Scaling Cloud Services
      1. Compute Auto-Scaling Groups
      2. Storage Content Distribution
      3. Relational and Non-Relational Databases
    4. Cloud Security
      1. User-level Security
      2. Application-level Security
      3. Data and Storage Security

    Primary Faculty
    Koss, John
    Secondary Faculty
    Nabozny, Keith
    Associate Dean
    Johnson, Elise
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ITCC 2100 - Cloud Developer 1

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: ITCC 1000; ITCS 1250 or ITCS 2530 or ITCS 2590; ITWP 1000 and ITIA 1200

    ITCC 2100 teaches students the fundamentals of cloud application development with an emphasis on web application communication and service-oriented architectures. Topics covered may include microservice design, creation and consumption.

    Contact Hours: 4
    Billable Contact Hours: 4
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will explain microservices in cloud application development.

    Objectives:

    1. Contrast monolithic architecture with microservice architecture
    2. Explain the different data formats in a microservice data exchange
    3. Explain the benefits of cloud messaging services in a microservice architecture
    4. Explain the benefits of containers in a microservice architecture

     

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will create a simple consumable web service that implements the four basic functions of cloud storage.

    Objectives:

    1. Design a microservice that implements create, read, update and delete operations on cloud storage
    2. Build a web service that implements a create operation on cloud storage
    3. Build a web service that implements a read operation on cloud storage
    4. Build a web service that implements a update operation on cloud storage
    5. Build a web service that implements a delete operation on cloud storage

     

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will create a consumer of microservices.

    Objectives:

    1. Design an application that uses web service to create, read, update and delete data on cloud storage
    2. Create an application that uses a web service to save data to cloud storage
    3. Create an application that uses a web service to read data to cloud storage
    4. Create an application that uses a web service to update data to cloud storage
    5. Create an application that uses a web service to delete data to cloud storage

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.

    3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.

    4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.

    5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.


    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Microservice and Web APIs
      1. Architectures
      2. Consuming public APIs
      3. Common Web API data formats
    2. Implementing microservice persistent storage
      1. Create function
      2. Read function
      3. Update function
      4. Delete function
    3. Consuming microservice persistent storage
      1. Save function
      2. Read function
      3. Update function
      4. Delete function

    Primary Faculty
    Koss, John
    Secondary Faculty
    Hornung, Patrick; Nabozny, Keith
    Associate Dean
    Johnson, Elise
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ITCC 2200 - Cloud Administrator 3

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: ITCC 2000 and ITCC 2100

    ITCC 2200 teaches students how to support modern cloud environments using monitoring and infrastructure automation services. Students will learn how to use various tools to create and deploy new and existing applications to the cloud. In addition students will use cloud monitoring tools to assess application performance.

    Contact Hours: 4
    Billable Contact Hours: 4
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will develop a computing infrastructure as code (IaC) file.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the benefits of IaC
    2. Compare IaC to conventional infrastructure creation tools
    3. Demonstrate the creation of an IaC configuration file

     

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create computing infrastructure from an infrastructure as code (IaC) file.

    Objectives:

    1. Configure compute services using IaC
    2. Configure storage services using IaC
    3. Configure database services using IaC
    4. Configure networking services using IaC

     

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to monitor cloud applications for performance

    Objectives:

    1. Design cloud monitoring for a small application
    2. Configure cloud monitoring for a small application
    3. Measure the effectiveness cloud monitoring for a small application

     

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to migrate on-premises services to the cloud.

    Objectives:

    1. Migrate Virtual Machines
    2. Migrate Storage
    3. Migrate Applications

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.

    3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.

    4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.

    5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.


    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Infrastructure as Code (IaC)
      1. IaC benefits
      2. File formats
      3. IaC Command-line tools
      4. IaC deployment
      5. Detecting IaC configuration drift
    2. Monitoring Cloud Applications
      1. Monitoring user access
      2. Monitoring application utilization
      3. Monitoring application faults
    3. Cloud application monitoring
      1. Migrating servers
      2. Migrating services
      3. Migrating identity management
      4. Migrating applications

    Primary Faculty
    Koss, John
    Secondary Faculty
    Hornung, Patrick; Nabozny, Keith
    Associate Dean
    Johnson, Elise
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ITCC 2300 - Cloud Developer 2

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: ITCC 2000 and ITCC 2100

    ITCC 2300 introduces students to advanced cloud application development concepts and practices. Topics covered may include cloud messaging services, Functions as a Service (FaaS), and continuous application integration and delivery.

    Contact Hours: 4
    Billable Contact Hours: 4
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students utilize function as a service (FaaS) cloud services.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the benefits of FaaS in application development
    2. Compare FaaS to conventional program execution models
    3. Design a web service that is implemented as a FaaS
    4. Create a web service that is implemented as a FaaS

     

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will utilize cloud messaging services in application development.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the benefits of using a cloud messaging service in application development
    2. Configure at least 2 different cloud messaging services
    3. Design a web service that uses a cloud messaging service
    4. Create a web service that uses a cloud messaging service

     

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will utilize software source code control and management systems.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the benefits of tracking source code changes
    2. Describe current software source code control and management systems
    3. Describe version control functions applied during the life cycle of cloud application development.

     

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will explain continuous application delivery cloud services.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the benefits of continuous application delivery
    2. Explain the cloud services that support continuous application delivery

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.

    3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.

    4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.

    5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.


    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Function as a service (FaaS)
      1. Definition of FaaS
      2. FaaS benefits over conventional execution methods
      3. FaaS design principals
      4. FasS application development
    2. Cloud messaging services
      1. Definition of cloud messaging services
      2. What problems do cloud messaging services solve
      3. Cloud messaging services design principals
      4. Cloud messaging services application development
    3. Source code version control
      1. Git
      2. Subversion
      3. Code repositories
    4. Continuous Integration and Continuous Delivery (CI/CD)
      1. Definition CI/CD
      2. Benefits of CI/CD
      3. Supporting application CI/CD with cloud services
      4. Application CI/CD automation configuration

    Primary Faculty
    Koss, John
    Secondary Faculty
    Hornung, Patrick; Nabozny, Keith
    Associate Dean
    Johnson, Elise
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


IT-Computer Information Systems

  
  • ITCS 1010 - Computer & Information Processing Principles

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: None

    ITCS 1010 introduces Information Technology concepts and methods that knowledge workers use to organize and manage information resources. Computer concept topic areas include up-to-date information about hardware, software, the Internet, telecommunications and network systems, databases, commerce and transaction processing, and information and decision support systems. Students develop or enhance basic skills in using computer applications software (word processing, database management systems, spreadsheet, and presentation packages) to effectively communicate for the benefit of an organization. Methods of instruction include lecture and lab.

    Contact Hours: 4
    Billable Contact Hours: 4
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Students should be able to use an operating system to manage files effectively.

    Objectives:

    1. Create folders and subfolders.
    2. Save files into specific location.
    3. Copy, move or copy/paste files between folders to organize content.
    4. Search for specific files and folders.

    Outcome 2: Students should be able to use word processing, spreadsheet, database, and presentation software as a means of communication and solving of problems effectively.

    Objectives:

    1. Find and launch specific software.
    2. Create, modify and maintain a document, spreadsheet, database or Powerpoint.
    3. Share documents, spreadsheets, databases and Powerpoint among co-workers.
    4. Effectively use functions and formulas in documents, spreadsheets and databases.

    Outcome 3: Students should have a basic knowledge of information technology concepts and methods that knowledge workers use as a tool in the business world.

    Objectives:

    1. Gain basic knowledge of how IT is used in today’s and tomorrow’s world.
    2. Gain basic knowledge of computer networks as it applies to modern communication.
    3. Gain basic understanding of computer hardware and software.

    Outcome 4: Students should be able to use the Internet efficiently for e-mail, commerce, and research.

    Objectives:

    1. Able to use e-mail efficiently.
    2. Gain basic understanding of e-commerce.
    3. Able to use Internet effectively for research.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Hands-on approach introduction to Microsoft Windows System
      1. Windows programs and security features
      2. Windows search and help
      3. Using windows Explore to manage files and folders
    2. Hands-on approach introduction to Word, Excel, Access and Power Point at Microsoft Office Specialist Skill Level
      1. Create and save files
      2. Modify, format, and maintain files
      3. Using formulas and functions in Word, Excel and Access
      4. Using Office for collaboration and research
    3. Introduce computer concepts
      1. Computer technology and todays’ world
      2. Computer hardware
      3. The role of Interned in work, study and personal life
      4. System software and application software, and software programming
      5. Computer networking and network security
      6. Database and computer system

    Primary Faculty
    Banta, Robert
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Johnson, Elise
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ITCS 1140 - Introduction to Program Design & Development

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: None

    (formerly ITCS 1130)

    ITCS 1140 provides students with a fundamental understanding of computer programming and the detailed logic used to develop them. Students also explore various programming techniques, constructs, debugging methods and object oriented concepts.

    Contact Hours: 4
    Billable Contact Hours: 4
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe what is a computer program, how it runs on the computer, the various types of computer programming, and the different techniques used to develop computer software.

    Objectives:

    1. Given an examination, students will utilize terms, concepts, and examples to explain how computer programs function, the various languages and platforms used, and how programs are put together, with a minimum of 75% accuracy.
    2. Given a case scenario, students will develop an algorithm to solve a programming problem, with a minimum of 75% accuracy.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to develop algorithms and corresponding computer code in order to solve problems.

    Objectives:

    1. Given flow charting software, students will identify computer program inputs, outputs, and processes, with a minimum of 75% accuracy.
    2. Given a software compiler, students will write and debug computer code depicting the proper usage of variables and data types, with a minimum of 75% accuracy.
    3. Given a software compiler, students will write and debug computer code demonstrating decision structures, with a minimum of 75% accuracy.
    4. Given a software compiler, students will write and debug computer code demonstrating repetition structures, with a minimum of 75% accuracy.
    5. Given a software compiler, students write and debug computer code demonstrating modular programming with a minimum of 75% accuracy.
    6. Given a software compiler, students write and debug computer code demonstrating classes with a minimum of 75% accuracy.
    7. Given a software compiler, students write and debug computer code demonstrating arrays with a minimum of 75% accuracy.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Introduction to Programming
    2. Usage of Variables and Math in Programing
    3. Decision Structures
    4. Loops
    5. Modular Programing: the use of Functions & Procedures
    6. Object Oriented Programming Concepts
    7. Programming with Arrays

    Primary Faculty
    Jenaway, Elizabeth
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Evans-Mach, Patrick
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ITCS 1170 - Database Design & Implementation With SQL

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites:  ITCS 1140 or ITCS 1950; and ITCS 1010

    No credit after ITCS 2280. ITCS 1170 familiarizes students with database usage, design, and implementation. It also explores fundamentals of Structured Query Language (SQL).

    Contact Hours: 4
    Billable Contact Hours: 4
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to outline the various database types and applications as it pertains to common industry usage.

    Objectives:

    1. Use appropriate terms, concepts, and examples.
    2. Explain the various types of databases.
    3. Describe end user interaction with databases.
    4. Describe database maintenance.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to model or design a simple transaction processing database system utilizing the relational database model.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify entities, attributes, and relationships for a case scenario. 
    2. Normalize entities to third normal form.
    3. Create an entity relationship diagram based on a set of normalized entities or software package. 

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to apply techniques for constructing a basic SQL statement, multi-table query, and using server-side database administration commands.

    Objectives:

    1. Construct a single-table query.
    2. Create a database schema using DDL statements.
    3. Construct multi-table queries utilizing various join methods.
    4. Construct both DDL and Outcome
    5. Determine which server-side database administration commands are needed.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Introducing Databases and Database Management Systems
    2. Designing a Database
    3. Implementing a Database using SQL
    4. Data Access and Manipulation using SQL
    5. Data Access and Security
    6. Database Processing for Business Intelligence Systems

    Primary Faculty
    Jenaway, Elizabeth
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Evans-Mach, Patrick
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ITCS 1250 - C# Programming

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: ITCS 1140 or ITCS 1950

    ITCS 1250 is an entry-level course covering syntax, input/output layout, testing, debugging, documentation, problem definition, loops, and decisions. Student programs are entered using Microsoft C#.

    Contact Hours: 4
    Billable Contact Hours: 4
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will develop an appropriate logic design in order to solve a business problem within the capabilities and constraints of the C# language.

    Objectives:

    1. Use Object Oriented Programming constructs to solve assigned business problems.
    2. Develop supporting documentation for assigned problems including an appropriate logical design.
    3. Use relational databases concepts to design a simple database.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will solve problems requiring the use of the C# program language using problem documentation and logic designs.

    Objectives:

    1. Create and execute applications using a multitude of C# tools, statements, properties and events.
    2. Understand the basic concept of file access and create and execute applications that can open, read from, save to, and close data files.
    3. Understand the basic concepts of arrays and lists, and create and execute programs that use these concepts.
    4. Create an application that uses classes.
    5. Create a multiform project.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Introduction to C# and the Visual Studio Interface.
    2. Data Types.
    3. Making Decisions.
    4. Loops and Files.
    5. Modularizing Your Code.
    6. Arrays and Lists.
    7. Classes.
    8. Multiform Projects.
    9. Databases.
    10. Practice test: Current Microsoft Certification Exam.

    Primary Faculty
    Schleis, George
    Secondary Faculty
    Kohl, Martin
    Associate Dean
    Evans-Mach, Patrick
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ITCS 1950 - Introduction to Game Development

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: None

    (formerly ITCS 2913)

    ITCS 1950 introduces principles of game programming through hands-on creation of simple games with a current games-centered programming language. Major topics include syntax, data structures for games, designing game worlds with objects (OOP), sprites, audio playback, player input, animation, collision detection, simple physics, basic AI (Artificial Intelligence) and game engines. Both text-based and graphics-based games are examined.

    Contact Hours: 4
    Billable Contact Hours: 4
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of the gaming industry.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify and report on employment opportunities related to the gaming industry.
    2. Research various industries to identify situations where game programming may be appropriately applied as a solution to a business problem.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the basic concepts of gaming programming.

    Objectives:

    1. Design programs according to program specifications.
    2. Create solutions to assignments which include.
      1. Repetition statements.
      2. Decision statements.
      3. Sequence statements.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to manipulate data in a gaming environment.

    Objectives:

    1. Create solutions using data structures to represent game components.
    2. Create solutions utilizing objects to replicate multiple instances of games elements.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to implement graphics and animation in simple games.

    Objectives:

    1. Employ sprites and text.
      1. Place sprites and text on the screen in appropriate places.
      2. Update text messages such as score.
      3. Move sprites to add movement to game objects.
      4. Detect collision between game objects.
    2. Demonstrate their ability to program in the two-dimensional coordinate system.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create programs to demonstrate course competencies.

    Objectives:

    1. Create code and test a text-based adventure game.
    2. Create code and test a basic graphics-based collision detection game.
    3. Create code and test a text-based or graphics-based game using the computer as one of the players (computer logic).

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Note: Based on the text Python Programming for the Absolute Beginner, Second Edition, Michael Dawson, Thompson, Course Technology, Boston (2006)

    Unit 1:

    1. The World of Gaming
    2. Introduction to the Development Platform

    Unit 2:

    1. Working with Data Types, Variables and Simple I/O
    2. Branching, Loops, and Program Planning

    Unit 3:

    1. Manipulating Strings
    2. Working with Files and Directories

    Unit 4:

    1. Utilizing Lists
    2. Implementing Dictionaries

    Unit 5:

    1. Functions
    2. Reading From and Writing to Data Files

    Unit 6:

    1. Simple Objects
    2. Object Oriented Programming

    Unit 7:

    1. Graphical User Interface in Games Development
    2. Collision Detection

    Unit 8:

    1. Sound
    2. Animation

    Primary Faculty
    Schleis, George
    Secondary Faculty
    Zhuang, Yi-Li
    Associate Dean
    Evans-Mach, Patrick
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ITCS 2000 - Survey of Game Programming in Direct X with C++

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: ITCS 2530 and ITCS 1950

    ITCS 2000 provides students with higher order programming skills necessary to manipulate class level objects such as characters, sounds, background objects, and worlds used in the development of game programs. Students code game solutions utilizing Direct X and C++.

    Contact Hours: 4
    Billable Contact Hours: 4
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create 2D role playing games utilizing Direct X and C++.

    Objectives:

    1. Design, code, test, and evaluate a complete electronic game written in C++.
    2. Use Direct X to implement graphics, sound, and animation in the programs they create.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create C++ code that uses objects and classes.

    Objectives:

    1. Develop, implement, and test code which utilizes the principles of objects to display multiple copies of identical sprites in the game environment.
    2. Design, code, and test derived classes which will allow several similar looking actors to display different actions and movements.
    3. Develop, code, and test solutions utilizing the principles of the class structure available to C++ programmers.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create C++ code that uses stacks and/or tree structures.

    Objectives:

    1. Develop and code programming solutions utilizing Matrix and Vector structures to control actions of a game world.
    2. Develop and code program solutions utilizing a tree structure to manage active game data.
    3. Develop and code a solution which will save and re-load game data.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. C++/Direct X Game Programming Basics
      1. Creation of a Windows Program from Code
      2. Introduction to Direct X
      3. Using Points, Vertices, and Graphics Primitives
    2. Games Development Basics
      1. Using Direct3D Textures
      2. Programming Direct3D Animation
      3. Creating and Programming Sound
    3. Development of an electronic Game
      1. Initialing Game Data
      2. Drawing the Game World
      3. Programming Animation
    4. Manipulation of a Virtual World
      1. Traveling through a Virtual World
      2. Manipulating Game Objects
      3. Non-player Characters and Quests
      4. Programming Combat
      5. Saving and Loading Games
      6. Creating and Adding Sound

    Primary Faculty
    Schleis, George
    Secondary Faculty
    Koss, John
    Associate Dean
    Evans-Mach, Patrick
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ITCS 2050 - Advanced Game Development

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: ITCS 1950

    Building on principles of game design presented in ITCS 1950, ITCS 2050 uses currently available game development software to create actual games. Students develop a text-based adventure game, a 2D single and multi-player game, and a 3D single and multi-player game.

    Contact Hours: 4
    Billable Contact Hours: 4
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to develop a game plot.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Demonstrate the creation of game plots.
    2. Write a complete plot for 3 types of games.
      1. Text-Based games.
      2. 2D games.
      3. 3D games.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to implement character development.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Demonstrate the design and rendering of game characters with various properties for the 2D gaming world.
    2. Demonstrate the design and rendering of game characters with various properties for the 3D gaming world.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to implement scoring systems.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Design and develop appropriate scoring solutions and rewards systems for each of the three types of games.
    2. Design and develop methods to save game statistics to allow for pause and restart of games in progress.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to code solutions utilizing database interactions.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Design and develop a solution that will save current scores to a database allowing for high score statistics to be shared.
    2. Design and develop a solution that will save current game conditions and allow pause and restart.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to develop games based on Web-based gaming techniques.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Create individual player games that are playable over the web.
    2. Create multi-player games that are playable over the web.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to develop solutions utilizing computer gaming design and theory.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Design and develop a Text Based Game.
    2. Design and develop a 2D game.
    3. Design and develop a 3D game.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Session and Topic:

    1. Game Basics
      1. Plot Development
      2. Character Development
      3. Scoring
      4. Database Interaction
      5. Game Design
        1. Text-based Adventure Game
        2. 2D Single and Multi-Player
        3. 3D Single and Multi-Player
    2. TextWorld (Text Based Adventure Games)
      1. Getting to Know TextWorld
        1. Character Development
        2. Scoring
      2. Creating a Simple Application Utilizing TextWorld
    3. TextWorld
      1. Game Development
      2. Game Testing and Debugging
    4. GameDev (2D)
      1. Getting to Know GameDev
      2. Character Development
      3. Scoring
    5. GameDev
      1. Game Development
      2. Database Interaction
      3. Creating an Application Utilizing GameDev
    6. DimensioneX (3D)
      1. Getting to Know DimensioneX
      2. Character Development
        1. Scoring
        2. Database Interaction
    7. DimensioneX
      1. Game Development
      2. Database Interaction
      3. Creating an Application Utilizing DimensioneX
    8. Evaluation
      1. Documentation of Skills
      2. Peer Evaluation

    Primary Faculty
    Schleis, George
    Secondary Faculty
    Zhuang, Yi-Li
    Associate Dean
    Evans-Mach, Patrick
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ITCS 2140 - Database Programming Using Microsoft SQL Server

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: ITCS 1170; and ITCS 1140 or ITCS 1950

    This course instructs students on how to develop a database using Structured Query Language (SQL) and Transaction Structured Query Language (T-SQL). Advanced querying techniques, implementation of programming objects, and working with XML data will also be explored.

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to implement a database design using Structured Query Language (SQL) and Transaction Structured Query Language (T-SQL).

    Objectives:

    1. Given a set of design specifications student will create tables, constraints, indexes and views, with a minimum of 75% accuracy.
    2. Given a set of design specifications students will implement datatypes, with a minimum of 75% accuracy.
    3. Given a set a set of base tables, students will alter tables, constraints, indexes and views, with a minimum of 75% accuracy.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create and implement Transaction Structured Query Language (T-SQL) programming objects.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a set of base tables, students will design, construct implement and test T-SQL stored procedures, with a minimum of 75% accuracy.
    2. Given a set of base tables, students will design, construct implement and test T-SQL triggers, with a minimum of 75% accuracy.
    3. Given a set of base tables, students will design, construct implement and test T-SQL a set of base tables, students will design, construct implement and test T-SQL functions, with a minimum of 75% accuracy.
    4. Given a sent a set of base tables, students will implement transactional control, with a minimum of 75% accuracy.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate advanced querying techniques utilizing Structured Query Language (SQL) and Transaction Structured Query Language (T-SQL).

    Objectives:

    1. Given a set of base tables, students will design, construct advanced SELECT statements utilizing aggregate functions, sorting, grouping and built-in functions, with a minimum of 75% accuracy.
    2. Given a set of base tables, students will design, construct, implement and test T-SQL triggers, with a minimum of 75% accuracy.
    3. Given a set of base tables, students will design, construct, implement and test T-SQL functions, with a minimum of 75% accuracy.
    4. Given a set of base tables, students will construct subqueries, with a minimum of 75% accuracy.
    5. Given a set of base tables, students will apply ranking functions, with a minimum of 75% accuracy.
    6. Given a set of base tables, students will implement common table expressions, with a minimum of 75% accuracy.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to monitor and optimize query execution using Structured Query Language (SQL) and Transaction Structured Query Language (T-SQL).

    Objectives:

    1. Given the Microsoft SQL Server software, students will implement, execute and optimize scripts, with a minimum of 75% accuracy.
    2. Given the Microsoft SQL Server software, students will implement Service Broker solutions, with a minimum of 75% accuracy.
    3. Given the Microsoft SQL Server software, students will trace data changes, with a minimum of 75% accuracy.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will create queries utilizing (Extensible Markup Language) XML data.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a case scenario, students will generate XML tags for database data, with a minimum of 75%.
    2. Given a case scenario, students will transform XML tagged data into database data, with a minimum of 75% accuracy.
    3. Given a case scenario, students will query XML data, with a minimum of 75% accuracy.
    4. Given a case scenario, students will manage XML data, with a minimum of 75% accuracy.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
     
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
     
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
     

    4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.

     

    5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

     

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Review of Query
    2. Aggregating Functions and Queries
    3. Joining tables and datasets
    4. Subqueries
    5. Common Table Expressions
    6. Data Recursion
    7. Implementing tables and views
    8. Stored Procedures
    9. User-Defined Function
    10. Triggers
    11. Transactions and Concurrency
    12. XML and XQuery

    Primary Faculty
    Jenaway, Elizabeth
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Evans-Mach, Patrick
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ITCS 2200 - Data Analysis

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: ITCS 1010

    (formerly ITCS 1400)

    This course teaches students concepts and tools used to analyze datasets and make informed business decisions. Students will use Spreadsheet and Database software to gather, organize, and visualize data for analysis. Students will learn advanced Excel techniques such as creating PivotTables, using advanced functions, using statistical tools, performing advanced filtering techniques, using decision making tools, and connecting to external data.  Students will also use database tools to build reports, create queries, and manage data using SQL.

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    OUTCOME 1:  Upon completion of this course, students will be able to analyze data by creating subtotals, PivotTables, and PivotCharts.

    OBJECTIVES:

    1. Subtotal, Group, and Ungroup data
    2. Create, modify, filter and slice PivotTables and Pivot Charts
    3. Create a Data Model

    OUTCOME 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate how to use decision-making tools in Excel.

    OBJECTIVES:

    1. Create one and two variable Data Tables
    2. Use Scenario Manager
    3. Create an optimization model using Solver

    OUTCOME 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to manipulate data using date, logical, lookup, database, and financial functions.

    OBJECTIVES:

    1. Use Date, Nested Logical, Financial, and Advanced Lookup functions
    2. Manipulate Data with Database Functions
    3. Create a Loan Amortization Table

    OUTCOME 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to employ statistical functions to analyze data for decision making.

     OBJECTIVES:

    1. Use Conditional Math Functions
    2. Calculate Relative Standings with Statistical Functions
    3. Measure Central Tendency
    4. Use the Analysis Toolpack
    5. Create a Forecast sheet to identify trends based on historical data
    6. Perform Analysis of Variance

    OUTCOME 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate data management within workbooks.

    OBJECTIVES:

    1. Insert Reference and 3D formulas
    2. Audit Formulas
    3. Validate Data

    OUTCOME 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to manage data from external sources.

    OBJECTIVES:

    1. Import data from external sources
    2. Import XML Data into Excel
    3. Manipulate Text with functions
    4. Use Power Pivot, Power Query
    5. Visualize Data with Power View

    OUTCOME 7: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create macros to simplify data analysis in Excel.

    OBJECTIVES:

    1. Record a macro
    2. Create a Sub Procedure
    3. Edit a Macro in the Visual Basic Editor
    4. Create a Custom function
    5. Use visual representation techniques that increase the understanding of complex data and models
    6. Analyze data findings and identify appropriate visualization approach
    7. Provide insight by creating charts for various datasets

    OUTCOME 8: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to use data validation features to improve data entry in databases.

    OBJECTIVES:

    1. Establish Data Validation rules
    2. Create input masks
    3. Create Lookup Fields

    OUTCOME 9:  Upon completion of this course, students will be able to perform data analysis using advanced database queries.

    OBJECTIVES:

    1. Create parameter queries and reports
    2. Use advanced functions to query a database table

    OUTCOME 10: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to use action queries to update, add, and delete data and create queries for specialized purposes.

    OBJECTIVES:

    1. Create queries to Update, Append and Delete records in a table
    2. Summarize data with a Crosstab query
    3. Find duplicate and unmatched records using queries

    OUTCOME 11: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to use SQL to manage data within a database.

    OBJECTIVES:

    1. Create standalone, embedded, and event-driven macros
    2. Create simple SQL queries

    OUTCOME 12: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create appropriately formatted business documents to present analysis findings.

    OBJECTIVES:

    1. Use Word to compose business documents
    2. Use PowerPoint to present and defend findings

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
     
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
     
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
     
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
     

    5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

     

     


    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Summarizing and Analyzing Data
      1. PivotTables
      2. Data Models
      3. PivotCharts
    2. Using Decision Making Tools
      1. One-Variable Data Tables
      2. Two-Variable Data Tables
      3. Goal Seek
      4. Scenario Manager
      5. Solver
    3. Specialized Functions
      1. Logical and Lookup functions
      2. Database Functions
      3. Financial Functions
    4. Analyzing data using Statistics
      1. Math and Statistical Functions
      2. Descriptive Statistical Functions
      3. Inferential Statistics
    5. Managing Data
      1. Import data from external sources
      2. Manipulate Text with functions
      3. Use Power Pivot, Power Query
    6. Macros and VBA
      1. Macros
      2. Procedures in VBA
      3. Custom Functions
    7. Visual Representation Techniques
      1. Visualization
      2. Advanced Charting
      3. Sparklines
    8. Validation and Data Analysis using Databases
      1. Data Validation
      2. Advanced Select Queries
    9. Action Queries and Specialized Queries - DML
      1. Action Queries
      2. Specialized Queries
    10. SQL and Macro Design
      1. SQL
      2. Macro Design
      3. Data Macros

    Primary Faculty
    Banta, Robert
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Johnson, Elise
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ITCS 2250 - Advanced C# Programming

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: ITCS 1140 or ITCS 1950

    ITCS 2250 is an advanced course covering syntax, input/output layout, testing, debugging, documentation, Windows Forms, and an introduction to Windows Presentation Foundation using the current Dot Net Framework. Student programs will be entered using Microsoft C#.

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create solutions to programming problems requiring the use of the C# programming Language.

    Objectives:

    1. Solutions will incorporate all required supporting documentation.
    2. Use various objects available to the C# programmer to design code and test solutions to various programming problems.
    3. Create appropriate documentation that will assist individuals assigned as maintenance programmers to demonstrate the methods and actions selected.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create and execute applications using a multitude of C# tools, statement, properties and events.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate and use the proper objects available to the C# programmer to develop an efficient solution to a specific programming problem.
    2. Use proper techniques to update the System Registry as a method of storing critical data without destroying Registry Functionality.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate file access techniques by designing and coding applications that connect to various types of data files including text files, database files, and other file types as well.

    Objectives:

    1. Create applications that read from and write to text based data files.
    2. Create applications that read from, write to and properly update database files.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate a proficiency in User Interface Design and best practices by designing and implementing an efficient solution which includes Windows Forms and or Windows Presentation Foundation based on current Dot Net Framework implementation.

    Objectives:

    1. Use multiple forms to design and implement appropriate user friendly interfaces (GUI).
    2. Use Windows Presentation Foundation in the design and implementation of dynamically rich data representation for Web.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Registry Updates and Web Browsers.
    2. Dynamic Object Creation
    3. Objects and Classes
    4. Object Orientation: Inheritance and Polymorphism
    5. Input Validation, Advanced Error Handling, and Exception Handling
    6. More about Windows Forms
    7. Data Sharing via XML
    8. Relational Databases and SQL
    9. Accessing Data with ADO.NET
    10. Arrays, Collections, and Generics
    11. Multithreading in C#
    12. Windows Presentation Foundation

    Primary Faculty
    Schleis, George
    Secondary Faculty
    Jenaway, Elizabeth
    Associate Dean
    Evans-Mach, Patrick
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ITCS 2500 - Introduction to Mobile Development

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: ITCS 1140 or ITCS 1950

    ITCS 2500 provides students with a practical hands-on introduction to mobile application development. Students will learn about the mobile development framework and the fundamental concepts of classes, objects, menus, lists, buttons, services, XML, messaging, debugging, life cycle events, and data storage. Students taking this class should have a good working knowledge of programming (loops and decision structures) and design (flowcharting and pseudo code).

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to interpret computer program specifications, write computer source code, compile computer source code, and execute computer programs on a given mobile device.

    Objectives:

    1. Given detailed program specifications and a Mobile Integrated Development Environment (IDE), students will utilize a computer programming language to produce a computer program for a given mobile device with a minimum of 85% accuracy.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to develop algorithms and corresponding computer code in order to solve problems.

    Objectives:

    1. Given detailed program specifications and a Mobile Integrated Development Environment (IDE), students will identify computer program inputs, outputs, and processes with a minimum of 85% accuracy.
    2. Given detailed program specifications and a Mobile Integrated Development Environment (IDE), students write and debug computer code demonstrating decision structures, with a minimum of 85% accuracy.
    3. Given detailed program specifications and a Mobile Integrated Development Environment (IDE), students write and debug computer code demonstration repetition structures, with a minimum of 85% accuracy.
    4. Given detailed program specifications and a Mobile Integrated Development Environment (IDE), students write and debug computer code demonstrating modular programming with a minimum of 85% accuracy.
    5. Given detailed program specifications and a Mobile Integrated Development Environment (IDE), students write and debug computer code demonstrating classes with a minimum of 85% accuracy.
    6. Given detailed program specifications and a Mobile Integrated Development Environment (IDE), students demonstrate mobile application life cycles with a minimum of 85% accuracy.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Introduction to Mobile Development
    2. Usage of Variables
    3. Decision Structures
    4. Loops
    5. Programming Arrays
    6. Object Oriented Programming Concepts
    7. Debugging Source Code
    8. Programming Life Cycle

    Primary Faculty
    Kohl, Martin
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Evans-Mach, Patrick
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ITCS 2510 - Mobile Development 2

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: ITCS 2500

    ITCS 2510 continues to focus on practical hands-on mobile application development. Advances topics in mobile development such as threads, services and notifications, databases, content providers, locations and maps, and application deployment. Students implement all programs and examples on a microcomputer.

    Location: Online only

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to develop an application that implements threads.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain how to use a thread
    2. Program a thread
    3. Execute a thread
    4. Update the UI thread

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to develop an application that implements services and notifications.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain how to use services and notifications
    2. Program a service and notifications
    3. Execute a service and notifications

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to develop an application that implements databases.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain how to create a database
    2. Program an SQL Query to extract and update a database
    3. Program closing and opening a database

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to develop an application that implements content providers.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the use of content providers
    2. Create a content provider
    3. Connect a content provider to their application
    4. Launch a content provider from their application

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to develop an application that implements locations and maps.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the use of locations and maps
    2. Create and use a map API key
    3. Program to display a map
    4. Program the device current location
    5. Create and set map permissions

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to deploy a mobile application.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain how to deploy/distribute an application to end users
    2. Explain how to deploy/ an application via the application marketplace
    3. Prepare an application for release
    4. Create a signed application APK file

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Integrated Development Environment Installation
    2. Threads, files, adapters, and intents
    3. Services and notifications
    4. Broadcast receivers
    5. Interacting with databases
    6. Tabs and custom adapters
    7. Content providers
    8. App widgets
    9. Application deployment
    10. Locations and maps

    Primary Faculty
    Kohl, Martin
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Evans-Mach, Patrick
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ITCS 2520 - Introduction to Apple iOS Development

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: ITCS 1140 or ITCS 1950

    ITCS 2520 provides students with practical hands-on mobile application development on the Apple iOS mobile platform. Topics include XCode and Interface Builder, outlets and actions, object oriented programming (classes, properties, functions), data types, Boolean logic, flow control, dictionaries, variables, arrays and loops, Model View Controller design pattern, and an overview of the Swift programming language and playground. Students implement all programs on an Apple computer. Students taking this course should have a good working knowledge of programming (loops and decision structures) and design (flowcharting and pseudo code).

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to develop an application that utilizes the XCode IDE.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain how to add and remove widgets to an interface.
    2. Explain the Model View Controller design pattern.
    3. Explain the concept of a .nib file.
    4. Create an application used on Cocoa and Cocoa Touch.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create one or more Storyboards available.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the Table View Controller.
    2. Explain the Collection View Controller.
    3. Explain the Navigation Controller.
    4. Explain the Tab Bar Controller.
    5. Explain the Page View Controller.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to configure an interface using the Assistant.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain how to add outlets.
    2. Explain how to add actions.
    3. Explain how to “wire” the interface to source code.
    4. Create constraints on widgets.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create computer source code using Swift.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the use of variables.
    2. Explain the use of loops.
    3. Explain the use of flow control.
    4. Explain the use of dictionaries and arrays.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create Object Oriented applications using source code.

    Objectives:

    1. Create classes.
    2. Create properties.
    3. Create functions.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Integrated Development Environment (IDE) navigation
    2. Swift Programming Language
      1. Loops
      2. Variables
      3. Data Types
      4. Flow Control
      5. Dictionaries
    3. Object Oriented Programming
    4. Storyboards
    5. Building Interfaces
      1. “Wiring” the code with the interface
      2. Model View Controller

    Primary Faculty
    Kohl, Martin
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Evans-Mach, Patrick
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ITCS 2530 - C++ Programming 1

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: ITCS 1140 or ITCS 1950

    ITCS 2530 provides students with a practical introduction to the C++ object-oriented programming language. Students learn new concepts not available in traditional programming languages such as encapsulation, data hiding, and polymorphism. Students code programs using basic constructions of decision, loops, structures, and simple functions inherent to both the C and C++ languages. Additional topics involve objects, classes, data types and arrays. Recursive function and insertion sort will be introduced. Students implement all programs and/or examples on microcomputers.

    Contact Hours: 4
    Billable Contact Hours: 4
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will create program(s) that use simple data types, control structures, interactive and file I/O, and multiple functions. Arguments are passed between functions either by value or by reference.

    Objectives:

    1. Create programs using C++ language basics.
      1. Explain the differences between C and C++ languages.
      2. Explain the basic structure of C++ programs, and the compile and linking process.
      3. Use built-in data types in programs.
      4. Develop programs using interactive and file I/O.
    2. Create programs using Control structures.
      1. Use IF structure to test for numeric, char, and string values.
      2. Explain the uses of looping structures and contrast the differences between DO, WHILE, and FOR.
      3. Develop programs using decisions and loops.
    3. Create programs using Functions.
      1. State the purpose of prototyping in compilation and linking.
      2. Properly use sub-functions to organize program and reduce redundant code.
      3. Explain variable scope and storage class as they apply to visibility and lifetime.
      4. Develop programs with multiple functions, passing arguments between functions either by value or by reference.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will create program(s) that include most facets of outcome #1 with arrays, structures, classes and objects, with simple file I/O and pointer use.

    Objectives:

    1. Create programs using Arrays.
      1. Define array of any data type and effectively use array in program.
      2. Pass array between functions for reading or for updating.
      3. Explain internal differences between integer and char arrays.
    2. Create programs using Structures.
      1. Define simple and/or nested structures to group related data.
      2. Use structures in program, pass and/or return structures between functions.
    3. Create programs using Classes and Objects.
      1. Specify simple classes with constructors and destructors.
      2. Use private and public access specifiers to define class that achieve information encapsulation.
      3. Create program(s) that pass and/or return class object(s) between functions.
    4. Create programs using Pointers
      1. Explain the use of address of operator &.
      2. Process and pass arrays using pointer notation.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. C++ language basics, built in simple data types
    2. Interactive and simple file I/O
    3. Control structures - decisions and loops
    4. Functions
    5. Structures
    6. Classes and objects
    7. Arrays and pointers

    Primary Faculty
    Zhuang, Yi-Li
    Secondary Faculty
    Schleis, George
    Associate Dean
    Johnson, Elise
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ITCS 2550 - C++ Programming 2

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: ITCS 2530

    ITCS 2550 provides students with a continuing study of C++ object-orientated programming language. Students learn additional concepts of operator overloading, multiple public and private inheritance, C++ pointers, files and streams, virtual functions, linked lists, and basic C++ CLASS libraries. Additional CLASS libraries will be used as required. Primarily, the course emphasizes object-orientated concepts and design. Students code programs involving objects, classes, multiple inheritance, new data types, C++ pointers, and file I/O. Students implement all programs and/or examples on microcomputers.

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will create program(s) using IFSTREAM, OFSTREAM, and FSTREAM classes which utilize file processing and error checking.

    Objectives:

    1. Review
      1. Explain the basic structure of C++ programs.
      2. Use decisions and loops in programs.
      3. Use structures, classes and arrays in programs.
    2. File I/O
      1. Identify members of the IOS and FSTREAM classes.
      2. Develop program(s) that utilize stream class member functions to perform error checking.
      3. Develop programs using char, string, and object I/O.
      4. Explain the difference between Binary and Character files.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will develop program(s) using intuitive class objects with overloaded operator member functions.

    Objectives:

    1. Multiple file program
      1. Organize C++ program using multiple source files and header files.
      2. Explain variable scope as it applies to multiple files program.
    2. Operator overloading
      1. Create program(s) that use overloading of Unary and Binary operators.
      2. Overload >> and < operators with the use of FRIEND functions.
      3. Explain the purpose of NAMELESS TEMPORARY objects.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will create program(s) using inheritance, polymorphism, dynamic memory allocation and template classes.

    Objectives:

    1. Inheritance
      1. Explain the reason for inheritance and multiple inheritances.
      2. Create base and derived classes.
      3. Utilize PRIVATE, PUBLIC, and PROTECTED keywords to achieve proper member access control.
    2. Pointer and dynamic memory allocation
      1. Demonstrate the use of pointers as compared to address of operator &.
      2. Create program(s) that dynamically allocate memory space using NEW and manipulate the data through pointers.
      3. Create program(s) that clean up itself using DELETE operator in destructor.
      4. Explain data conversion between basic data types and objects.
    3. Polymorphism and template classes
      1. Explain polymorphism and its significance in O.O. programming.
      2. Explain the purpose of virtual function and abstract class.
      3. Develop program(s) using array of inhomogeneous objects and manipulate the objects using pointers.
      4. Understand C++ Template classes.
      5. Create program(s) that utilize template class Vector or List.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Review - Programming Basics/Loops and Decisions
      1. Review - Structures and Functions
    2. Review - Classes and Arrays
    3. Review - Streams
    4. Operator Overloading
    5. Inheritance
    6. Pointers and Dynamic Data Allocation
    7. Virtual Functions, Abstract Classes, and Polymorphism
    8. Templates and Exceptions
    9. Object-Oriented Design

    Primary Faculty
    Zhuang, Yi-Li
    Secondary Faculty
    Schleis, George
    Associate Dean
    Johnson, Elise
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ITCS 2590 - Java 1

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: ITCS 1140 or ITCS 1950

    ITCS 2590 provides students with a practical introduction to the Java programming language. Students learn how concepts of encapsulation, constructors, inheritance, and polymorphism are implemented within the language. Students code programs using primitive types, basic statements, and dynamic data structures. Additional topics involve objects, classes, applets, and API. Students implement all programs and/or examples on a microcomputer network.

    Contact Hours: 4
    Billable Contact Hours: 4
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will create a program that will use classes employing fundamental sequence, decision, loop, arrays, and pass arguments between methods.
    Objectives:

    1. Building Blocks.
      1. Explain the basic structure of a Java program and demonstrate the compile and link process as it applies to the Java execution environment.
      2. Discuss fundamental concepts of OOP as it applies to the Java language.
      3. Identify and use primitive variables types used within the Java language.
    2. Loops and Decisions.
      1. Use if and switch structures to test primitive data types.
      2. Explain the uses of looping structures and contrast differences between do/while and for.
      3. Utilize break and continue as they apply to loops and the switch structure.
      4. Create simple methods using loops, decisions, and relational operators.
    3. Classes and Methods.
      1. Define and specify Class methods. Override methods within a Java program.
      2. Utilize instance, class, and local variables within a program.
      3. Explain package as it applies to the Java runtime system.
    4. Arrays and ArrayLists.
      1. Explain the differences between arrays and arraylists.
      2. Create a program that utilizes arrays and arraylists.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create a program that will include most facets of Outcome #1 and provide exception handling, interface use and standard I/O processing.

    Objectives:

    1. Constructors.
      1. Define and create basic constructors.
      2. Using a constructor within a class.
      3. Explain how Java implements garbage collection for memory.
    2. Inheritance and Interface.
      1. Use interface to create a pseudo multiple inheritance class.
      2. Create a program that will use a single class and an interface.
      3. Use ‘instance of’ to perform type checking of an object.
    3. Exception Handling.
      1. Develop a program using try and catch for error handling.
      2. Implement a throw to be handled by an appropriate try and catch within a program.
      3. Develop a program that produces a stack trace.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to understand common UML (Unified Modeling Language) diagrams.

    Objectives:

    1. Object Oriented Design with the UML.
      1. Create a Use Case Diagram.
      2. Create a Class Diagram with methods and instance variables.
      3. Create a Sequence Diagram.
      4. Create an Activity Diagram.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Overview of Programming and Problem Solving
    2. Java Syntax and Semantics
    3. Data Types
    4. Numeric Types, Expressions
    5. Classes
    6. Inheritance
    7. Program Input Output
    8. Software Design
    9. Conditions, Logical Expressions and Selection
    10. Looping
    11. Control Structures
    12. Arrays
    13. Object-Orientated Software Development

    Primary Faculty
    Kohl, Martin
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Evans-Mach, Patrick
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ITCS 2620 - Java 2

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: ITCS 2590

    ITCS 2620 provides students with a continuing study of the Java programming language. Students learn additional concepts involved with building portable GUI applications/applets using JFC Swing components, JavaBeans, and JDBC. Additional topics include RMI and Servlets. Students implement all programs and/or examples on a microcomputer network.

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to develop programs that introduce concepts including Data Structures including Recursion, Searching, Sorting, Strings, Characters, Regular Expressions and Generics.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain how a program uses character-string objects of class String-builder.
    2. Explain how a program uses regular expressions.
    3. Explain how to write and use recursive methods.
    4. Explain how a program uses an array to utilize linear and binary search algorithms.
    5. Explain how a program uses collections.
    6. Create a program that uses an Iterator to walk-through and collection.
    7. Explain the Collections Framework.
    8. Understand and explain the use of Generics in programming.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to develop programs that introduce concepts including Multi-threading and Networking.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain and understand the use of threads in programming.
    2. Create a program that uses multi-threading.
    3. Understand Java networking with URLs, sockets, and datagrams.
    4. Understand how to implement Java clients and servers.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to develop programs that introduce concepts including Java Database Connectivity (JDBC), and Web Development.

    Objectives:

    1. Understand database concepts.
    2. Understand the use of SQL with databases.
    3. Create a program that utilizes JDBC.
    4. Understand web development using Java technologies.
    5. Create a program that utilizes Java Server Pages (JSP).
    6. Understand the basic principles of AJAX (Asynchronous JavaScript and XML) technology.
    7. Explain the use of Web Services.
    8. Create a program that utilizes Web Services.
    9. Explain how XML, JSON, SOAP, and REST architectures enable Java Web Services.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Assignment Requirements - Big Picture - What’s a jar and how does it work?
    2. Multi-threading
    3. Collections
    4. Advanced AWT
    5. Advanced Swing
    6. Networking
    7. Database Connectivity - JDBC
    8. Remote Objects
    9. JavaBeans

    Primary Faculty
    Kohl, Martin
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Evans-Mach, Patrick
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ITCS 2700 - Data Structures

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: ITCS 2550  or ITCS 2620  

    This course provides students with a study of classical abstract data types (ADT).  Emphasis will be placed on matching the appropriate data structures and algorithms to application problems.  Object oriented structures such as linked lists, stacks, queues and trees will be developed.   Algorithms such as hashing, searching and sorting, disjoint sets and graphing will also be implemented.   Students will evaluate complexity theory (Big O) across these algorithms.  This course assumes that students are already familiar with object oriented programming and dynamic data allocation using pointers. 

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 4
    Billable Contact Hours: 4
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to outline behaviors and properties of abstract data types.

    Objectives:

    1. Use Linked lists, stacks and queues to solve problems.
    2. Use Hashing and Trees to solve problems.
    3. Use sorting, disjoint sets and graphing algorithms to solve problems.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to  assess complexity of an algorithm based upon a specific criterion.

    Objectives:

    1. Discuss Big O notation including its implications
    2. Differentiate complexity based upon various criteria

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to design and implement fundamental data structures and algorithms.

    Objectives:

    1. Develop structures based upon the classical ADT models
    2. Apply the classical algorithms to the listed Data structures.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to compare and contrast the operation of common data structures in terms of complexity and data structures that they implement. 

    Objectives:

    1. Evaluate structures based upon the classical ADT models
    2. Compare complexity of algorithms and data structures

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to solve problems within the discrete math. 

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the discrete math models.
    2. Describe Graph Theory including trees, number and set theory.
    3. Explain the use of Recursion in the algorithms.

     


    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    •   1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.

    2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.

    3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.

    4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.

    5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

     


    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Discrete Math Review
    2. Algorithm Analysis
    3. Lists, Stacks, Queues
    4. Trees
    5. Hashing
    6. Priority Queues
    7. Sorting
    8. Disjoint Sets
    9. Graph Algorithms

    Primary Faculty
    Schleis, George
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Evans-Mach, Patrick
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ITCS 2830 - Applications Implementation & Testing

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: BCOM 2070 and one of the following: ITCS 1250 or ITCS 2530 or ITCS 2590

    ITCS 2830 provides students with practical experience in developing and critiquing sets of application level specifications. Students begin by developing components of application-level specifications given a set of high-level requirements. Students are then given a complete set of project specifications and a completed software application. Students design and execute a test plan; testing the application for compliance to application specifications. Students make recommendations for application improvements. Student improvement recommendations include the application interface, application function, processes supported by the application, source code errors, application security, and application deviations from the original project specifications.

    Contact Hours: 4
    Billable Contact Hours: 4
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create a set of application specifications.

    Objectives:

    1. Create interview questions for application stakeholders.
    2. Develop complete and appropriate program specifications.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create a testing plan.

    Objectives:

    1. Modify a test plan template.
    2. Identify components of a testing plan.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to complete a thorough test of an application.

    Objectives:

    1. Analyze an application.
    2. Develop a complete test plan.
    3. Create documentation that identifies application non-conformance issues.
    4. Develop a task list to bring the application into conformance with specifications.
    5. Make appropriate recommendations for modification.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to assess code written in more than one computer programming language.

    Objectives: 

    1. Work in teams to solve complex problems.
    2. Evaluate code segments written in several modern languages.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to outline the Agile Methodology as it pertains to programming applications.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the components that comprise an Agile environment.
    2. Compare Waterfall and Agile methodologies.
    3. Explain the use of unit testing in programming applications.
    4. Explain iterative application development.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Developing specifications for a project based on a project description
      1. Identifying stake holders
      2. Developing the interview sheet
      3. Interviewing
      4. Developing project specifications
    2. Developing a test plan
      1. Identify specific processes or procedures to be tested
      2. Using a test plan template, modify the plan to enable testing of specific objectives
    3. Test an Application
      1. Using a program solution provided to the students and the test plan students prepared, test the application
      2. Identify areas of the program where the test is in compliance.
      3. Identify areas of the program where the test demonstrates non-compliance.
    4. Provide recommendations and feedback
      1. In teams, examine the code to identify areas that are not in compliance
      2. Provide recommendations for changing the offending code

    Primary Faculty
    Kohl, Martin
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Evans-Mach, Patrick
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


IT-Cybersecurity

  
  • ITIA 1200 - Introduction to Information Systems Security

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: ITNT 1500 or ITNC 1000 or ITNC 1010

    (formerly ITCS 2180)

    ITIA 1200 introduces students to the various elements of information systems security. Topics include information security planning, logical and physical security design, security plan implementation and administration, and legal and liability issues surrounding information systems. Students explore various security threats and learn how to protect an organization against malicious attacks through processes that ensure confidentiality, availability, and data integrity.

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will identify system vulnerabilities.

    Objectives:

    1. Recognize network vulnerabilities. (Example: routers, switches and wireless access points.)
    2. Recognize application vulnerabilities. (Example: Microsoft Office, web browsers, shareware.)
    3. Recognize operating system vulnerabilities.
    4. Recognize hardware vulnerabilities.
    5. Recognize physical security vulnerabilities.
    6. Recognize communication vulnerabilities in transmitting information across the network.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will recommend resolution strategies.

    Objectives:

    1. Propose changes to remediate network vulnerabilities.
    2. Propose changes to remediate application vulnerabilities.
    3. Propose changes to remediate operating system vulnerabilities.
    4. Propose changes to remediate hardware vulnerabilities.
    5. Propose changes to remediate physical security vulnerabilities.
    6. Propose cryptographic solutions to protect communications across a network.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will identify security management practices.

    Objectives:

    1. Distinguish between access control methods.
    2. Distinguish between authentication methods.
    3. Identify the components of a disaster recovery plan.
    4. Identify potential legal issues regarding information systems security. (Example: software piracy.)

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Access Control Systems and Methodology
      1. Access control security models
      2. Identification and authentication technologies and techniques
      3. Access control administration
      4. Data ownership
      5. Attack methods
    2. Telecommunications and Network Security
      1. OSI model and layers
      2. LAN, MAN, WAN technologies
      3. Internet, intranet, extranet issues
      4. Virtual Private Networks, firewalls, routers, other devices
      5. Network topologies and cabling
      6. Attack methods
    3. Security Management Practices
      1. Data classification
      2. Policies, procedures, standards, guidelines
      3. Risk assessment and management
      4. Personnel security, training, and awareness
    4. Cryptography
      1. Symmetric versus asymmetric algorithms and uses
      2. Public key infrastructure (PKI) and hashing functions
      3. Encryption protocols and implementation
      4. Attack methods
    5. Security Architecture and Models
      1. Security models
      2. Evaluation criteria
      3. Common flaws in applications and systems
    6. Business Continuity Planning and Disaster Recovery Planning
      1. Business resource identification and value assignment
      2. Business impact analysis and prediction of possible losses
      3. Unit priorities and crisis management
      4. Plan development, implementation, and maintenance
    7. Laws, Investigations, and Ethics
      1. Laws, regulations, and crimes
      2. Licensing and software piracy
      3. Export and import laws and issues
      4. Evidence types and admissibility into court
      5. Incident handling
    8. Physical Security
      1. Restricted areas, authorization methods, and controls
      2. Motion detectors, sensors, and alarms
      3. Intrusion Detection
      4. Fire detection, prevention, and suppression
      5. Fencing, security guards

    Primary Faculty
    Nabozny, Keith
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Johnson, Elise
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ITIA 1310 - Certified Ethical Hacker

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: ITIA 1200

    (formerly ITIA 1300)

    Students will use tools and applications that are common in the cybersecurity industry like Nmap, Wireshark and Kali to analyze networks, interpret information and recommend changes to reduce security risks and vulnerabilities. Students will configure firewalls and virtual private networks (VPN). Students will also write a network security analysis. Assignments will prepare students to take the Certified Ethical Hacker exam.

    Location: South Campus

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Students will be able to use applications common to network security professionals.

    Objectives:

    1. Perform packet analysis.
    2. Interpret packet analysis results.
    3. Perform a network scan.
    4. Interpret network scan results.
    5. Analyze a system log file.
    6. Explain the appropriate use of exploitation tools.

    Outcome 2: Students will be able to configure network security.

    Objectives:

    1. Configure an operating system to improve network security.
    2. Configure a security device to improve network security.
    3. Configure a firewall to permit and deny traffic.
    4. Configure a virtual private network.
    5. Evaluate different types of encryption.

    Outcome 3: Students will be able to evaluate vulnerabilities.

    1. Assess different types of security.
    2. Recommend remediation strategies.
    3. Perform a basic risk assessment.
    4. Write a network security analysis.

    Outcome 4: Students will be able to explain best practices as they apply to network security.

    1. Identify professional codes of conduct common to network security professions.
    2. Explain the responsibilities of a network security professional.
    3. Interpret how laws affect hacking activities.
    4. Interpret the implications of different security policies.
    5. Describe compliance regulations.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Gather information with security and network analysis applications
    2. Analyze information from security and network analysis applications
    3. Analyze vulnerabilities and recommend remediation strategies
    4. Configure security technologies

    Primary Faculty
    Nabozny, Keith
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Johnson, Elise
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ITIA 2310 - Information Security Policies & Risk Management

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: ITIA 1200

    (formerly ITIA 1400 and ITIA 2300)

    Students will analyze existing laws and policies and explain how they affect the security of a company or its users. They will use project-based assignments to write security policies. Students will also analyze existing systems for vulnerabilities and risks and make recommendations for mitigation. Provided a scenario where a system breach has occurred, students will recommend the appropriate response. Students will create a basic risk assessment report for a fictional company.

    Location: Online only

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Explain how a law or policy affects the security of a company or its users.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe how the type of legal dispute (civil, criminal, private) affects the evidence used to resolve it.
    2. Describe the responsibilities related to the handling of information about vulnerabilities.
    3. Describe the major components of laws (example: FERPA, HIPAA) and policies that relate to cyber security.

    Outcome 2: Recommend appropriate measures to prevent or respond to a computer system compromise.

    Objectives:

    1. Analyze common security failures and identify specific design principles that have been violated.
    2. Describe appropriate measures to be taken should a system compromise occur.
    3. Describe potential system attacks and the actors that might perform them.

    Outcome 3: Recommend security technologies/methods to reduce vulnerabilities and risks.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify vulnerabilities and risks in a typical system.
    2. Explain which security technologies/methods mitigate specific vulnerabilities and risks.
    3. Analyze data from a security breach.

    Outcome 4: Prepare a security policy and basic risk assessment.

    Objectives:

    1. Write a security policy.
    2. Create a basic risk assessment.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Laws and policies related to cyber security
    2. System attacks and failures
    3. Risks and vulnerabilities
    4. Mitigation strategies
    5. Basic risk assess

    Primary Faculty
    Nabozny, Keith
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Johnson, Elise
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ITIA 2800 - Penetration Testing & Analysis

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: ITIA 1310

    Corequisites: ITCS 1140

    This course builds on skills and knowledge learned in ITIA 1310 and ITIA 1500 to analyze the security of networks and devices. Students will use tools and applications that are common in the cybersecurity industry like Nmap, Wireshark and Kali to analyze networks, interpret information and recommend changes to reduce security risks and vulnerabilities. This course will focus on the tools, techniques and reporting used in penetration testing and analysis.

    Location: South Campus

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Students will use penetration testing applications

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the appropriate use of penetration testing applications
    2. Explain how penetration testing applications work
    3. Demonstrate how penetration testing applications work
    4. Analyze data related to penetration testing

    Outcome 2: Students will evaluate systems for penetration testing

    Objectives:

    1. Assess different security systems
    2. Describe different exploitation techniques
    3. Recommend an appropriate exploitation method for a given situation

    Outcome 3: Students will write a penetration testing report

    Objectives:

    1. Interpret data from penetration testing applications
    2. Explain the implications of penetration testing results
    3. Recommend mitigation strategies for vulnerabilities

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Gather information with security and network analysis applications
    2. Analyze information from security and network analysis applications
    3. Analyze vulnerabilities and recommend remediation strategies
    4. Configure security technologies

    Primary Faculty
    Nabozny, Keith
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Johnson, Elise
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


IT-Networking-Cisco

  
  • ITNC 1010 - Cisco Networking (CCNA) 1

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: None

    (formerly ITNC 1000)

    This course introduces the architecture, structure, functions, components, and models of the Internet and other computer networks. The principles and structure of IP addressing and the fundamentals of Ethernet concepts, media, and operations are also presented. This is the first of four courses to prepare students for the Cisco Certified Network Associate (CCNA) Routing & Switching exam.

    Contact Hours: 4
    Billable Contact Hours: 4
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to use IP addressing and subnetting skills to develop an addressing scheme for a small computer network.

    Objectives:

    1. Develop an IPv4 and IPv6 addressing plan
    2. Describe the association between physical and logical addressing.
    3. Explain and demonstrate the mechanics associated with IP subnetting.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain the importance of Internet protocols.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the major TCP/IP application protocols.
    2. Describe routing and their associated routing protocols
    3. Describe switching and their associated switching protocols

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to Use the Cisco Command Line Interface (CLI).

    Objectives:

    1. Perform basic router and switch initialization.
    2. Perform basic router configuration.
    3. Perform basic switch configuration.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Configuring a Network Operating System
    2. Network Protocols and Communications
    3. IP Addressing
    4. Subnetting IP Networks
    5. Ethernet Networks

    Primary Faculty
    Koss, John
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Johnson, Elise
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ITNC 1050 - Cisco Networking 1 (CCNA)

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: ITNT 1500

    (formerly ITNC 1110)

    ITNC 1050 provides practical knowledge of the architecture, components, and operations of routers and switches in a small to midsize network. This is the first of three courses to prepare students for the Cisco Certified Network Associate (CCNA) exam.

    Location: South Campus

    Contact Hours: 4
    Billable Contact Hours: 4
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to use the Cisco Command Line Interface (CLI).

    Objectives:

    1. Perform basic router and switch initialization.
    2. Perform basic router configuration.
    3. Perform basic switch configuration.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to configure basic routing in a small to midsize network.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the purpose of a router, including operations of a router, routing tables, and the route lookup process.
    2. Configure static routing and default routing.
    3. Troubleshoot static routing and default routing.
    4. Configure OSPF.
    5. Troubleshoot OSPF.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to configure basic switching in a small to midsize network.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe switch operations in an enterprise network.
    2. Compare and contrast switch frame forwarding vs. flooding.
    3. Describe how VLANs create logically separate networks.
    4. Configure a switch for basic operation in a single VLAN network.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to implement the spanning-tree protocol in a switched network.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the purpose of the spanning-tree protocol in an enterprise network, including operations.
    2. Configure spanning-tree and rapid spanning-tree in an enterprise network.
    3. Troubleshoot spanning-tree and rapid spanning-tree in an enterprise network.
    4. Draw a spanning tree that represents the logical topology of an enterprise network

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.

        3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.

    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Basic Switching and Routing Concepts and Configuration
    2. IPv4 subnetting
    3. Virtual LANs
    4. Inter-VLAN Routing
    5. Static Routing
    6. OSPF
    7. Spanning-tree Protocol

    Primary Faculty
    Koss, John
    Secondary Faculty
    Nabozny, Keith
    Associate Dean
    Johnson, Elise
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ITNC 1150 - Cisco Networking 2 (CCNA)

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: ITNC 1050

    (formerly ITNC 2010)

    ITNC 1150 introduces the student to the architecture, components, and operations of routers and switches in large, complex networks. This is the second of three courses to prepare students for the Cisco Certified Network Associate (CCNA) exam.

    Location: South Campus

    Contact Hours: 4
    Billable Contact Hours: 4
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to implement basic wireless technologies.

    Objectives:

    1. Generate wireless router configuration.
    2. Generate wireless client configuration.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to implement IP address scaling.

    Objectives:

    1. Configure DHCP for IPv4 on a router.
    2. Troubleshoot DHCP for IPv4 on a router.
    3. Configure DHCP for IPv6 on a router.
    4. Troubleshoot DHCP for IPv6 on a router.
    5. Configure NAT for IPv4 on a router.
    6. Troubleshoot NAT for IPv4 on a router.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to implement packet filtering on a router and switch.

    Objectives:

    1. Configure ACLs for IPv4 on a router.
    2. Troubleshoot ACLs for IPv4 on a router.
    3. Configure ACLs for IPv6 on a router.
    4. Troubleshoot ACLs for IPv6 on a router.
    5. Configure ACLs on VTY lines on a router and switch.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to manage basic devices in a small network.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the utility of the Cisco Discovery Protocol.
    2. Configure syslog on a router.
    3. Troubleshoot syslog on a router.
    4. Configure SNMP on a router.
    5. Troubleshoot SNMP on a router.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.

        3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.

    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Wireless Technologies
    2. IPv6
    3. Access Control Lists
    4. DHCPv4
    5. Cisco Device Mangement
    6. Network Address Translation

    Primary Faculty
    Koss, John
    Secondary Faculty
    Nabozny, Keith
    Associate Dean
    Johnson, Elise
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ITNC 2050 - Cisco Networking 3 (CCNA)

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: ITNC 1150

    (formerly ITNC 2110)

    ITNC 2050 introduces the student to network services required by applications in a complex network. This is the third of three courses to prepare students for the Cisco Certified Network Associate (CCNA) exam.

    Location: South Campus

    Contact Hours: 4
    Billable Contact Hours: 4
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain the usage of Ethernet in modern LANs and WANS.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the components of a 2-tier hierarchal network design.
    2. Describe the components of a 3-tier hierarchal network design.
    3. Describe the components of Metro Ethernet.
    4. Describe the components of Power over Ethernet.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain the usage of Quality of Service in the network.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe IP SLA including its benefits.
    2. Describe Policy Based Routing including its benefits.
    3. Describe the operation of DSCP marking and classification.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to evaluate how cloud services are used in network operations.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the public cloud including its benefits and weaknesses.
    2. Compare and contrast the public cloud and an on-premises data center.
    3. Describe how cloud technologies can benefit network operations.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to outline how RESTful APIs and their data formats are used in network automation.

    Objectives:

    1. List the common methods used in RESTful protocols.
    2. Describe JSON (JavaScript Object Notation).
    3. Describe how network automation benefits an organization.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.

        3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.

    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. LAN/WAN Architecture
    2. Network Quality of Service
    3. Cloud Service in the Network
    4. REST APIs and data formats
    5. Network Automation

    Primary Faculty
    Koss, John
    Secondary Faculty
    Nabozny, Keith
    Associate Dean
    Johnson, Elise
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


IT-Networking

  
  • ITNT 1500 - Principles of Networking

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: None

    (formerly ITCS 1500 and ITCS 1510)

    ITNT 1500 introduces students to the basic principles and concepts of networking. It focuses on the terminology and technologies found in current networking environments. Topics include internetworking protocols and communication methods, network media, troubleshooting and configuration utilities, basics of network design and network management.

    Contact Hours: 4
    Billable Contact Hours: 4
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Describe elements used to communicate on a network.

    Objectives:

    1. Define key networking terms.
    2. Describe the physical addressing of devices.
    3. Describe the logical addressing of devices.

    Outcome 2: Distinguish between network types.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the similarities and differences between network topologies.
    2. Choose the appropriate network device to use in a given situation.
    3. Choose the appropriate network media to use in a given situation.

    Outcome 3: Explain how devices communicate using TCP/IP.

    Objectives:

    1. Differentiate between connection-oriented and connectionless protocols.
    2. Explain the purpose of different communication protocols.

    Outcome 4: Configure devices on a network.

    Objectives:

    1. Gather information about a network from a client device.
    2. Configure the basic network properties of a client device.
    3. Subnet a network.

    Outcome 5: Explain the key elements in managing a network.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the value of network documentation.
    2. Recognize the importance of a network security policy.
    3. Describe the purpose of a change management process.
    4. Describe the basics of managing network devices.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Introduction and Overview
      1. What are networks and why do we need them
      2. History of the internet
    2. Network Architectures and Standards
      1. Standards bodies (example: IEEE)
      2. OSI Reference Model
      3. TCP/IP
    3. Internetworking
      1. TCP/IP
      2. IP Addressing (IPv4 and IPv6)
      3. MAC Addresses
      4. Subnetting
      5. DNS
      6. DHCP
      7. Network Address Translation (NAT and PAT)
      8. Ethernet including CSMA/CD
      9. Wireless including CSMA/CA
      10. Three-way handshake
    4. Data communication fundamentals
      1. Analog and digital transmissions
      2. Wired media types (example: fiber, UTP)
      3. Wireless media standards (example: 802.11b/g/n, WiMAX)
      4. Network components (NIC, switch, router)
    5. Network Classification
      1. LANs and WANs
      2. Topology types (bus, star, ring, mesh)
      3. Network types (client/server, server/server, peer/peer)
    6. Introduction to Protocols
      1. Connectionless vs. Connection-oriented protocols
      2. Protocol functions in relation to the OSI model
    7. Communications Circuits
      1. Leased circuits
      2. Packet-switched connections
      3. Circuit-switched connections
    8. Wide Area Networks
      1. Topology
      2. Routing traffic
      3. Specific WAN systems
    9. Network utilities
      1. Command-line interface utilities (Example: PING, TRACERT, NSLOOKUP)
      2. Configuring network settings on an end-user device
    10. Network Security
      1. Encryption types
      2. Network attack types (example: denial of service)
      3. Malware types (example: virus, Trojan horse)
      4. Firewalls
      5. Intrusion detection/prevention
    11. Network Design
      1. Availability
      2. Redundancy
      3. Quality of Service
    12. Network Management
      1. SNMP
      2. Backup strategies
    13. Network Troubleshooting
      1. Basic strategies
      2. Basic tools
      3. Introduction to Wireshark

    Primary Faculty
    Nabozny, Keith
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Johnson, Elise
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ITNT 2130 - Network Design 1

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: ITOS 1410

    (formerly ITCS 2130)

    ITNT 2130 focuses on the process of designing computer networks that meet specific business and technical goals. Students learn how to design a network that meets requirements for functionality, capacity, performance, availability, scalability, affordability, security, and manageability.

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to apply fundamental concepts of network design to a variety of scenarios.

    Objectives:   

    1. Choose the appropriate network media for a given scenario (e.g. wireless, copper, fiber)
    2. Explain the advantages and disadvantages of different network technologies
    3. Apply the appropriate type of network security for a given scenario
    4. Explain the purpose of routing protocols (e.g. RIP, EIGRP, OSPF)
    5. Explain the purpose of switching protocols (e.g. STP, VTP)
    6. Apply the appropriate cloud-based service for a given scenario
    7. Identify potential solutions that address the customer’s business requirements
    8. Identify potential solutions that address the customer’s technical requirements

     

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to prepare documentation in response to a RFP (request for proposal) for a network upgrade/installation

    Objectives:   

       1. Create a written document that addresses the issues presented in the customer’s RFP
           a. Explain how a proposed solution addresses the customer’s business requirements
           ​b. Explain how a proposed solution addresses the customer’s technical requirements
       2. Create a Bill of Materials spreadsheet with a list of equipment that fulfills the customer’s requirements
       3. Create a network diagram that visually interprets a network design that fulfills the customer’s requirements
       4. Create an IP addressing scheme using VLSM that fulfills the customer’s requirements
       ​5. Create a device naming convention that fulfills the customer’s requirements

          

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to use protocol analysis software (e.g., Wireshark) to analyze a capture of network traffic.

    Objectives:   

    1. Explain the basic features of a protocol analysis application
    2. Create a capture file of network traffic
    3. Create filters for specific types of network traffic
    4. Modify default settings (e.g. profiles, protocol colors, columns, timestamps, etc.)
    5. Analyze a capture file and identify basic network problems
    6. Analyze tables and graphs of network traffic
    7. Analyze a capture file by reassembling traffic

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Identifying Your Customer’s Needs and Goals
    a. Analyzing customer business requirements
    b. Analyzing customer technical requirements
    c. Characterizing the existing network

     

    2. Network Design
    a. Designing a network topology
    b. Designing models for IP addressing and naming
    c. Creating a network diagram
    d. Selecting technologies and devices for a variety of network types (e.g. LANs, CANs, MANs, WANs, cloud-based, etc.)

     

    3. Network Design Documentation
    a. Writing a response to an RFP
    b. Creating supporting documentation

     

    4. Protocol Analysis
    a. Analyzing network traffic
    b. Customizing features in a protocol analysis application


    Primary Faculty
    Nabozny, Keith
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Johnson, Elise
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


IT-Operating Systems

  
  • ITOS 1410 - Windows Server Administration 1

    Credit Hours: 4.00
    Prerequisites: ITNT 1500 or ITNC 1000 or ITNC 1010

    This course provides students with the knowledge and skills to install and configure a Microsoft Windows server environment. Topics include managing user accounts, resource management, hardware configuration, monitoring system performance, file and print services, basic Active Directory management, IP addressing, basic virtualization technologies, and basic Windows security principles.

    Contact Hours: 4
    Billable Contact Hours: 4
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    1. Install and Configure Servers
      1. Install the current Windows Server
      2. Convert between Server Core and full GUI
      3. Configure local storage
    2. Configure Server Roles and Features
      1. Create network file shares
      2. Configure local and network file permissions
      3. Configure printers
      4. Configure remote management
    3. Configure Virtualization
      1. Create a virtual machine
      2. Configure memory and storage on virtual machines
      3. Configure virtual networks
    4. Configure networking services
      1. Configure IP addresses
      2. Configure DHCP services
      3. Configure DNS services
    5. Configure Active Directory
      1. Install an Active Directory Domain Controller
      2. Create Active Directory Users
      3. Create Active Directory Groups
      4. Create Active Directory Organizational Units
    6. Configure Group Policy
      1. Create Group Policy Objects (GPOs)
      2. Configure security policies
      3. Configure application restriction policies
      4. Configure Windows Firewall

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Installing Servers
      1. Install Windows Server
      2. Configure initial settings
    2. Configuring Servers
      1. Convert between Server Core and GUI
      2. Install roles and features
    3. Configuring Local Storage
      1. Plan server storage
      2. Configure Windows disk settings
      3. Create disks, partitions, volumes, and file systems
    4. Configuring File and Share Access
      1. Create network file shares
      2. Assign permissions
      3. Configure Volume Shadow Copies
      4. Configure disk quotas
    5. Configuring Print and Document Services
      1. Install printers
      2. Share printers
      3. Manage documents and printers
    6. Configuring Servers for Remote Management
      1. Use Server Manager
      2. Use Remote Server Administration Tools
      3. Use PowerShell
    7. Creating and Configuring Virtual Machine Settings
      1. Virtualization architecture
      2. Use virtualization software
      3. Configure virtual machine resources
    8. Creating and Configuring Virtual Machine Storage
      1. Install virtual disks
      2. SAN technologies
    9. Creating and Configuring Virtual Networks
      1. Create virtual switches
      2. Configure virtual network adapters
    10. Configuring IPv4 and IPv6 Addressing
      1. IPv4 subnetting
      2. IPv6 structure
      3. Assign addresses
    11. Deploying and Configuring the DHCP Service
      1. DHCP packets
      2. DHCP options
      3. Designing a DHCP deployment
      4. Install DHCP
    12. Deploying and Configuring the DNS Service
      1. DNS and Internet domain names
      2. Create DNS domains
      3. Install a DNS Server
    13. Installing Domain Controllers
      1. Active Directory architecture
      2. Install a Domain Controller
    14. Creating and Managing Active Directory Users and Computers
      1. Create users
      2. Create computers
    15. Creating and Managing Active Directory Groups and Organizational Units
      1. Design domain structure
      2. Create Organizational Units
      3. Group types and group scopes
      4. Create groups
    16. Creating Group Policy Objects
      1. Group Policy architecture
      2. Create Group Policy Objects
    17. Configuring Security Policies
      1. Configure user security policies
      2. Configure computer security policies
      3. Configure User Account Control
    18. Configuring Application Restriction Policies
      1. Install software with Group Policy
      2. Restrict software with Group Policy
      3. AppLocker
    19. Configuring Windows Firewall
      1. Basic firewall configuration
      2. Firewall profiles
      3. Custom firewall rules

    Primary Faculty
    Hornung, Patrick
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Johnson, Elise
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088
  
  • ITOS 1510 - Windows Server Administration 2

    Credit Hours: 4.00
    Prerequisites: ITOS 1410

    This course provides students with the knowledge and skills to install and configure a Microsoft Windows server environment. Topics include operating system deployment, patch management, server monitoring, advanced file sharing, network infrastructure services, remote access, network security, intermediate Active Directory management, and Group Policy.

    Contact Hours: 4
    Billable Contact Hours: 4
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    1. Deploy, Manage, and Maintain Servers
      1. Deploy an operating system with WDS
      2. Configure WSUS to distribute patches
      3. Create a Data Collector Set for server monitoring
    2. Configure File and Print Services
      1. Configure a highly available DFS file server
      2. Configure quotas
      3. Configure file system encryption
      4. Configure audit policies
    3. Configure Network Services and Access
      1. Create a DNS zone
      2. Create DNS resource records
      3. Configure VPN access
      4. Configure DirectAccess
    4. Configure a Network Policy Server Infrastructure
      1. Configure RADIUS
      2. Create network policies using NPS
      3. Configure Network Access Protection
    5. Configure and Manage Active Directory
      1. Configure service authentication
      2. Configure Domain Controllers
      3. Back up Active Directory
      4. Configure user password policy
    6. Configure and Manage Group Policy
      1. Configure Group Policy processing
      2. Configure Group Policy settings
      3. Configure Group Policy preferences

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Deploying and Managing Server Images
      1. Install WDS
      2. Capture images
      3. Deploy images
    2. Implementing Patch Management
      1. Install WSUS
      2. Synchronize WSUS
      3. Deploy patches with WSUS
    3. Monitoring Servers
      1. Interpret events with Event Viewer
      2. Assess performance using Performance Monitor
      3. Assess reliability with Reliability Monitor
    4. Configuring Distributed File System (DFS)
      1. Install DFS
      2. Create namespace
      3. Create highly available file services
    5. Configuring File Server Resource Manager (FSRM)
      1. Install FSRM
      2. Create quotas
      3. Create file screen
    6. Configuring File Services and Disk Encryption
      1. Encrypt files with EFS
      2. Encrypt files with BitLocker
    7. Configuring Advanced Audit Policies
      1. Configure auditing
      2. Create audit policies
    8. Configuring DNS Zones
      1. Explain DNS hierarchy
      2. Create DNS zone
      3. Configure DNS Server settings
    9. Configuring DNS Records
      1. Create DNS resource records
      2. Explain DNS resource record types
    10. Configuring VPN and Routing
      1. Configure routing
      2. Configure remote access
      3. Configure NAT
    11. Configuring DirectAccess
      1. Compare DirectAccess and VPN
      2. Create a DirectAccess server layout
      3. Configure DirectAccess
    12. Configuring a Network Policy Server
      1. Configure RADIUS
      2. Explain use case for RADIUS
    13. Configuring NPS Policies
      1. Configure network policies
    14. Configuring Network Access Protection (NAP)
      1. Configure NAP
      2. Explain use case for NAP
    15. Configuring Server Authentication
      1. Compare NTLM and Kerberos
      2. Configure service accounts
    16. Configuring Domain Controllers
      1. Explain Global Catalog
      2. Configure Global Catalog
      3. Explain FSMO roles
      4. Configure FSMO roles
    17. Maintaining Active Directory
      1. Explain Active Directory components
      2. Back up Active Directory
    18. Configuring Account Policies
      1. Configure domain password policy
    19. Configuring Group Policy Processing
      1. Explain Group Policy processing order
      2. Configure Group Policy filtering
    20. Configuring Group Policy Settings
      1. Install software using Group Policy
      2. Configure folder redirection
    21. Managing Group Policy Objects
      1. Back up Group Policy Objects
    22. Configuring Group Policy Preferences
      1. Configure Windows settings
      2. Configure user interface using Group Policy

    Primary Faculty
    Hornung, Patrick
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Johnson, Elise
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088
  
  • ITOS 1710 - Introduction to Linux

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: None

    ITOS 1710 provides a technical overview of the Linux operating system, providing hands-on experience with commands and files. Students explore the basic structure, functions, and tools of the Linux operating system. Topics include basic Linux commands, files and directories, text editing, pipes and filters, shell environment, and scripting. This is one of two courses required for students wishing to pursue the Linux+ industry certification.

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to manipulate files in the Linux Operating System.

    Objectives:

    1. Using a standard text editor, students create and modify files with a minimum of 85% accuracy.
    2. Using standard Linux software utilities, students create and modify file directories with a minimum of 85% accuracy.
    3. Using standard Linux software utilities, students create, delete and modify directory and file permissions with a minimum of 85% accuracy.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to use Linux command line utilities to perform simple management tasks.

    Objectives:

    1. Using Linux command line utilities students manipulate files, with a minimum of 85% accuracy.
    2. Use basic Linux utilities to perform more complex file manipulation tasks.
    3. Using a standard text editor and the Linux command line, students create and execute basic shell scripts, with a 85% minimum accuracy.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to perform basic Linux system administration.

    Objectives:

    1. Using the command line, students will archive and compress files with a minimum of 85% accuracy
    2. Using Linux software utilities, students install application packages, with a 85% minimum accuracy.
    3. Using Linux software utilities, students manage jobs and processes, with a 85% minimum accuracy.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Basic Concepts
      1. Logging on to the system
      2. Starting Linux terminal sessions
      3. Communicating instructions to the shell
      4. Basic file system navigation
      5. Accessing the manual pages
    2. Intermediate Concepts
      1. Issuing commands to execute utilities
      2. Managing input and output
      3. Modifying the user environment
      4. Managing files and directories
      5. Changing file and directory permissions
    3. Manipulating File Contents
      1. Introduction to Linux file editors
      2. Adding and deleting text in a file
      3. Moving and copying text in a file
    4. Using Utilities to Accomplish Complex Tasks
      1. Using intermediate utilities
      2. Creating and executing a script
      3. Using scripts to perform administrative tasks
      4. Changing permissions for files in all subdirectories
    5. Basic System Administration
      1. Managing jobs and processes
      2. Printing files
      3. Archiving files
      4. Managing system startup and shutdown
      5. Managing users
      6. Installing application packages

    Primary Faculty
    Koss, John
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Johnson, Elise
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ITOS 1720 - Linux Server Administration

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: ITNT 1500 or ITNC 1010; and ITOS 1710

    ITOS 1720 provides students with the knowledge and skills required to perform basic Linux server administration. Topics include management of user accounts; configuring TCP/IP networking services; administering printing, web, file sharing, naming, and addressing services; configuring basic security and event logging. This is one of two courses required for students wishing to pursue the Linux+ industry certification.

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to manage users in the Linux Operating System

    Objectives:

    1. Using standard Linux software utilities, modify and delete user accounts with a minimum of 85% accuracy.
    2. Using standard Linux software utilities, modify and delete user groups with a minimum of 85% accuracy.
    3. Using standard Linux software utilities, modify and delete system resource permissions with a minimum of 85% accuracy.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to configure local Linux services.

    Objectives:

    1. Using standard Linux software utilities, configure IP (Internet Protocol) addressing and name resolution with a minimum of 85% accuracy.
    2. Using standard Linux software utilities, configure server service security with a minimum of 85% accuracy.
    3. Using standard Linux software utilities configure, event logging with a minimum of 85% accuracy.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to configure Linux server services.

    Objectives:

    1. Using standard Linux software utilities, install Linux server services with a minimum of 85% accuracy.
    2. Using standard Linux software utilities, configure Linux server services with a minimum of 85% accuracy.
    3. Using standard Linux software utilities, troubleshoot Linux server services with a minimum of 85% accuracy.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Basic Concepts
      1. Configuring local IP addressing
      2. Configuring local name resolution
      3. Installing system software
      4. Configuring system logging
      5. Configuring local security
    2. Intermediate Concepts
      1. Configuring a web server
      2. Configuring a DNS (Domain Name System) server
      3. Configuring a SSH (Secure Shell) server
      4. Configuring a CUPS (Common Unix Printing System) server
      5. Configuring a NFS (Network File System) server
      6. Configuring a Samba server
    3. Advance Concepts
      1. Troubleshooting server services
      2. Managing server services
      3. Configuring server service security

    Primary Faculty
    Kohl, Martin
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Evans-Mach, Patrick
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


IT-Web Programming

  
  • ITWP 1000 - Introduction to Web Programming

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: None

    This course introduces Web Programming using HTML, current web technologies, and website development tools. It emphasizes the fundamental understanding of HTML for web page development, the utilization of CSS for web page layout and formatting, and the use of JavaScript for interactivity and covers current industry standards, processes and techniques.

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe Internet standards, the client/server model, commonly used Internet protocols, URLs, domain names, markup languages and basic web terminology.

    Objectives:

    1. Given an examination, students utilize terms, research and concepts to demonstrate their understanding of basic web terminology and functions, with a minimum of 85% accuracy.
    2. Given a case scenario, students debug, correct and validate basic HTML source code utilizing an online validation tool that adheres to current Internet standards with a minimum of 90% accuracy.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will develop a single web page with multiple hyperlinks using HTML and publish (FTP) the result to a web server.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a text/HTML editor, students develop a single web page containing multiple hyperlinks using correct HTML syntax with a minimum of 90% accuracy.
    2. Given a text/HTML editor and web browser, students analyze and correct broken page hyperlinks to further enhance problem-solving skills with a minimum of 90% accuracy.
    3. Given a FTP (file transfer protocol) application, students configure application settings and upload local file(s) to an assigned directory located on a designated remote web server with a minimum of 90% accuracy.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to develop a multiple page web site employing graphics, multimedia elements, form(s), various basic web page elements, CSS (cascading style sheets) and user input.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a text/HTML editor, students develop a multiple page web site using correct HTML syntax, employing lists, tables, graphics, multimedia elements, forms and user input with a minimum of 90% accuracy.
    2. Given a text/HTML editor, students evaluate and implement appropriate add-in functionality including: voting scripts, chat rooms and guest books with a minimum of 85% accuracy.
    3. Given a text/HTML editor, students create and implement a consistent web page layout using basic CSS (cascading style sheets) techniques with a minimum of 90% accuracy.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create a fully functioning multiple page website with embedded JavaScript(s) to provide web site navigation, user input and page processing.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a text /HTML editor, students develop a fully functioning, multiple page web site with embedded JavaScript to provide user input and page processing with a minimum of 85% accuracy.
    2. Given a text /HTML editor, students write and implement JavaScript code to allow for controlling consistent web site navigation across a multiple page web site with a minimum of 90% accuracy.
    3. Given a text /HTML editor, students write JavaScript code that employs the use of correct syntax, basic prompts for user input and the understanding and creation of variables and statements with a minimum of 90% accuracy.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Unit 1
      1. Lecture: Browsers, Introduction to the Internet, Web and HTML
      2. Skills Practice: Creating a Web Presence
    2. Unit 2
      1. Lecture: Tags and URLs, Visual Elements and Graphics
      2. Skills Practice: Internal and External Page Links
    3. Unit 3
      1. Lecture: Lists, Page Style, and Image Representation
      2. Skills Practice: Multiple Pages, Images, Sound Files, and Movies via Links
    4. Unit 4
      1. Lecture: External Cascading Style Sheets, Web Design and Multimedia
      2. Skills Practice: Web Page Design using CSS
    5. Unit 5
      1. Lecture: Tables
      2. Skills Practice:
        1. Introduction to Dreamweaver
        2. Tables Exercise
      3. Skills Demonstration: Create a four-page web site containing graphics, multiple hyperlinks and utilize the object/embed tag for implementing multimedia Web page elements
    6. Unit 6
      1. Lecture: JavaScript
      2. Skills Practice: Fractured story, nursery rhyme of song (User prompts and input) using JavaScript
      3. Skills Demonstration: Add headers, footers, data collection and image mapping into Project 1
    7. Unit 7
      1. Lecture: Web Forms
      2. Skills Practice: Create a basic HTML web form using various form elements and client-side and server-side processing
      3. Skills Demonstration: Utilize web templates (downloadable resources) to create a four-page web site
    8. Unit 8
      1. Lecture: SEO (Search Engine Optimization)
      2. Skills Demonstration: Term Project

    Primary Faculty
    Wanner, Jacqueline
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Johnson, Elise
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ITWP 1050 - Basic Web Design With Cascading Style Sheets

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: ITWP 1000

    This course provides students with the knowledge base and industry skill set to utilize Cascading Style Sheets to control and manage the look, feel and consistency of all web pages included within a specific web site. Students learn how to format fonts, text, page layouts, web page elements, and positioning. Validation using industry tools and web standards will be discussed.

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to format elements of a web page using Cascading Style Sheets.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a text editor, students design, code, and test Cascading Style Sheets to force consistency in font color, style, and size within individual web pages with a minimum of 90% accuracy.
    2. Given a text editor, students develop and implement Cascading Style Sheets in order to render consistency in links within individual web pages with a minimum of 90% accuracy.
    3. Given a text editor, students implement Cascading Style Sheets to force consistency in lists in individual web pages with a minimum of 85% accuracy.
    4. Given a text editor, students implement Cascading Style Sheets to force consistency in page layout within individual web pages with a minimum of 90% accuracy.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to format an entire website using Cascading Style Sheets.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a text editor, students implement Cascading Style Sheets to provide consistency in background colors across all web pages within a web site with a minimum of 90% accuracy.
    2. Given a text editor, students develop Cascading Style Sheets rendering consistent forms across all web pages within a web site with a minimum of 85% accuracy.
    3. Given a text editor, students implement Cascading Style Sheets to ensure a consistent web site presentation with a minimum of 90% accuracy.
    4. Given a text editor, students implement Cascading Style Sheets to control element positioning with a minimum of 90% accuracy.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create web pages that meet national and international accessibility standards.

    Objectives:

    1. Given various scenarios, students research and report on accessibility standards in affect for web pages with a minimum of 85% accuracy.
    2. Given and online validator, students test individual web pages and recommend/implement appropriate changes to repair web pages and websites in order to conform to the appropriate standards with a minimum of 85% accuracy.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. UNIT 1: Introduction to CSS
      1. Understanding CSS
        1. What are Cascading Style Sheets
        2. What is a style?
        3. The origin and evolution of Cascading Style Sheets
        4. CSS rules
        5. Browser support and extensions
      2. HTML Primer
        1. Basic HTML document structure
        2. HTML properties
        3. HTML elements
        4. What’s new in HTML
        5. CSS and HTML
    2. UNIT 2: CSS Basics
      1. CSS selectors
      2. Linking style sheets
        1. Inline, embedded, external, imported
      3. Re(defining) HTML tags
      4. Classes
        1. Working with pseudo-classes
      5. IDs
      6. Universal styles
      7. CSS commenting
      8. The element family tree
        1. Styling descendants
        2. Styling children
        3. Styling siblings
        4. Styling hyperlinks
      9. New CSS properties/elements
      10. Inheritance
      11. Cascading order
    3. UNIT 3: Fonts and Text
      1. Understanding typography on the Web
        1. Specifying the character set
        2. Font families
        3. HTML character entities
      2. Font-stacks
      3. Web-safe fonts
      4. Font sizes
      5. Font decoration
      6. Text spacing
      7. Text alignment
      8. Text indentation
      9. New CSS properties/elements
    4. UNIT 4: Color and Background, Lists, and Tables
      1. Choosing color values
      2. Color gradients in backgrounds
        1. Browser compatibilities
      3. Text color
      4. Setting a background color and image
      5. Styling bullets
        1. Positioning
      6. Table layout
        1. Spacing
        2. Borders
        3. Positioning
      7. New CSS properties/elements
    5. UNIT 5: User Interface and Generated Content, Box Model
      1. Cursors
      2. Quote style
      3. Element display
      4. Element dimensions
      5. Controlling overflow content
      6. Floating elements
      7. Element margins, outlines and borders
      8. Element padding
      9. New CSS properties/elements
    6. UNIT 6: Visual Formatting, Transformation and Transition using CSS
      1. Positioning
        1. Static
        2. Relative
        3. Absolute
        4. Fixed
      2. Stacking objects
      3. Setting visibility
      4. Clipping
      5. 2D transformations
      6. 3D transformations
      7. New CSS properties/elements
    7. UNIT 7: Troubleshooting and CSS Techniques
      1. Browser compatibilities
      2. Conditional CSS
      3. Resetting CSS
      4. Correcting Floats
      5. Multicolumn layout
      6. CSS drop-down menus
        1. Navigation
    8. UNIT 8: Managing Style Sheets and Accessibility
      1. Creating readable CSS
      2. CSS Libraries and Frameworks
      3. Strategies
      4. Validation
      5. Browser compatibilities
      6. Best practices

    Primary Faculty
    Wanner, Jacqueline
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Johnson, Elise
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ITWP 1100 - Web Programming with JavaScript & Dynamic HTML

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: ITWP 1000

    This course introduces students to the use of JavaScript programming as a development tool for interactive web pages including client-side processing. It emphasizes basic programming and key web authoring techniques with a focus on industry standards. Students explore how JavaScript supplements the use of HTML, the flow of control, objects, functions, arrays, methods, and data manipulation. The DOM, jQuery, mobile devices and AJAX are introduced.

    Location: Online only

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to develop interactive Web pages using JavaScript and HTML.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a text/HTML editor, students use JavaScript to modify CSS styles with a minimum of 85% accuracy.
    2. Given a text/HTML editor, students use JavaScript to create dynamic menus with a minimum of 90% accuracy.
    3. Given a text/HTML editor, students use JavaScript to check for browser compatibility with a minimum of 90% accuracy.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create Web pages using basic fundamentals of JavaScript.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a text/HTML editor, students demonstrate knowledge, understanding and use of data types, operators, functions, events, and control structures within a Web page with a minimum of 85% accuracy.
    2. Given a text/HTML editor, students manipulate data in strings and arrays with a minimum of 85% accuracy.
    3. Given a text/HTML editor, students demonstrate proficiency using object-oriented JavaScript, the DOM, and BOM with a minimum of 85% accuracy.
    4. Given a text/HTML editor, students create and debug JavaScript with a minimum of 90% accuracy.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to write valid client-side JavaScript.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a text/HTML editor, students create scripts using scripting language logic constructs with a minimum of 85% accuracy.
    2. Given a text/HTML editor, students create scripts utilizing the JavaScript programming model with a minimum of 85% accuracy.
    3. Given a text/HTML editor, web browser and online validator, students demonstrate knowledge of JavaScript syntax by creating syntactically correct and valid code with a minimum of 90% accuracy.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will create intelligent forms using JavaScript and web-related technologies.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a text/HTML editor, students use JavaScript to interpret browser events with a minimum of 90% accuracy.
    2. Given a text/HTML editor and web browser, students create proper web pages depending on the analysis of browser objects with a minimum of 90% accuracy.
    3. Given a text/HTML editor, students use JavaScript to validate form data with a minimum of 90% accuracy.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students use Web-based resources to carry out relevant research on topics of interest in Web programming and web-related technologies.

    Objectives:

    1. Given access to a web server, students evaluate basic Web server functionality with a minimum of 90% accuracy.
    2. Given Internet access, students analyze and evaluate competing web technologies with a minimum of 90% accuracy.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Unit 1: Introduction to JavaScript

    Unit 2: Working with Functions, Data Types, and Operators

    Unit 3: Building Arrays and Controlling Flow

    Unit 4: Debugging and Error Handling

    Unit 5: Working with the Document Object Model (DOM) and DHTML

    Unit 6: Enhancing and Validating Forms

    Unit 7: Using Object-Oriented JavaScript

    Unit 8: Manipulating Data in Strings and Arrays

    Unit 9: Managing State Information and Security

    Unit 10: Programming for Touchscreens and Mobile Devices

    Unit 11: Updating Web Pages with AJAX

    Unit 12: Introduction to jQuery


    Primary Faculty
    Wanner, Jacqueline
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Johnson, Elise
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ITWP 1150 - Intro to JavaScript Frameworks

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: ITWP 1000 , ITWP 1050 , and ITWP 1100  

    This course introduces students to the use of JavaScript based front-end frameworks. It emphasizes the use of basic programming and JavaScript libraries for building web applications and web user interfaces. Students explore how JavaScript frameworks and libraries supplement the use of HTML, CSS, and JavaScript within web development and web applications.

    Location: Online only

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to develop the front-end functionality for web applications using standard web technologies.

    Objectives: 

    1. Use HTML to create the structure for a web page.
    2. Use CSS to style and format a web page.
    3. Use JavaScript to create dynamic components within a web page.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to develop a basic web application using a JavaScript framework.

    Objectives: 

    1. Define user interface elements and their functionality by using JSX for combining JavaScript and HTML.
    2. Construct components.
    3. Implement components.
    4. Implement event handling.
    5. Demonstrate the usage of functions, properties, and methods.
    6. Employ application state management.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to evaluate source code related to JavaScript frameworks and standard web technologies.

    Objectives:

    1. Perform basic validation using an online validation service.
    2. Perform basic debugging techniques.
    3. Interpret logic and syntax errors.
    4. Solve coding errors.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.

    3.The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.

    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Introduction to JavaScript Frameworks
    2. JavaScript Framework Components & JSX
    3. JavaScript Framework Functions
    4. JavaScript Framework Styling
    5. JavaScript Framework Properties
    6. JavaScript Framework Events
    7. JavaScript Framework Dev Environment
    8. Working with External Data
    9. Managing application state

    Primary Faculty
    Wanner, Jacqueline
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Evans-Mach, Patrick
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ITWP 1450 - SEO (Search Engine Optimization) For the Web

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: ITWP 1000

    (formerly ITWP 1400)

    This course is designed to teach participants current Search Engine Optimization concepts and website techniques to obtain the most favorable search engine positions possible. Course topics include identifying appropriate keywords for optimization, designing a search‑engine‑friendly website, on/off page factors that influence search engine results, link‑building strategies, using analytics to refine search results, and web copywriting. This course will also provide an overview of pay‑per‑click advertising and how various new media are used to promote a website and examine common industry tools for analyzing websites and improving search results.

    Location: Online only

    When Offered: Winter semester only

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon the completion of this course, students will be able to outline how search engines obtain and use information to produce search results.

    Objectives:

    1. Evaluate how search engines impact the way a website is developed including content creation.
    2. Use a search engine results page (SERP) to identify which results are paid placements vs. those that were returned “organically” by the search engine.
    3. Identify the elements that website owners used to achieve the search position they attained by using a known search term/phrase and the first page of a search result. 

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to develop a fully optimized website that ranks well in search engines for the desired search terms.

    Objectives:

    1. Research the search engine optimization efforts of competitors for a target audience.
    2. Develop a keyword and key phrase list for a target audience.
    3. Create a search engine optimization plan for a business or organization. 
    4. Create a website that is fully optimized for search engines using navigation, layout, page elements, and web copywriting techniques for a business or organization.
    5. Submit a fully optimized website to search engines and directories.
    6. Evaluate whether to pursue a local search strategy for a fully optimized website. 
    7. Explore off-page search engine optimization tactics for a website that is search engine optimized.
    8. Apply a minimum of two offf-page search engine optimization tactics to the optimized website.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to refine website optimization efforts through the installation of website analytics and interpretation of the metrics.

    Objectives:

    1. Install analytics code on each page of a given website. 
    2. Analyze visitor behavior on a “live” website using data produced by web analytics software.
    3. Recommend improvements that favorably impact the website’s performance. 
    4. Implement improvements that favorably impact the website’s performance.
    5. Configure the web analytics software to track actual results vs. a defined goal. 

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to outline the tools that are available to evaluate the search engine strategies of competitors and to analyze, monitor, and refine the search engine optimization efforts of their own website.

    Objectives:

    1. Evaluate the most appropriate tools that can be used to identify both on and off-page optimization opportunities for a website that has not been search engine optimized. 
    2. Evaluate a website for search engine optimization opportunities.
    3. Recommend changes that will improve search engine rankings. 
    4. Use available SEO (Search Engine Optimization) tools for identifying what tactics the competitor site is using.
    5. Recommend improvements to their own site to achieve a higher search ranking than the competitor site. 

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to apply information from authoritative sources regarding changes to SEO (Search Engine Optimization) tactics and tools to their SEO efforts.

    Objectives:

    1. Evaluate topics discussed in blogs or forums of authoritative sources regarding the search engine optimization industry. 
    2. Distinguish between authoritative sources of search engine optimization information and sources of opinion found on the internet. 

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Search Engine Basics
    2. Factors Impacting Search Results
    3. Factors Impacting Search Results (continued)
    4. Choosing a Target Audience
    5. Choosing Keywords
    6. Usability, Site Architecture and Wireframing
    7. Site Diagram and Wireframing
    8. SEO Planning and Developing Search Engine Optimized Websites
    9. Developing a SEO Friendly Website
    10. Developing Content That Gets Found
    11. Measuring Success with Analytics
    12. Content Development: Making Your Site Work
    13. Overview of SEM (Search Engine Marketing) Tactics
    14. Local Search and Link Building
    15. Local Searches (continued)
    16. Applying SEO

    Primary Faculty
    Wanner, Jacqueline
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Evans-Mach, Patrick
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ITWP 2300 - Building Dynamic, Intelligent Web Based Solutions with ASP.NET

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: ITCS 1140 and ITWP 1000

    Corequisites: ITCS 1170

    In this advanced course, students gain experience implementing a website that supports CGI, ActiveX DLL, serverside scripting, client-side scripting, graphics, C#, scripts, cookies, and data base interrogation and updates.

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will create Web-enabled Microsoft MSSQL (or equivalent) databases with multiple tables.

    Objectives:

    1. Develop Web Applications which are capable of retrieving data from indexed data tables.
    2. Develop Web Applications which are capable of storing data from indexed data tables.
    3. Develop Web Applications which are capable of updating data from indexed data tables.
    4. Modify Web Applications which are capable of retrieving, storing and updating data tables.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will apply Visual Studio ASPX to create secure documents.

    Objectives:

    1. Install Visual Studio ASPX or other ASP Development Tools.
    2. Formulate solutions to programming problems utilizing the capabilities of Visual Studio ASPX or other ASP Development Tool.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will process complex cookie information.

    Objectives:

    1. Create applications which use complex cookies to store multiple data elements for recall on web pages.
    2. Implement solutions which remove cookie data when no longer necessary.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will create an application which dynamically processes new tables and records.

    Objectives:

    1. Develop Web Applications which are capable of dynamically creating tables and contents based on the user interaction.
    2. Develop Web Applications which are capable of dynamically removing tables and contents based on user interaction.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will apply Web-based resources to carry out relevant research on topics of interest in Web Programming.

    Objectives:

    1. Utilize Web based resources to identify relevant research on topics of interest in Web Programming.
    2. Evaluate the quality of Web based resources.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Unit 1   SQL and Other Information on Databases

    Unit 2   Web Servers, Performance and Options

    Unit 3   Client Side Scripts and Cookies

    Unit 4   Server Side Scripting, a Final Discussion

    Unit 5   Course Practicum Part I
                 Course Practicum Part II

    Unit 6   Web Forms and Server Controls

    Unit 7   Course Practicum Part III
                 Course Praccum Part IV

    Unit 8   Course Capstone Project


    Primary Faculty
    Wanner, Jacqueline
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Johnson, Elise
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ITWP 2600 - Web Commerce (E-Commerce)

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: ITWP 1000 and ITWP 1050

    ITWP 2600 explores the business strategies and fundamental technologies used in electronic commerce. Participants produce a website using a development tool that includes website related activities and components necessary for a scalable web presence and e-commerce system. E-commerce site development, content management systems, technology and security, business, marketing, search engines, and legal issues will be examined.

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to discuss electronic commerce, technology infrastructure, web revenue models, web marketing, social networking, various electronic commerce software applications, mobile commerce, security risks and payment systems.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Given discussion forum activities, students utilize terms and research concepts to demonstrate their understanding of electronic commerce, technology infrastructure, web revenue models, web marketing, mobile commerce, search engines, social networking, various electronic commerce software applications, security risks and payment systems, with a minimum of 85% accuracy.
    2. Given case scenarios, students research and analyze various electronic commerce topics and assemble a brief report providing solutions to a given scenario with a minimum of 90% accuracy.
    3. Given a case study, students research and document current uses of advertising on the web with a minimum of 85% accuracy.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to evaluate web application development fundamentals.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Given a case study, students develop a complete business case, focused on the use of a website, as part of an assigned project with a minimum of 90% accuracy.
    2. Given a development tool, students apply a template theme and construct a multi-page website that achieves the business case goals with a minimum of 90% accuracy.
    3. Given a development tool and established content, students modify components within a template theme using fundamental web programming techniques with a minimum of 90% accuracy.
    4. Given a development tool, students will apply various optimization techniques to a website with a minimum of 85% accuracy.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to produce a multi-page website using a development tool that includes website components necessary for a scalable web presence and e-commerce system.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Given a set of criteria, students set up a domain for a content management system with a minimum of 90% accuracy.
    2. Given a set of criteria and basic content requirements, students produce a multi-page website using a content management system with a minimum of 90% accuracy.
    3. Given a set of criteria, students add and install plugins using a content management system tool with a minimum of 90% accuracy.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to develop interactive web pages and build dynamic, intelligent web-based applications.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Given a set of criteria, students implement electronic payment capabilities, using an online payment solution, into an existing website with a minimum of 90% accuracy.
    2. Given a set of criteria, students implement shopping cart capabilities into an existing website with a minimum of 90% accuracy.
    3. Given an established set of criteria, students incorporate social media options into an existing website with a minimum of 90% accuracy.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.

    3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.

    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Unit 1 Introduction to Electronic Commerce

    Unit 2 Technology Infrastructure: The Internet and the World Wide Web

    Unit 3 Selling on the Web: Revenue Models and Building a Web Presence

    1. Content Management Systems

    Unit 4 Marketing on the Web

    Unit 5 Business-to-Business Activities

    Unit 6 Social Networking, Mobile Commerce and Online Auctions

    Unit 7 The Environment of Electronic Commerce: Legal, Ethical, and Tax Issues

    Unit 8 Web Server Hardware and Software

    Unit 9 Electronic Commerce Software

    Unit 10 Electronic Commerce Security

    Unit 11 Payment Systems for Electronic Commerce

    Unit 12 Managing Electronic Commerce Implementations


    Primary Faculty
    Wanner, Jacqueline
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Johnson, Elise
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ITWP 2750 - Web Programming: PHP

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: ITWP 1000 and ITCS 1170 and one of the following: ITWP 1100 or ITCS 2530 or ITCS 2590

    This course explores the development and implementation of the Web Programming Language PHP. Topics include language control logic, language specific functions and processes, arrays, manipulating strings, file upload, text file read and write, and database functionality including selects, inserts, and updates. Error handling and debugging will be discussed.

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will create PHP script files.

    Objectives:

    1. Design, code, and execute properly running PHP programs.
    2. Correctly define, utilize, and implement variable types.
    3. Modify, test, and execute PHP script files.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will write programs that utilize looping, decisions, and flow control.

    Objectives:

    1. Properly plan a project solution that requires:
      1.  Loop control.
      2. Decision making with IF-THEN statements.
    2. Without logic errors, code solutions that require:
      1. Loop control.
      2. Decision making with IF-THEN statements.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will utilize modules and functions to create dynamic programming solutions.

    Objectives:

    1. Without error, plan a project solution that uses:
      1. Modules.
      2. Functions.
    2. Code and debug a properly working solution that uses:
      1. Modules.
      2. Functions.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will create solutions utilizing communication (mail), text files, and databases.

    Objectives:

    1. Design a program that will read email addresses from a file and send a standard message to all recipients.
    2. Properly code a program that will read and process user input files.
    3. Create a solution that will utilize information in a database to send email messages such as product upgrade notification.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will implement cookies to carry information between non-connected Web Pages.

    Objectives:

    1. Code solutions that will utilize cookies to:
      1. Carry information between web pages.
      2. Maintain user login information.
      3. Destruct cookies when appropriate.
    2. Code projects designed to be run over an internet connection.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will create two research papers from the following list of relevant topics of interest in Web Programming-debugging, code examples, updates to the language, current best practices.

    Objectives:

    1. Utilize the WWW to research information.
    2. Contrast the research information from at least three www sources.
      1. Differences in debugging techniques.
      2. Differences in what is considered best practice.
      3. Differences in language versions.
      4. Differences in coding style or technique.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Unit 1: Introduction to Web Development: Getting Started with PHP

    Unit 2: Functions and Control Structures

    Unit 3: Manipulating Strings

    Unit 4: Handling User Input

    Unit 5: Working with Files and Directories

    Unit 6: Manipulating Arrays

    Unit 7: Working with Databases and MySQL

    Unit 8: Manipulating MySQL Databases with PHP

    Unit 9: Managing State Information

    Unit 10: Developing Object-Oriented PHP


    Primary Faculty
    Wanner, Jacqueline
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Johnson, Elise
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


Journalism

  
  • JOUR 1100 - Writing News for Publication

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: None

    Focuses on the elements of news story writing and reporting. Student learns to write spot news and feature stories, interview newsmakers, and gather information. Student writing will be suitable for publication, formatted in Word documents and presented in Associated Press (AP) style.

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to gather information for news story writing and reporting.

    Objectives:

    1. Conduct comprehensive research (including online research) necessary for writing news stories that focus on community, campus news, and local events.
    2. Interview individuals providing information for news stories.
    3. Take reporter’s notes.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to produce news stories suitable for publication.

    Objectives:

    1. Using a computer, produce news stories (for a total of approximately 4,000-plus words during the semester).
    2. Use correct grammar, punctuation, spelling and sentence structure.
    3. Correctly and accurately quote sources, including authoritative sources.
    4. Write news stories that are accurate and unbiased.
    5. Create summary leads which could include anecdotal leads, scenic leads, and leads with flair.
    6. Practice writing attention-getting leads to draw in readers.
    7. Organize stories in an inverted pyramid format, as well as adhere to other techniques recognized by professional journalist.
    8. Format stories in a manner that is conducive to The Associated Press Stylebook.
    9. Develop a story that is timely, factual, and reader-friendly for an audience.
    10. Using a computer, write and submit an assigned article in a format designed to contribute to contemporary layout and design practices.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to edit and ‘coach’ other writers through copy editing.

    Objectives:

    1. Recognize the editor’s significant role in maintaining a quality publication.
    2. Given written news stories of other students, edit and provide feedback for improvement.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Introduction to Journalism
    2. Writing Exercise/Warm-up
    3. The Role of Journalism
    4. Serving Your Country/Letters from Home
    5. Storytelling/Inverted Pyramid
    6. Lab Work/”What’s your Story?”
    7. Interviewing
    8. Student Interview #1
    9. Student Interview Presentations
    10. Student Interview #2
    11. Discuss “Prominent Person” Story
    12. How to Write an Attention-Grabbing Lead
    13. Group Work
    14. Student Profile Due
    15. Research/Finding Sources
    16. Library Tour
    17. Copy Editing
    18. Prominent Person Story Due
    19. Lab work/Finding Web Sources
    20. Covering Meetings
    21. Briefing for Guest Speaker
    22. Guest Speaker Interview
    23. Copy Editing
    24. Guest Speaker Story Due
    25. Beat Reporting
    26. Editorial Writing
    27. Fact vs. Opinion
    28. Student Meetings
    29. Movie Screening
    30. Town Meeting Story
    31. Writing for Other Media
    32. Copy Editing
    33. Briefing for Teleconference
    34. Movie Review Due
    35. Teleconference Interview
    36. Copy Editing
    37. Teleconference Story Due
    38. Copy Editing
    39. Beat Story Due
    40. Guest Speaker
    41. Design and Layout (for Print and Web)

    Primary Faculty
    Masters, Marie
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


Land Surveying

  
  • SURV 1100 - Elementary Surveying

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: None

    Use of transit and level; reading verniers and angles, linear measurement; extending straight lines, differential and profile leveling; simple traverse survey, computation including right triangle trigonometry for surveying and keeping notes.

    Location: South Campus

    Contact Hours: 5
    Billable Contact Hours: 5
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course students will describe the history and importance of surveying.

    Objectives

    1. Describe the history of surveying.
    2. Identify the two types of surveying.
    3. Explain surveying safety procedures.
    4. Identify the specialized types of surveying.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course students will utilize correct units, significant figures, and field notes in recording & computing surveying data.

    Objectives

    1. Identify surveying units of measurement.
    2. Describe the International and US survey foot.
    3. Use significant figures in calculations.
    4. Perform rounding off of numbers in calculations.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course students will explain theory of errors in observations.

    Objectives

    1. Utilize direct and indirect observations.
    2. Identify errors and mistakes in measurements.
    3. Calculate probability of measured data.
    4. Calculate residuals of measured data.
    5. Interpret standard deviations.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course students will describe differential leveling theory, methods, and equipment.

    Objectives

    1. Explain the different vertical datums used in North America.
    2. Calculate the curvature of the earth and refraction.
    3. Perform methods to determine the difference in elevation.
    4. Utilize the various equipment for differential leveling.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course students will perform leveling field procedures and computations.

    Objectives

    1. Perform leveling techniques.
    2. Calculate the precision of a leveling data.
    3. Perform adjustments to leveling data.
    4. Identify mistakes and errors in leveling.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course students will perform distance measurement.

    Objectives

    1. Identify the methods for measuring distances.
    2. Perform measurements using a steel tape.
    3. Identify corrections for identifying with a steel tape.
    4. Perform measurements with an electronic distance measuring device.
    5. Identify errors of the electronic measuring device.

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of this course students will calculate angles, azimuths, and bearings.

    Objectives

    1. Identify the units of angle measurement.
    2. Identify the different types of horizontal angles.
    3. Calculate the direction of a line.
    4. Identify the difference between azimuths and bearings.
    5. Compute azimuths and bearings.

    Outcome 8: Upon completion of this course students will perform angle operations.

    Objectives

    1. Identify the functions performed by a Total Station.
    2. Explain the parts of a Total Station.
    3. Correctly handle and setup a Total Station.
    4. Perform angle observation measurements.

    Outcome 9: Upon completion of this course students will describe traversing and computations.

    Objectives

    1. Perform angle and distance observations.
    2. Identify Traverse Station.
    3. Document traverse field notes.
    4. Perform traversing observations.
    5. Identify errors in traversing.
    6. Perform traverse computations.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Math evaluation, information sheet, course preview, prelim. History.
    2. Fractions, conversions, significant figures, algebra, right angle, trigonometry, field notes, lab.
    3. Vertical datum’s, curvature and refraction, difference in elevation, equipment.
    4. Differential leveling, precision, three-wire leveling, profile leveling, lab.
    5. Methods of liner measurement, taping, sources of error.
    6. Electronic distance measurement, determining vertical difference, errors, lab.
    7. Review
    8. Exam

    Primary Faculty
    Grant, Janice
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • SURV 1200 - Route Surveying

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: SURV 1100

    This course introduces the student to the basic principles of route surveying, preliminary and final location procedures, profiles, grades, cross sections, slope stakes, areas, volumes, parabolic and circular curves, and spiral transitionals.

    Location: South Campus

    Contact Hours: 5
    Billable Contact Hours: 5
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course students will define the horizontal curve.

    Objectives

    1. Identify degree of a circular curve.
    2. Define the circular curve formulas.
    3. Perform note taking for a circular curve.
    4. Compute deflection angles and chords.
    5. Perform circular curve layout.
    6. Identify compound and reverse curves.
    7. Identify the spiral curve.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course students will define the Vertical Curve.

    Objectives

    1. Calculate the general equations of a parabolic curve.
    2. Identify the high and low points of a vertical curve.
    3. Compute vertical curve using the tangent offset method.
    4. Perform staking of a vertical curve.
    5. Identify the sources of error in laying out a vertical curve.
    6. Quote the characteristics of the vertical curve.
    7. Compute elevations on a vertical curve if the two grades and the rate of change in grade are known.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course students will define Construction Surveys.

    Objectives

    1. Identify special equipment for construction surveys.
    2. Perform staking for a pipeline, building, highway and sewer.
    3. Determine what data should be shown on a slope stake if the ground rod reading, distance from centerline, and grade rod reading are known.
    4. Tabulate information necessary to lay out a circular curve if the intersection angle and degree of curve are known.
    5. Draw a mass curve and compute overhaul‐yard‐stations if the centerline profile, proposed grade profile, accumulative yardage, and free haul distance are given.
    6. Prepare field information for staking out a compound or reverse circular curve if the design information is given.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Introduction ‐ Overview of course
    2. Vertical curves ‐ Definitions, basic formulas
    3. Vertical curves ‐ Calc. elev’s along curve, high pts. low pts.
    4. Test on vert. curves, start volumes, slope stake definitions
    5. Define mass curve graph, haul distances, cut & fill calc’s
    6. Test on volumes etc., start circular curves ‐ definitions
    7. Circular curves ‐ Formulas, use of tables in book
    8. MID‐SEMESTER EVALUATION
    9. Circular curves ‐ Deflection angles, calc’s of chords
    10. Circular curves ‐ Tangent offsets, reverse curves, compound curves
    11. Circular Curves ‐ Multiple lot frontages, road‐stationing offsets
    12. Test on circular curves ‐ Begin spiral curves ‐ definitions
    13. Spiral curves ‐ formulas, calc’s, practical uses
    14. Photogrammetry ‐ Uses in selection of routes, control surveys
    15. Control surveys ‐ level circuits ‐ applications in route survey
    16. FINAL EVALUATION

    Primary Faculty
    Grant, Janice
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • SURV 2220 - Civil & Survey Drafting

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: SURV 1100 and DRCG 1140

    (formerly SURV 2200 and DRCG 2200)

    This course introduces the student to the basic principles of civil and survey drafting. Maps, types of surveys, techniques, contours, descriptions, subdivisions, profiles, highway layout, and earthwork will be discussed, drawn, and reproduced. Using field or supplied data, the student will use the latest computer software to generate the appropriate drawings. Microcomputer configuration, scale relationship, symbols, data entry, use of blocks, file maintenance, and plotting will be covered.

    Location: South Campus

    Contact Hours: 6
    Billable Contact Hours: 6
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course students will determine the subject for civil drafting

    Objectives

    1. Describe different maps.
    2. Define specific map symbols
    3. Identify legal descriptions
    4. Understand office standards

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course students will Perform civil drafting

    Objectives

    1. Identify civil and surveying mapping terms.
    2. Identify symbols legal requirement.
    3. Identify specialized drafting standards used in the industry.
    4. Create symbols, blocks, legends and notes for insertion in a drawing.
    5. Import field data
    6. Export data
    7. Create from points
    8. Create drawings from files
    9. Create sketches form recorded deeds
    10. Identify control points
    11. Add dimensions to drawings
    12. Add scales to drawings

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course students will perform importing and exporting of different file types.

    Objectives

    1. Understanding PDF files
    2. Understanding ZIP files
    3. Understanding DWG files
    4. Understanding ASCII files
    5. Understanding TEXT files
    6. Manage files
    7. Exchange files

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competenty.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Discuss and demonstrate microcomputer configuration.
      1. Drawing size
      2. Scale
      3. Text Style
      4. Dimension style
      5. Layers
      6. Title block and Borderlines
      7. File maintenance
    2. Discuss and practice the creation of blocks and symbols
      1. Mapping symbols
      2. Bar scale
      3. Legends
      4. Notes
      5. Certifications
      6. Descriptions
    3. Discuss and demonstrate production of different drawings
      1. Property line surveys
      2. Subdivision Surveys
      3. Topographic Maps
      4. Special Maps
      5. Architectural/Engineering
    4. Discuss and use documents used for civil and survey drafting
    5. Discuss and demonstrate the importing and exporting of data and points
    6. Discuss information on utilities, zoning, flood plains, setbacks, easements, and rights of way.
    7. Discuss and demonstrate the plotting of drawings.
      1. Paper space
      2. Model space
    8. Discuss and demonstrate the modifying of drawings
      1. Precision of line work
      2. Automatic labeling
      3. Using nodes
      4. Elevation package
      5. Contour package
    9. Discuss and use different file formats
      1. ASCII
      2. Text
      3. ZIP
      4. Dwg
      5. PDF

    Primary Faculty
    Grant, Janice
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • SURV 2300 - Boundary Surveying

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: SURV 1100

    This course introduces the student to the study of public and land surveys, which includes the breakdown of sections, government lots, meander lines, corners, coordinate calculation areas, missing legs, metes and bounds descriptions, lot and block proportionment, and state plane coordinates.

    Location: South Campus

    Contact Hours: 5
    Billable Contact Hours: 5
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course students will demonstrate knowledge of Boundary Surveys

    Objectives

    1. Identify the categories of Land
    2. Identify historical perspective.
    3. Perform property description by metes and bounds, block and lot and coordinates.
    4. Explain subdivision surveys.
    5. Explain partitioning of land.
    6. Explain registration of title.
    7. Identify condominium survey.
    8. Identify geographic and land information systems.
    9. Identify sources of errors in boundary surveys.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course students will demonstrate knowledge of surveys of the public lands.

    Objectives

    1. Explain the instructions for the surveys of the public lands.
    2. Explain the initial point, principle meridian and baseline.
    3. Identify standard parallels (correction lines) and standard meridians.
    4. Perform the subdivision of a township.
    5. Explain the accuracy of the public lands surveys.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Overview of course - review units of measure
    2. Definitions of terms - historical notes
    3. Law relations to public land surveys
    4. Monuments, evidence, research
    5. Test - start townships
    6. Breakdown of townships and sections
    7. Government lots, meander corners
    8. MID-SEMESTER EVALUATION
    9. Coordinate calculations, matrix
    10. Missing legs - closures - adjustments
    11. Area calculations - metes and bound description
    12. Test - Continue metes and bounds description
    13. Lot and block proportionment.
    14. Triangulation - strength of figure
    15. State plane coordinates
    16. FINAL EVALUATION

    Primary Faculty
    Grant, Janice
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • SURV 2450 - Introduction to Geospatial Technologies & Topographic Surveying

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: SURV 1100

    (formerly SURV 2400)

    This course introduces the student to the different types of topographic surveys, which includes strip, grid, radial and trigonometric. Stadia transit tape, plane table, cross sections, profiles, contours, research, map reading, flood plains, wetlands and photogrammetry control are discussed. Hands-on experiences teach students industry standard basic knowledge and technology skills in Global Positioning Systems (GPS), Remote Sensing (SR), and other aerospace technologies, and surveying and Geographic Information Systems (GIS).

    Contact Hours: 5
    Billable Contact Hours: 5
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate technology use appropriate for each Geospatial Technology field.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a step-by-step tutorial, students will complete a GIS lesson and produce a map layout of their results.
    2. After receiving classroom directions, students will use a GPS unit to find coordinates, elevation, and accuracy of ground features on campus. 
    3. Given aerial and satellite imagery, students will identify various ground objects (buildings, streets, trees, etc.)
    4. Given an aerial photograph, students will use Heads-Up-Digitizing to create an accurate map of a campus.
    5. Given appropriate tools, students will use basic surveying skills to produce an accurate scale map of the classroom or other campus facility.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to use geospatial and other technical vocabulary.

    Objectives:

    1. Given end-of-lesson worksheets, students will identify and define geospatial technology terminology in their own words.
    2. Given mid-term and final exam questions, students will correctly answer 80% or more of questions drawn from Geospatial Technology terminology.
    3. Given classroom laboratory assignments, students will correctly use Geospatial Technology terminology to ask and answer questions 100% of the time.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to use the Project Management Model (PMM) in Geospatial Technology projects. 

    Objectives:

    1. Given example projects, students will identify the steps used in the Planning, Implementation and Presentation of the project.
    2. As part of a capstone project (Final Exam), students will present a written outline of their project following the Project Management Model.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the background knowledge necessary to use and understand Geospatial Technologies. 

    Objectives:

    1. Given a research assignment, the student will complete a timeline showing important developments in mapping, surveying, and Geospatial Technologies.
    2. Given classroom worksheets, students will correctly use various coordinate systems including geographic (Lat/Lon), UTM and State Plane.
    3. Given GIS software, students will explore map projections, and will identify planar, conic and cylindrical projections.
    4. Using a calculator, students will convert coordinates from Degrees, Minutes, Seconds (DMS) to Decimal Degrees (DD).
    5. Given various map examples, students will identify large and small-scale maps, convert map distance to ground distance, and distinguish between various types of map scales.
    6. Given various maps, students will identify political, topographic, physical, transportation, and thematic maps.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to obtain and use Remote Sensing (RS) data.

    Objectives:

    1. Given access to the internet, students will locate online sources of Remote Sensing data and download data sets for their own use.
    2. Upon completion of the unit, students will identify components used to gather aerial and satellite imagery and limitations imposed by each component.
    3. Given an existing household product, the student will identify numerous possible product improvements through brainstorming in a group setting.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to use a hand-held GPS unit to collect Geospatial data.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a GPS unit, students will obtain, record, and download spatial location data of campus features.
    2. Given a GPS unit, students will locate hidden objects by following positional information (Geocaching).

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to use Satellite Tool Kit (STK) to model aerospace missions.

    Objectives:

    1. Given classroom instruction and access to software, students will use STK to model the GPS system including satellites, ground stations and signal modeling.
    2. Given classroom instruction and access to software, students will use STK to model an aerial photography mission including platform, camera and flight path information.

    Outcome 8: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to use ArcGIS to access, manipulate and display Geospatial Data.

    Objectives:

    1. Given Geospatial data, students will use ArcMap to view, analyze, and present spatial data in the form of a map layout.
    2. Given Geospatial data, students will use ArcCatalog to manage, view, document, and validate a dataset to be used in a geospatial data.

    Outcome 9: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to use ArcGIS to view, manipulate, create, and display Geospatial Data.

    Objectives:

    1. Given ArcGIS software and a dataset, students will demonstrate the ability to view, zoom, display, and edit raster and vector data.
    2. Given ArcGIS software and a dataset, students will demonstrate the ability to identify, select, and export data within ArcGIS
    3. Given ArcGIS software and a dataset, students will demonstrate the ability to create new data through export, geocoding, and digitizing.
    4. Given ArcGIS software and a dataset, students will demonstrate the ability to analyze Geospatial Data through the use of proximity, buffer and overlay techniques.

    Outcome 10: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create a Data Inventory of their campus.

    Objectives:

    1. Using GPS, software, and websites available, students will obtain or create all necessary Geospatial Data to complete an inventory of campus features and structures.
    2. Using ArcGIS software, students will create a map layout of their data.
    3. Using the Project Management Model, students will document their project and submit as a formal paper.

    Outcome 11: Upon completion of this course students will create Mapping Surveys.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify availability of maps and related items.
    2. Explain the National mapping program.
    3. Explain accuracy standards for mapping.
    4. Perform manual and computer aided mapping.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Introduction - definitions - types of topographic surveys.
    2. Research - field notes - planning sequence - safety
    3. Strip topo - grid topo - establish base lines - stationing - 90 degree prism
    4. Test - instrument adjustment/care
    5. Plane table - radial topo - transit/tape stadia
    6. Vertical angles - trigometric leveling note keeping
    7. Level - nets/adjustments, corrections for curvature of earth
    8. Bench Marks - maps reading - symbols legends
    9. U.S.G.S. - quad maps - resource material
    10. Utility surveys - mortgage reports - as-builds
    11. Test - start contours
    12. Cross-sections - profiles - contours
    13. Photogrammetry control - flood plain surveys - wet land survey
    14. Tree surveys - total stations - data collections - laser levels
    15. Fundamentals of Geospatial Technology
    16. GPS Technology and using GIS
    17. Aerospace Technology
    18. Introduction to ArcGIS

    Primary Faculty
    Grant, Janice
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


Law Enforcement

  
  • LAWE 1100 - Criminal Justice

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: None

    Philosophy and history of criminal justice; agencies and processes; evaluation of current criminal justice services and their social and constitutional aspects.

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to define the component parts of the Criminal Justice System and define the relationship between the various segments.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Demonstrate in class knowledge of the major philosophical and political concepts creating tension in the Criminal Justice System.
    2. Demonstrate knowledge of the component parts of the Criminal Justice System by discussing them in the classroom to the satisfaction of the instructor, and identify in writing the stages of the Criminal Justice System.
    3. Identify the difference between Part I and Part II crimes in the Uniform Crime Reporting System and the incident-based reporting System.
    4. Identify the purpose behind the National Crime Victimization Survey and identify the findings of the survey in writing and in classroom discussion.
    5. Identify the English history of the American Policing System.
    6. Identify the components of the Michigan and Federal Court Systems.
    7. Define plea bargains and their affect on the Criminal Justice System.
    8. Identify the major actors in the courtroom process in American Justice.
    9. Identify the process of jury selection.
    10. Define and identify the reasons for criminal sentencing.
    11. Define and identify the types of sentencing available to judges.
    12. Identify the role of the corrections officer in prison and jail.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify the major constitutional and legal concepts that control the Criminal Justice System and the Juvenile Justice System.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Identify and define the importance of the Fourth, Fifth, Sixth, Eighth, and Fourteenth Amendments to the United States Constitution.
    2. Define and identify the ten exceptions to the search warrant requirement.
    3. Define and identify the warrant requirement of the Fourth Amendment.
    4. Define and identify the constitutional aspects of police interrogation.
    5. Identify the rights of inmates based on the United States Constitution.
    6. Identify the due process concerns of the Juvenile Justice System through Supreme Court case law.
    7. Identify and define the types of law both in writing and in classroom discussion.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Principals of law and statutory construction
      1. Due Process
      2. Principles of law
    2. Police History
      1. British
      2. American
    3. Constitutional Constraints on the police
      1. Search and seizure
      2. Interrogation
    4. Courts and participants in the courtroom process
      1. Judges
      2. Attorneys
      3. Court officers
    5. Prisons
      1. Inmate rights
      2. Prison Life

    Primary Faculty
    Hliebay, Eugene
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Lopez, Michael
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • LAWE 1120 - Introduction to Corrections

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: None

    (formerly LAWE 2911)

    This course introduces the philosophy and history of correctional agencies and processes, including incarceration, probation, and parole.

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course the student will be able to demonstrate the role of corrections in the criminal justice system.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Discuss the history of jails.
    2. Discuss the early history of crime and society’s response to criminal acts.
    3. Define and discuss corporal punishment.
    4. Define and discuss capital punishment.
    5. Define and discuss banishment.
    6. Identify the changes that occurred during “The Age of Enlightenment and Reform”.
    7. Identify detention vs. incarceration.
    8. Define early cellular prisons.
    9. Discuss the history and modern imposition of the death penalty.
    10. Discuss the history and role of probation in the court system.
    11. Complete a pre-sentence report from interview to report completion.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course the student will be able to identify community-based corrections.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Define correctional ideologies - punishment, treatment, prevention.
    2. Discuss how conflicting correctional ideologies affect sentencing of individuals.
    3. Define the rights of an individual during the sentencing process.
    4. Describe due process of law.
    5. Define the path of a criminal case.
    6. Define the mechanics of a criminal case appeal.
    7. Describe diversion programs and intermediate sanctions.
    8. Describe the various classifications of probationers.
    9. Identify a probation order.
    10. Describe violations of probation.
    11. Determine the best use of boot camps.
    12. Define paroling authority
    13. Define the classification of parolees
    14. Discuss the purpose of parole and parole revocation.
    15. Discuss problems facing parole system.
    16. Identify community corrections and technology for community supervision.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course the student will be able to describe the role of correctional facilities and the populations of those incarcerated in these facilities.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Define jail populations and characteristics.
    2. Discuss jail overcrowding and personnel problems.
    3. Observe functioning of local jail.
    4. Discuss the history of prisons.
    5. Discuss prison design and classification.
    6. Identify state and local prisons.
    7. Discuss the federal prison system.
    8. Define prison custody functions.
    9. Discuss prison management and treatment functions.
    10. Discuss prison riots.
    11. Describe characteristics of male offenders in the prison system.
    12. Describe characteristics of female offenders in the prison system.
    13. Discuss juvenile incarceration.
    14. Define special category prisoners: mentally ill, sex offenders, HIV.
    15. Define basic Inmate rights.
    16. Define and discuss the civil rights of inmates.
    17. Discuss court cases concerning inmate rights.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to describe special issues that face correctional professionals.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Discuss issues pertaining to preparing Inmate to return to community.
    2. Define and discuss private sector prisons.
    3. Discuss ethics for the criminal justice professional.
    4. Define and discuss the future of corrections with a changing society.
    5. Locate career opportunities in corrections and educational requirements.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Sentencing; The purpose of corrections and history
      1. History: Roman, Middle Ages, early America
      2. Early use of corporal and capital punishment
      3. Modern sentencing goals, laws, and theories
      4. Modern use of the death penalty
    2. Probation; Parole; Community corrections
      1. Pre-sentence investigation
      2. Officer’s role in court
      3. Classification and probation orders
      4. Accountability of probationer/violations
      5. Court cases involving probation and parole
      6. Boot camps
      7. Paroling authority
      8. Purpose and problems of parole system
      9. Community corrections and new technology
    3. Prisons; Jails; Life inside prison
      1. Jails: design, history, problems
      2. Prison designs and eras in America
      3. Problems: overcrowding, security levels, classification of prisoners, cost factors
      4. Federal, state, and juvenile prisons
      5. Prison life for men, women, and juveniles
      6. Prison conditions and riots
      7. Court cases involving inmate rights
    4. The future of corrections; Ethics; Careers in corrections
      1. Privatization of corrections
      2. Need for change in system and society
      3. Ethics for corrections’ professionals
      4. Career opportunities and education required

    Primary Faculty
    Hliebay, Eugene
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Lopez, Michael
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • LAWE 1280 - The Police Function

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: None

    An overview of the police role in society and the way in which the police are organized to discharge that function in the United States. The organization of municipal policing is studied at both operational and administrative levels. This includes the patrol, investigative, specialized, and support functions as well as an examination of the selection and training requirements for police.

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to define and identify the makeup of law enforcement agencies in America.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Identify and define important historical facts shaping policing to the present. Students will look closely at the development of law enforcement in the United States and will examine the basis for current trends in departments.
    2. Identify the types of police agencies that exist in the United States. Students will distinguish between federal, state, and local law enforcement, and determine general employment requirements.
    3. Define the police role. Students will discuss the changing role of the police over time and assess where the role of the police is headed.
    4. Identify and define the functions of the patrol force. Students will participate in both foot patrol and vehicle patrol assignments and discuss the differences between the two. Students will identify where each style would most effectively be used.
    5. Identify and define the need for order maintenance. Students will identify what the public and what the police expect in maintaining order. Students will identify the pros and cons of the public dictating the police in problem solving.
    6. Identify and define the role of crime prevention. Students will explore the differing implementation processes of crime prevention and the task as envisioned by Sir Robert Peele.
    7. Identify and define the role of community policing in modern policing. Students will examine in depth the philosophy behind community involvement and will research and examine examples implemented across the United States.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to define and identify the problems associated with police work.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Define discretion and identify its role in police work. Students will discuss the ethics of police discretion and the potential for misuse and discriminatory practices. Students will exercise discretion in common police scenarios.
    2. Define and identify the relationship of police officers to citizens. Students will clarify each role and determine where the lines cross between accountability and citizen over involvement.
    3. Define and identify forms of police corruption. Students will examine the causes of corruption and assess the ethics of police officers in identifying and reporting corruption.
    4. Define and identify how police become accountable to the public. Students will examine civilian oversight and discuss the role of the court and the role of internal controls including Internal Affairs to make police officers responsible.
    5. Identify and define selection and qualifications for police work. Students will compare Michigan with other states and assess how Michigan com pares to the rest of the country in minimum police requirements.
    6. Define the police bureaucracy. Students will study the process of information flow in a department and will look at the division and segmentation of departments by interviewing officers.
    7. Define stress and identify coping measures. Students will examine what causes stress in police work and will assess what should be done and who should be responsible for implementing programs geared at stress reduction.
    8. Define changes in policing roles today. Students will project what the task of the police officer will be in the future and will assess changes in departments to accommodate these changes.
    9. Define unions and the collective bargaining process. Students will review the statute that permits collective bargaining in Michigan. In addition, students will discuss the propriety of police strikes, collective bargaining, and union and management rights in a labor contract.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Make up of a department
      1. Cost
      2. Manpower
      3. Patrol
      4. Investigation
    2. Community Policing
      1. A. Problem Oriented Policing
      2. B. Community Policing
      3. C. Broken windows theory
    3. Deviance
      1. Ethics
      2. Internal Affairs
      3. Discipline
    4. Complaints
      1. Role of civilians
      2. Role of police

    Primary Faculty
    Hliebay, Eugene
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Lopez, Michael
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • LAWE 1290 - Current Issues in Policing

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: None

    This course will select for study major issues affecting police. Examples are police-community relations; recruitment and selection; recognition and management of stress; the use of deadly force; new technology; and police productivity. The list will be updated to maintain currency.

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able identify and define issues that are influencing and changing law enforcement officers and law enforcement agencies from outside of the department.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Define the role of the police in the community today and define service as it applies to today’s police force. Students will identify what services are appropriate for police to provide and what services the public wants from the police.
    2. Define racial profiling. Examine the extent to which officers use race as a marker for police interaction.
    3. Identify cultural groups in Macomb County. Students will look at the impact cultural diversity has on Michigan and American policing. Students will investigate and create appropriate police responses to cultural situations they might face.
    4. Identify the impact of diverse cultures on law enforcement. Students will also consider what impact cultural diversity has on departments who hire officers from diverse cultures.
    5. Identify changes in the laws that affect the duties of law enforcement officers. Students will take note of all of the technology-oriented statutes and discuss the police investigative response to these statutes. In addition, students will discuss the propriety of the involvement of the federal government in influencing new state laws.
    6. Define domestic terrorism and how terrorism affects current law enforcement agencies. Students will assess current police tactics and identify areas where law enforcement must improve in the event of terrorist attack.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able identify and define issues that influence and change law enforcement officers and law enforcement agencies from inside of the department.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Identify the appropriate use of fatal force. Students will research and identify the current appropriate case law governing use of force and will research and examine non-lethal uses of force.
    2. Identify the use of force continuum. Students will discuss the current use of force continuum advanced by MCOLES. Students will assess improvements or hazards in the state model.
    3. Identify the currently approved methods and devices used to control suspect behavior. Students will examine all of the new technology that assists the police and will assess which should be standard in policing and which are nice but not necessary.
    4. Identify the elements of the disciplinary process. Students will demonstrate an understanding of the trial board process, appellate process, and the arbitration process. Students will identify the role of police unions in departmental discipline.
    5. Identify the manifestations of stress. Students will compare stress causes and levels of police officers with other professions.
    6. Identify stressors in police work and stress reduction techniques. Students will discuss the need of police management to become involved in stress reduction and the role of police unions in negotiating these principles.
    7. Identify current attitudes toward police chases. Students will discuss the rationale for chases and will research the current case law in Michigan and in the federal system with respect to chases. Students will discuss appropriate police policy.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Force
      1. Use of force continuum
      2. United States Supreme Court Cases
    2. Police Pursuits
      1. Policy
      2. Identify issues
    3. Ethics
      1. Police decision making
      2. Scenarios
    4. Racial Profiling
      1. Drug courier profile
      2. Is race a factor
    5. Stress
      1. Cause
      2. Response
      3. Union response

    Primary Faculty
    Hliebay, Eugene
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Lopez, Michael
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • LAWE 1320 - Interviewing

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: None

    Practical interviewing and related consideration in agreement with current legal stipulations.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to define the structural and verbal aspects of the seven (7) main types of interviews encountered in the law enforcement, fire science and security fields.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to list and define each of the types of questions; describe the value and purpose of each and give examples of each.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the ability to conduct interviews from the list.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify current legal and practical regulations upon the interviewing process and use of the appropriate terminology.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to conduct impromptu interviews with minimal preparation time.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to write a correct critical analysis of interviewing practices and techniques based upon the successful completion of an in-depth interview.

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the ability to plan approaches, techniques, tactics and graphic aides for use in conducting the different types of interviews.

    Outcome 8: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain the value, usage and current legal applications of polygraphy in the field.

    Outcome 9: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to define (and demonstrate) kinesics and proxemics in interviewing.

    Outcome 10: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify eight (8) related texts or articles recently published concerning interviewing and relate the primary aspects upon currently accepted interviewing practices.

    Objectives: The student will have the skills and knowledge to conduct currently accepted interviews for related arenas in the field of Public Service.

    1. Conduct a currently acceptable interview relating to a case from actual situations encountered in the fields.
    2. Conduct a currently acceptable interview relating to extemporaneous type situations taken from the annals of the actual fields involved.
    3. The successful student will integrate the technological and mathematical knowledge introduced in the course towards effective communication and applications in the modern diverse enforcement global society.
    4. Utilize the course concepts for competent analysis via scientific methodology.
    5. Integrates practical with theoretical issues in usage of information resources from enforcement applications.
    6. Use related software for facial reconstruction.
    7. Utilize appropriate documented sources for information gathering, analysis, evaluation and final critique for implementation.
    8. Apply theoretical concepts into potential situations for surveillance applications.
    9. Demonstrate knowledge of currently applicable juris précis affecting the field of interviewing at the enforcement level.
    10. Use hypothetical situations to demonstrate problem identification, systematic approach and viable solutions for the interviewing application.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Week 1. Witness Project - Specific class assignment to be covered by the instructor.
    Week 2. Impromptu Interview - Topics to be assigned in class and the requested information must be obtained by the student.
    Week 3. Second Impromptu Interview - Different topics to be covered than those from the second week.
    Week 4. Domino Feedback
    Week 5. Critique of Impromptu Interview - Different topics to be covered than those from the second week.
    Week 6. Preliminary Research Project - The individual student will compose ten (10) pertinent questions that he/she would use to conduct a highly scheduled interview in a college stetting. Briefly describe the value, purpose, format and applicability of each question. The topic for the research is “what is the best way to reduce alcohol or drug usage by college students?”
    Week 7. Kinesics Project - Collect ten (10) photographs and the articles from newspaper or magazine articles that depict at least ten (10) different body communications (briefly). State your perception observed. Then read the articles and state if each perceived body communication does or does not correlate with your perception. NO ADVERTISEMENTS.
    Week 8. Personality analysis - to be performed in class by each individual student.
    Week 9. First Exam - The exam will require essay type answers in an examination booklet (available for purchase at MCC’s bookstore).
    Week 10. Flesh Scale
    Week 11. Graphic Persuasion Aids - Collect ten (10) photographs or graphic items (photocopies of graphic items are easier to handle than the items) from newspapers, magazines, or other similar sources that could help you in a persuasion interview. The topic of the persuasion interview is “Persuade a citizen’s group to vote for a tax increase to replace all outdated police equipment.” Briefly describe how each photograph would assist your persuasion.
    Week 12. Controlled Oral
    Week 13. Research Interview project
    Week 14. Composite Photo Assignment
    Week 15. Polygraph
    Week 16. Review/Consultation
    Primary Faculty
    Hliebay, Eugene
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Lopez, Michael
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • LAWE 1400 - Crime Causation

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: None

    Relationships between crime and social, political, economic, and behavioral factors. Crime prevention programs. Emphasis on urban crime.

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify the major sociological explanation of crime.

    Objectives: Students will identify the elements of:

    1. The strain theory. Students will examine examples of this theory in current literature.
    2. Cultural deviance theories. Students will distinguish these theories by looking at group behavior such as gangs.
    3. Subcultures. Students will look intensively at gang behavior.
    4. The social control theory. Students will discuss important social groups and how they affect human behavior.
    5. Labeling, conflict, and radical theories. Students will assess these theories relationships to juvenile justice and current political ideologies.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify the major biological and psychological explanations of crime.

    Objectives: Students will identify:

    1. The early biological theories of Cesare, Lombroso, Hooten, Ferri, and Garofalo. Students will discuss the implication of such theories on the criminal justice system and defenses offered in courts of law.
    2. Genetic theories of criminality. Students will discuss the implications of free will contrasted with genetic control of behavior.
    3. Biochemical factors of criminality. Students will discuss the impact of environmental issues of personal behavior.
    4. Neurophysiological factors of criminality. Students will discuss the current research on brain wiring.
    5. The major elements of psychological theories of criminality. Students will assess these theories in light of criminal responsibility and the insanity defense. Students will also assess the competency to stand trial with respect to psychological theories of criminality.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to define profiling and identify the methodology used in criminal profiling and demonstrate in writing the analytical process used in creating a criminal profile.

    Objectives: Students will:

    1. Identify the elements of inputs. Students will identify how these shape a profile and their individual importance.
    2. Identify the elements of risk related to victims and perpetrators. Students will discuss the theory of victim precipitation.
    3. Identify the elements of analysis of data. Students will discuss how officers assess data found at crime scenes and discuss the sample utilized by the FBI in developing profiling techniques.
    4. Identify the elements of collection of data. Students will identify police means of data collection and compare studies of academic researchers.
    5. Identify the process of profiling a defendant. Students will develop a profile based upon learned principles.
    6. Demonstrate in writing the ability to analyze a crime scene for clues to the personality of a perpetrator.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to define victimology and demonstrate how victimology can be used to explain behavior and mindset of offenders.

    Objectives: Students will:

    1. Define victimology.
    2. Identify what the risk taking or lack of risk taking by a victim reveals about an offender.
    3. Identify what the stat of dress of the victim reveals about an offender.
    4. Identify what body positioning of the victim reveals about an offender.
    5. Identify what pre and post mortem wounds to the victim reveal about the offender.
    6. Identify what the method of death of victims and restraints or lack of restraints reveals about an offender.
    7. Identify what personality traits of the victim reveals about an offender.
    8. Identify what the profession of the victim reveals about the offender.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, globa l society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Theories
      1. Psychological
      2. Biological
      3. Sociological
    2. Victimology
      1. Victim as part of a crime scene
      2. What the victim tells an investigator
    3. Crime related to serial killing
      1. Stalking
      2. Arson
      3. Pedophilia
      4. Domestic Violence
      5. Child Abuse
      6. Rape
    4. Profiling
      1. FBI
      2. Oakland County Child Killing

    Primary Faculty
    Hliebay, Eugene
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Lopez, Michael
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • LAWE 1410 - Delinquency Prevention & Control

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: None

    Problems of juvenile courts, institutional treatment, community resources for prevention, probation, and police programs.

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to define and identify juvenile delinquency.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Identify and define a juvenile delinquent as a person under 17 years of age, who commits crime, and is under the jurisdiction of Probate Court.
    2. Define the role of Probate Court in Michigan, and its differentiation with District Court, Circuit Court, Appeals Court, Supreme Courts, and Criminal courts.
    3. Identify the difference between a juvenile and a status offender.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to define the nature and extent of delinquency.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Examine official statistics, study crime trends, measure delinquency in the areas of gender, race, social class, and age.
    2. Identify a chronic offender and the impact of their crime on society.
    3. Identify juvenile victimization and its relationship to the Internet.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to define Theories of Delinquency.

    Objectives: The Student will:

    1. Examine trait theories, biosocial theories, and psychological theories such as Behavioral Theory, Cognitive Theory, Psychodynamic Theory.
    2. Examine personality and intelligence as it relates to delinquency.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to define social and environmental influences on delinquency

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Define social difference in delinquent activity, personality differences, gender gap for male delinquents vs. female delinquents.
    2. Identify the liberal and radical feminists’ views on delinquency.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to define the family’s role in juvenile delinquency.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Define the current problems with a family, such as divorce, single parents, drugs, and alcoholism.
    2. Identify child abuse, child neglect, and sexual exploitation of children.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to define the role of schools in juvenile delinquency.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Define school failures, poor grades, dropping out, school shootings, and bullying in schools and their impact on society.
    2. Define free speech, prayer, and discipline in schools.

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to define drug use and abuse.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Identify various drugs such as marijuana, crack and cocaine, heroin, alcohol, and cigarettes.
    2. Identify teenage sellers of drugs, peer pressure, genetic factors, and emotional problems resulting from drug use.

    Outcome 8: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to define a gang and the problems associated with a gang

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Define a gang as a group of individuals who commit violent crime in concert with one another.
    2. Define gang graffiti, violent behavior, gang hierarchy, gang slang, dress, jewelry, and names of different gangs.

    Outcome 9: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to define the juvenile court process

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Identify the difference in terms of criminal court procedure vs. juvenile adjudication.
    2. Identify waiver procedures, sentencing structures and constitutional rights.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Concept of Delinquency
      1. Childhood and Delinquency
      2. Nature and Extent of Delinquency
    2. Theories of Delinquency
      1. Individual Views of Delinquency
      2. Sociological Views of Delinquency
      3. Psychological Delinquency Theories
    3. Social, Community, Environmental Influences
      1. Gender, Family, Peer Influences
      2. School, Drug Influences
    4. Juvenile Justice System
      1. History, Juvenile Court Process
      2. Trial, Pre-trial, Sentencing
    5. Juvenile Corrections
      1. Probation, Community Treatment, and Institutionalization
      2. Policy and Practice
    6. Juvenile Gangs
      1. Dress, Colors, Symbols, Turf
      2. Graffiti, guns, drugs
    7. History of Juvenile Justice
      1. Child Savers and House of Refuge
      2. Children’s Aid Society, Institutions
    8. Police Work with Juveniles
      1. Arrest, Search and Seizure, Custodial Interrogation
      2. Police in Schools, Police Services
    9. Juvenile Court Processes
      1. Release or Detain or Waiver
      2. Juvenile Law Cases
      3. Due Process, Death Penalty

    Primary Faculty
    Hliebay, Eugene
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Lopez, Michael
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • LAWE 1500 - Analysis of Terrorism

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: None

    A detailed examination of the causes, phenomena, and significance of terrorism of all types, including those which are revolutionary in origin, as well as state, liberation, and criminal. The workshop, having provided a sound knowledge of the origins, leadership and policies of terrorism, will monitor its path and practices in the world of today as well as providing some assessment of the threat of tomorrow. By means of the workshop approach, each student will learn to track the activities of the various terrorist groups.

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to define terrorism and identify topologies of terrorism.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Identify arguments of elements to be included in the definition of terrorism.
    2. Define political as it is used in the term terrorism.
    3. Identify the ways in which terrorism can be a tactic of the revolutionary and a strategy of the state.
    4. Identify left and right wing ideology.
    5. Identify the elements of terrorism from above and below.
    6. Identify the elements of nationalistic groups.
    7. Identify the elements of crusaders, criminals and crazies.
    8. Identify the elements of state-sponsored terrorism.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify the legal and political aspects of terrorism.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Identify the issues concerning political asylum.
    2. Define political offense exception to extradition.
    3. Identify the elements of crimes under which terrorists may be prosecuted.
    4. Identify issues related to formulation of a national policy toward terrorism.
    5. Identify the weaponry of terrorism.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify methods of counter-terrorism.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Define counter-terrorism.
    2. Identify issues related to intelligence oversight.
    3. Define the role of the media.
    4. Identify the elements of hostage-taking and hostage negotiation.
    5. Identify the elements of narco-terrorism.
    6. Identify the victimization process.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. The Criminology and Controversy of Terrorism
      1. Definitions, Tactics, and Behavior
      2. Origins of Modern Terrorism
      3. Changing Group Structures
      4. Advent of Religious Terrorism
      5. Financing Terrorism
      6. Types of Modern Terrorism
    2. International Terrorism
      1. Evolution of Jihadist Networks
      2. The Umbrella Effect
      3. The Question of Israel and Palestine
      4. Middle Eastern Terrorism in Metamorphosis
      5. Nationalistic and Ethnic Terrorism
      6. Ideological Terrorism
    3. Domestic Terrorism
      1. Conceptualizing Terrorism in America
      2. Terrorism in the United States
    4. Issues in Homeland Security
      1. In Search of Homeland Security
      2. Protecting the Homeland and Protecting Civil Liberties
      3. The Bureaucracy of Homeland Security
      4. The Media: Affecting Terrorism and Homeland Security

    Primary Faculty
    Hliebay, Eugene
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Lopez, Michael
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • LAWE 1600 - Introduction to Cyber Crime Investigation

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: None

    (formerly LAWE 2915)

    LAWE 1600 provides students with an overview of cyber crimes, computer-related crime issues confronting the American criminal justice system, and various means of investigating those crimes.

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to define traditional versus contemporary computer crime.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Identify and discuss phreakers, hacking, computers as commodities, and theft of intellectual property.
    2. Identify and discuss neo-traditional crime, web-based criminal activity, and ancillary crimes.
    3. Define and discuss identity theft and fraud, prevalence of victimology, physical methods of virtual ID theft or internet-facilitated methods, and crimes facilitated by ID theft/fraud.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify various avenues and outcomes for prosecution and government efforts.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Define and discuss traditional statutes, the evolution of computer-specific statutes, and evolving child pornography statutes.
    2. Identify theft and financial privacy statutes, federally funded operations and tools in the United States, and international efforts.
    3. Define the first and fourth amendment and their respective application to computer-related crime.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe forensic terminology/forensic science capabilities, searching and seizing computer-related evidence and processing of evidence/report preparation

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Define and discuss computer forensic science and disk structure, developing computer forensic science capabilities, minimum housing/hardware/software requirements and a sampling of popular forensic software.
    2. Identify pre-search activities, on-scene activities, bagging and tagging, identifying witnesses and scene departure/transportation of evidence to the lab.
    3. Identify and discuss aspects of data analysis, non-windows operating systems, P.D.A. forensics, and written report preparation and final documentation.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Session and Topic:

    1. Cyberspace and criminal behavior
    2. Computer terminology and history
    3. Traditional vs. contemporary computer crime
    4. ID theft/fraud
    5. Prosecution and government efforts
    6. Application of first and fourth amendments to computer-related crimes
    7. Forensic science capabilities
    8. Search and seizure/processing computer-related evidence

    Primary Faculty
    Hliebay, Eugene
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Lopez, Michael
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • LAWE 2320 - Police Leadership, Management, & Supervision

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: None

    (formerly LAWE 2914)

    This course will provide students with basic knowledge of the theory and practice of effective leadership as it relates to law enforcement. Topics include distinguishing between management and leadership; personal traits, characteristics, and behaviors of effective leaders; and factors that influence interaction between various levels of police officers. Students will also assess their personal leadership skills.

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to demonstrate knowledge of effective leadership in a law enforcement setting in both theory and practice.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Explain why police leadership has been defined in so many ways.
    2. Identify what leadership aspects have been studied and practiced during the past 50 years.
    3. Assess the various skills required for effective leadership in law enforcement.
    4. Translate the various definitions, traits, and characteristics of leadership and management into a coherent and synthesized taxonomy.
    5. Assemble and analyze the roles of influence, motivation, and power relationships as they relate to leadership in law enforcement.
    6. Articulate how leadership can be described as an individual, dyadic, group, or organizational process.
    7. Define in which situations participative leadership is most likely to be effective.
    8. Recognize why task, relations, and change-oriented behaviors are important for leadership effectiveness in law enforcement.
    9. Discuss the potential benefits and risks of delegation as it relates to law enforcement.
    10. Demonstrate the psychological processes that explain how leaders influence people and the law enforcement community.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to recognize their own personal leadership skills and abilities.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Recognize and identify leadership self-assessment instruments.
    2. Participate in police leadership skill-building exercises.
    3. Describe follower perception and evaluation of a leader
    4. Explain how leader behavior is influenced by skills and experience of the subordinate.
    5. Recognize different types of influence tactics used in police organizations
    6. State what followers can do to have a more dyadic relationship with their leader.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to discuss police officer subordinate contributions to effective interaction with upper management.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Define police leadership and explain how it differs from police management.
    2. Describe the different roles for managers and how they are changing in law enforcement.
    3. Recognize the various types and styles of police leaders and managers.
    4. State how managerial roles and activities are affected by aspects of the situation.
    5. Describe the importance of external activities and networking for law enforcement managers.
    6. Identify appropriate ways to manage performance deficiencies.
    7. Recognize conflict management styles.
    8. Recognize how position and personal attributes can be a source of power for the law enforcement leader.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Session and Topic:

    1. History and Definitions of Leadership Versus Management
      1. Heredity and environmental factors
      2. Partnerships
      3. Relationships
      4. Student leadership self-assessment quiz
      5. Skill development of leaders
    2. Leadership Motives
      1. Power
      2. Achievement
      3. Goal oriented
      4. Strong work ethic
    3. Cognitive Factors
      1. General intelligence
      2. Knowledge of business or area of expertise
      3. Creativity
      4. Insight into people and situations
      5. Farsightedness and conceptual thinking
    4. Types of Leaders
      1. Charismatic
      2. Transformational
      3. Situational
      4. Autocratic
      5. Participative
    5. Power, Politics, and Leadership
      1. Positional power
      2. Personal power
      3. Pyramid shaped organizational structure
      4. External influences
      5. Ethical and unethical political practices
    6. Delegation
      1. Definition
      2. Purpose
      3. Responsibility
      4. Empowerment
    7. Motivation and Coaching Skills
      1. Approaches to motivation
      2. Expectancy theory
      3. Goal theory
      4. Improved performance
      5. Discipline
    8. Communications and Conflict Resolution
      1. Persuasion b. Verbal
      2. Nonverbal
      3. Cross-cultural skills
      4. Domination
      5. Neglect
      6. Integration
      7. Accommodative
    9. Cultural Diversity Aspects of Leadership
      1. Values
      2. Intelligence
      3. Diversity training
      4. Multicultural organizations
      5. Recruitment, retention, and mentoring

    Primary Faculty
    Hliebay, Eugene
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Lopez, Michael
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • LAWE 2330 - Introduction to Criminal Investigations

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: None

    (formerly LAWE 2913)

    LAWE 2330 introduces the duties and role of the criminal investigator in conducting investigations. Topics include basic leads, investigative techniques, rules of evidence, and case preparation for court.

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate basic knowledge of criminal investigation.

    Objectives:

    1. Discuss the history and development of criminal investigation.
    2. Discuss the need for covert investigations.
    3. Define and discuss the importance of crime scene investigation.
    4. Discuss and define basic investigative tools, fingerprints, composite sketches, the crime scene canvass, the polygraph.
    5. Define and discus the modern technology of criminal investigations.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to discuss the role of a criminal investigator as it relates to interview and interrogation.

    Objectives:

    1. Discuss the relevant issues of interviewing and detecting deception.
    2. Discuss the reasons for and fallout of false confessions.
    3. Discuss the role of Miranda warnings and understanding techniques for proper interrogation.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. An Overview of the Investigate Process
      1. History
      2. Characteristics of an Effective Investigator
    2. Basic Leads and Investigative Techniques and Tools
      1. Victimology
      2. Opportunity
      3. Vehicles
      4. Modus Operandi
      5. Composite Sketches
      6. Linking the Suspect to the Crime Scene
    3. Direct and Circumstantial Evidence
    4. Documenting the Crime Scene
      1. Effective Note-taking
      2. Searches
      3. Physical Evidence
      4. Line of Sight Canvass, Locating Witnesses
      5. Child Abuse
    5. Rules of Evidence
      1. Chain of Custody
      2. Relative and Best Evidence
    6. Importance of the News Media in Solving Crime
      1. Public Office of Information Officer
      2. AMW (America’s Most Wanted) and Local News Agencies
    7. Identification and Arrest of Accused Persons
      1. Fingerprints
      2. DNA
      3. Photo Show-Ups and Line-Ups
      4. Probable Cause and Arrest Warrants
      5. Arraignment and Preliminary Examination
    8. Interviewing and Detection of Deception, False Confessions
      1. Miranda
      2. Case Studies
    9. Mid-Term Examination
    10. Violent Crime Investigations
      1. Violent Crimes Investigation
      2. Sex Offenses
      3. Robbery
    11. Violent Crime Investigations
      1. Death Investigations
      2. Child Abuse
    12. Arson and Property Crimes
    13. Drug and Special and Covert Investigations
      1. Undercover Investigations
      2. Internal Affairs
      3. Use of Informants
      4. Surveillance
      5. Eavesdropping Laws
    14. Cyber-Crimes
      1. Fraud and Computer Scams
      2. Child Predators
    15. Preparing the Case for Court
      1. Preparing the Investigative Report
      2. Investigators’ Relationship with the County Prosecutor
    16. Final Examination

    Primary Faculty
    Hliebay, Eugene
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Lopez, Michael
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • LAWE 2355 - Crime Scene Investigation (CSI)

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: None

    (formerly LAWE 2350)

    This course provides hands on experience with the various methods of crime scene analysis, evidence collection and preservation, determining modus operandi, and case preparation used by the crime scene investigator.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 4
    Billable Contact Hours: 4
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to collect data (including written, photographic and computer recording) from the evidence available at the scenes of crimes.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a mock crime scene scenario, demonstrate the skills to conduct specific searches and analysis subject to existing standards in the field.
    2. Identify key evidence concepts and their major impact on case analysis.
    3. Employ scientific methodology in investigative applications.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe various scientific methods used in crime scene investigation

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate the basic principles of dactylography (latent, patent and comparison).
    2. Explain the principles of kinetic energy as they relate to criminal investigations
    3. Demonstrate knowledge of metrology via applicable equipment in forensic areas.

    Outcome 3: Upon Completion of this course, students will be able to reconstruct a crime through the interpretation of evidence.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify glazing patterns and their applications.
    2. Explain fluid pattern behavior as it applies to investigations.
    3. Recognize physical characteristics in terminal trauma cases for use in Reconstruction of behavior.
    4. Employ state of the art technology in the field directed towards value interpretation of evidence.

    Outcome 4: Upon Completion of this course, students will be able to explain the importance of proper documentation in preserving the chain of evidence.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the relationships between record keeping and case linkages towards successful resolution in the investigatory process.
    2. Describe the investigative strengths of case presentation and analysis using high profile documented cases.
    3. Complete an in‐depth interpretation of various types of related physical evidence for inclusion into the encapsulation and reporting as determined by the existing standards for investigation.
    4. Explain the investigative weakness of case presentation and analysis using high profile documented cases.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Week 1 Introductions
      Syllabus
       
    Week 2 Lecture Chapter 1
      Homework assignments:
     

    Reading - Chapter 1 and Chapter 4 pp. 100‐103
    Questions - p.24 1, 3, 9, 28, 29

       
    Week 3 Lecture Chapter 1
      Experiment 1 “Metrology”
      Homework assignments:
     

    Reading - Chapter 2
    Questions p.48 1, 11, 17, AND define rough/finished sketch

       
    Week 4 Lecture Chapter 2
      Experiment 2 “Crime Scene”
      Homework assignments:
     

    Reading - Chapter 3
    Questions p.82 1, 5, 6, 11, 13

       
    Week 5 Lecture Chapter 3
      Experiment 3 “Evidence Collection”
      Homework assignments:
     

    Reading - Chapter 4
    Questions p.115 1, 3, 7, 15, 17

    Week 6 Lecture Chapter 4
      Experiment 4 “Glass Breakage”
      Homework assignments:
     

    Reading ‐ Chapter 7
    Questions p.181 1, 2, 3, 4, 5

       
    Week 7 Lecture Chapter 7
      Experiment 5 “Microscope”
       
    Week 8 Research Paper
       
    Week 9 Review Midterm
     

    MIDTERM
    Make up experiments 1‐5

      Homework assignments
     

    Reading ‐ Chapter 9
    Questions p.237 1, 2, 5, 10, 11

       
    Week 10 Lecture Chapter 9
      Experiment 6 “Alcohol”
      Homework assignments
     

    Reading Chapter 16
    Questions p.413 1, 2, 3, 7, 11

       
    Week 11 ORAL PRESENTATIONS DUE
       
    Week 12 Lecture Chapter 16
      Experiment 8 “Fingerprints Impressions”
       
    Week 13 Lecture Chapter 16
      Experiment 9 “Fingerprints Lifting”
      Homework assignments
     

    Reading ‐ Chapter 17
    Questions p.447 2, 23, 35

       
    Week 14 Lecture Chapter 17
      Experiment 10 “Casting”
       
    Week 15 FINAL
      Makeup Experiments 6‐10
       
    Week 16 Evaluations and critique
      Individual student assessments

    Primary Faculty
    Hliebay, Eugene
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Lopez, Michael
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • LAWE 2680 - Evidence & Criminal Procedures

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: None

    Principles, duties, and mechanics of criminal procedure as applied to important areas of arrest, force, and search and seizure.

    Contact Hours: 4
    Billable Contact Hours: 4
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to learn the principles, duties and mechanics of criminal procedure as applied to important areas of arrest, force, and search and seizure.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. List the steps taken to update a given appellate case.
    2. List the steps taken to update various Michigan statutes.
    3. Define Shepardizing.
    4. Explain in detail how to Shepardize a given case, including the steps taken to complete such a task.
    5. Explain how to locate a given statute by assigned topic.
    6. Explain how to locate a given statute by either a Michigan Compiled Laws Annotated or a Michigan Statues Annotated citation.
    7. Explain how to cross reference from an M.S.A. number to an M.C.L.A. number.
    8. Explain how to locate specific statues in the new Public Acts materials.
    9. Explain how to locate an M.S.A. number or an M.C.L.A. number from the Public Acts numbers.
    10. List the various reference materials that may possibly be found in addition to specific statutes in the M.S.A. and M.C.L.A. materials.
    11. Explain how to locate a given appellate case when presented with only a name and date.
    12. Explain how to use the advanced sheets for Michigan Court of Appeals cases and Michigan Supreme Court cases.
    13. Explain the various reference encyclopedias that are available to Macomb students.
    14. List the benefits to a Criminal Procedures student in using the Criminal Law Reporter.
    15. Explain how to use the Criminal Law Reporter.
    16. Explain how to locate materials in the Michigan Digest.
    17. Define what is meant by West’s Key-Numbering System.
    18. Explain the use of the key-numbering system.
    19. Explain the difference between a statute and a constitutional amendment.
    20. Explain how to locate a given Michigan constitutional amendment.
    21. Explain how to locate a given United States constitutional amendment.
    22. Explain how to update various constitutional amendments.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. The Federal System
      1. The U.S. Supreme Court
      2. The Federal Constitution
    2. Due Process
      1. Leading Cases
    3. Search and Seizure
      1. Search Warrants
      2. Searches Incident to Arrest
      3. Inventory Searches
      4. Consent Searches
      5. Motor Vehicle Searches
      6. Exigent Circumstances
      7. Protections of Fourth Amendment
    4. Right to Counsel
      1. Leading Cases
    5. The Defense of Entrapment
      1. Leading Cases
    6. The Privilege Against Self-Incrimination
      1. Leading Cases
    7. Preliminary Examinations
      1. Leading Cases
    8. The Right to a Speedy Trial
      1. Leading Cases
    9. Plea Bargaining
      1. Leading Cases
    10. Double Jeopardy
      1. Leading Cases
    11. Exclusionary Rule
      1. Leading Cases

    Primary Faculty
    Mitseff, Kimberly
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Lopez, Michael
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • LAWE 2690 - Criminal Law

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: None

    Elements of substantive criminal law relevant to attaining the preservation and protection of life and property. The structure, definitions, and most applicable pertinent sections of the criminal statutes.

    Contact Hours: 4
    Billable Contact Hours: 4
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of substantive criminal law relevant to attaining the preservation and protection of life and property.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Brief and discuss the leading cases in the respective substantive criminal law area.
    2. Study and discuss the Michigan statutes regarding specific areas of substantive law.
    3. Study and review the sentencing differences for levels of the same crime.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. General Materials
      1. The Courts
      2. Parties to a Crime
      3. Elements Making Up Crimes
      4. Burden of Proof
      5. Corpus Delicti
      6. States of Mind
    2. The Crime of Murder
      1. Murder in the First Degree
      2. Murder in the Second Degree
      3. Jurisdiction
    3. Manslaughter
      1. Voluntary Manslaughter
      2. Involuntary Manslaughter
    4. Negligent Homicide
      1. The Common Law
      2. Under Michigan Statute
    5. Assaults
      1. Simple Assault
      2. Assault and Battery
      3. Aggravated Assault
      4. Domestic Assault
      5. Felonious Assault
      6. Assault With Intent to Commit Great Bodily Harm Less than Murder
      7. Assault With Intent to Commit Murder
      8. Assault Crimes With Specific Intent
    6. Sex Offenses
      1. Crimes Under the Criminal Sexual Conduct Act
      2. The Crime of Gross Indecency
      3. Sodomy
      4. Indecent Exposure
    7. Robbery Offenses
      1. Armed Robbery
      2. Unarmed Robbery
      3. The Assault Robbery Crimes
    8. Burglary and Home Invasion
      1. Common Law Burglary
      2. Burglary By Statute in Michigan
      3. The Crime of Home Invasion
    9. Theft Crimes
      1. Larceny
      2. Larceny By Trick
      3. Larceny By Conversion
      4. Larceny By False Pretenses
      5. Embezzlement
      6. Receiving and Concealing Stolen Property
      7. Unlawfully Driving Away An Automobile
      8. Retail Fraud
    10. Weapons Offenses Under Michigan Law
      1. Carrying a Concealed Weapon
      2. Possession of certain Illegal Weapons
      3. Possession of a Weapon With Unlawful Intent
      4. Felony Firearm
    11. Arson
      1. Arson in General
      2. Arson of Real Property
      3. Arson of Personal Property
      4. Preparation to Burn
    12. Police Related Crimes
      1. The Crime of Resisting and Obstruction a Police Officer
      2. Fleeing and Eluding
      3. Assaulting a Police Officer
    13. Narcotics Offenses
      1. Distribution
      2. Possession
    14. Inchoate Crimes
      1. Conspiracy
      2. Attempts
      3. Solicitation
    15. Defenses
      1. Self Defense
      2. Entrapment
      3. Alibi
      4. Insanity
      5. Duress

    Primary Faculty
    Mitseff, Kimberly
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Lopez, Michael
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • LAWE 2700 - Advanced Court Procedures

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: LAWE 1100; and LAWE 1280 or LAWE 1290

    This course provides practical experience in advanced court processes connected with law enforcement. The student will be presented with a factual scenario in which the student will be assigned a role. The student will then be faced with the consequences of police actions taken through civil, criminal, and department legal proceedings.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify and define issues affecting law enforcement officers subsequent to taking police action in criminal cases.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Identify testimonial issues relating to preliminary examinations. Through an actual direct and cross-examination, students will be expected to testify about their participation in a scenario. In addition, students will be held accountable for any reports written, evidence gathered, statement taken, or interrogation administered.
    2. Students will be responsible for their reports as well as for their description of events that transpired in the gathering of this evidence. They will demonstrate these objectives through direct and cross-examination.
    3. Identify issues related to police incident reports. Each student will generate an original report and that report will be used to examine the witness. In addition, the report will be used in civil litigation. Students will be instructed and will demonstrate their knowledge of police reports by preparing samples prior to the scenario and subsequent to the scenario.
    4. Demonstrate appropriate writing skills in report writing and statements. Students will be given instruction in the proper preparation of reports.
    5. Students will participate in a mock oral board in which command officers will ask questions relating to knowledge of police procedure in preparation for the hiring process.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify and define issues affecting law enforcement officers subsequent to taking police action in civil cases.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Identify testimonial issues related to depositions. Students will prepare for and attend a deposition regarding the actions they took during the scenario. Students will be responsible for obtaining and bringing evidence and will be examined by plaintiff’s counsel.
    2. Identify differences between criminal and civil procedure prior to trial. Students will attend a mock deposition where they will be questioned regarding their actions in the scenario from a civil litigation perspective.
    3. Identify potential defenses to be used on behalf of officers in civil proceedings. Civil attorneys will discuss the answering of interrogatories, and discuss defenses to be raised in the civil process.
    4. Demonstrate proper courtroom and testifying skills. Civil attorneys will discuss student participation pointing out pitfalls and questions to be anticipated by officers in similar situations.
    5. Demonstrate an understanding of the vocabulary used in the hearing process. Students will be required to research articles on testimony in the library and on the Internet.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Report writing
    2. Scenario
    3. Preliminary Exam
    4. Deposition
    5. Oral board
    6. Presentations by current police officers on criminal investigation
    7. Discipline
    8. Federal District Court
    9. Medical Examiner’s Office

    Primary Faculty
    Hliebay, Eugene
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Lopez, Michael
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • LAWE 2810 - Basic Police Academy

    Credit Hours: 15.00


    Prerequisites: Consent of department; meet admissions standards of MCOLES; at least 18 years of age; valid Michigan driver’s license; no felony convictions; pass MCOLES reading, writing and physical fitness pre-employment tests.

    (formerly LAWE 2800)

    LAWE 2810 prepares students in the proper techniques of patrol procedures, criminal investigation, and crime scene process. Emphasis is on conflict resolution, report writing, and detention and prosecution of prisoners. First aid, investigations, evidence collection, disaster control, civil disorders, and tactical operations are also covered. This course meets the state‑mandated requirements for preparing students to take the exam for State certifications for entry‑level police officers.

    Location: East Campus

    Contact Hours: 48.25
    Billable Contact Hours: 18
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate competency in investigative techniques.
     
    Objectives: The student will:
    Describe the features of our criminal justice system and explain how it is built upon constitutional law.

    1. Locate and describe specific provisions of the United States Constitution important to the operation of our form of government.
    2. Describe the Michigan Constitution and its relationship to law enforcement in Michigan and the United States Constitution.
    3. Identify the basic concepts of criminal law.
    4. Research and use the Michigan penal code (MCLA/MSA) to identify crimes against persons.
    5. Identify crimes against persons.
    6. Research and use the Michigan penal code (MCLA/MSA) to identify crimes against property.
    7. Identify crimes against property.
    8. Research and use the Michigan penal code (MCLA/MSA) to identify contraband and regulatory crimes.
    9. Identify contraband and regulatory crimes.
    10. Use the Michigan Penal Code (MCLA/MSA) to identify public order crimes.
    11. Identify public order crimes.
    12. Identify the integral relationship between investigative procedures and admissible evidence in court.
    13. Collect evidence in daily investigative activities applying the laws of evidence as defined by federal and state courts.
    14. Conduct investigations from the initial complaint to presentation of evidence in the courtroom in conformance with the Michigan rules of evidence.
    15. Define and explain juvenile law as it relates to law enforcement.
    16. Define and explain the special provisions in the statutes and court rules for juvenile offenses.
    17. Collect admissions and confessions as evidence, in accordance with federal and state laws regarding admissions and confessions.
    18. Prepare for an interrogation of a suspect.
    19. Advise persons of their constitutional rights.
    20. Instruct a suspect on the process for obtaining an attorney.
    21. Explain the nature of a complaint to a suspect.
    22. Conduct interrogation of a suspect.
    23. Record statements of suspects.
    24. Arrest persons in a lawful manner.
    25. Warn offenders in lieu of arrest or citation.
    26. Plan strategy for making arrests.
    27. Arrest persons with a warrant.
    28. Arrest persons without a warrant.
    29. Take into custody a person detained by citizen.
    30. Transport prisoner.
    31. Conduct searches with a warrant in a lawful manner.
    32. Obtain a search warrant.
    33. Exercise safety precautions when searching.
    34. Search premises or property with a warrant.
    35. Search persons with a warrant.
    36. Conduct searches without a warrant only under court recognized exceptions to the fourth amendment warrant requirement.
    37. Search premises, property, or passenger compartment of a vehicle incident to an arrest.
    38. Search a movable vehicle with probable cause and exigent circumstances.
    39. Search buildings in hot pursuit situations.
    40. Search premises or property with consent.
    41. Conduct corporeal lineups.
    42. Conduct photo lineups.
    43. Conduct a show up (immediate on-scene identification).
    44. Determine whether an incident is a criminal or civil matter.
    45. Handle complaints.
    46. Conduct a preliminary investigation by protecting a crime scene and locating witnesses.
    47. Evaluate information at a preliminary investigation to determine course of action.
    48. Track a person from a scene.
    49. Search for persons using proper techniques.
    50. Locate witnesses to a crime using various methods.
    51. Interview complainants and witnesses.
    52. Take statements of witnesses.
    53. Examine dead body for evidence of unnatural death.
    54. Search dead bodies for identification when death is determined to be natural.
    55. Verify the identity of deceased persons.
    56. Review with medical examiner circumstances relating to a death.
    57. Establish the modus operandi (M.O.) of a suspect.
    58. Analyze and compare incidents for similarity of modus operandi (M.O.).
    59. Utilize department records to assist in investigation.
    60. Review crime lab reports to guide an investigation.
    61. Review records and pictures to identify suspects.
    62. Organize and conduct a corporeal lineup.
    63. Organize and conduct photo lineups.
    64. Conduct a show up.
    65. Explain the civil law necessary for effective functioning as a law enforcement officer.
    66. Explain the court system at a level necessary for effective functioning as a law enforcement officer.
    67. Define legal terms and discuss issues related to the court system at a level necessary for effective functioning as a law enforcement officer.
    68. Explain legal processes of the court at a level necessary for effective functioning as a law enforcement officer.
    69. Plan strategy for a search.
    70. Search a crime scene for physical evidence.
    71. Diagram location of physical evidence at crime scene.
    72. Process a diagram of a crime scene as evidence.
    73. Photograph crime scenes.
    74. Collect information and evidence at scene of a preliminary investigation.
    75. Collect evidence and personal property from a crime scene.
    76. Cast impressions.
    77. Locate and evaluate latent fingerprints.
    78. Tag evidence and confiscated properties.
    79. Package evidence or personal property.
    80. Transport property or evidence.
    81. Document the chain of custody for evidence.
    82. Witness autopsies.
    83. Process impounded property.
    84. Determine if recovered property is linked with a previous crime.
    85. Trace stolen goods.
    86. Recover and inventory stolen property.
    87. Define the provisions of the child protection law.
    88. Recognize suspected cases of child abuse while responding to complaints related to and not related to child abuse.
    89. Investigate cases of suspected child abuse or neglect.
    90. Take child into protective custody.
    91. Define the criminal sexual conduct laws.
    92. Respond to a complaint of sexual assault.
    93. Investigate a complaint of a sexual assault.
    94. Define the controlled substances provisions of the public health code.
    95. Investigate violations of the controlled substances provisions of the public health code commonly encountered by the working patrol officer.
    96. Explain the historical context and changes in society’s understanding of domestic violence.
    97. Discuss the nature of domestic violence.
    98. Explain the behaviors used by domestic violent assailants.
    99. Classify assailant behavior officers might encounter at the domestic violence scene.
    100. Discuss victim behaviors officers might encounter at the scene of domestic violence.
    101. Explain the consequences victims may face as they consider leaving the assailants.
    102. Explain the consequences victims may face when participating in the criminal justice system.
    103. Define indicators that can assist officers in assessing when an assailant might kill.
    104. Explain why domestic violence is a law enforcement issue.
    105. Define substantive criminal law as it relates to domestic violence.
    106. Explain the options available to the court in sentencing and adjudication in domestic violence cases.
    107. Define the crime of stalking.
    108. Define the crime of aggravated stalking.
    109. Define the authority of a police officer in enforcing domestic violence laws.
    110. Explain a domestic relationship personal protection order.
    111. Explain a non-domestic stalking personal protection order.
    112. Explain court procedures related to personal protection orders.
    113. Explain enforcement of domestic relationship and non- domestic stalking personal protection orders.
    114. Discuss a personal protection order’s effect on firearm purchase or possession.
    115. Define probable cause (reasonable cause) as it relates to domestic violence.
    116. Explain procedural requirements in responding to a domestic violence incident.
    117. Respond to the scene of domestic violence.
    118. Make initial contact at the scene of domestic violence.
    119. Conduct a preliminary criminal investigation upon entry to the scene.
    120. Interview the suspected assailant as part of the complete criminal investigation at a domestic violence scene.
    121. Interview the victim as part of the complete criminal investigation at a domestic violence scene.
    122. Determine whether probable cause exists to make an arrest when responding to domestic violence.
    123. Arrest a domestic violence assailant after establishing probable cause that a crime has been committed.
    124. Arrest the assailant after establishing that a personal protection order (PPO) has been violated.
    125. Arrest a domestic violence assailant after establishing that a conditional release order (conditional bond) has been violated.
    126. Complete the criminal investigation at the domestic violence scene.
    127. Provide appropriate assistance to the domestic violence victim when an arrest has been made.
    128. Secure a domestic violence scene when an arrest cannot be made.
    129. Write a domestic violence report documenting the domestic violence investigation.
    130. Secure digital media evidence.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate competency in patrol procedures.

    Objectives:

    1. Inspect patrol vehicle for weapons and contraband.
    2. Prepare for patrol by becoming familiar with area.
    3. Use the LEIN system to support patrol and investigative operations.
    4. Receive and evaluate telephone requests for police service.
    5. Use police radio to communicate with dispatcher, LEIN operator, and other officers.
    6. Inform the dispatcher of status and needs.
    7. Take custody of lost and found property.
    8. Verify vehicle title information.
    9. Discuss the relationship between the police officer and the public in our form of government.
    10. Discuss the role of ethics in performing the duties of a police officer.
    11. Discuss the role of ethics in the relationship between the police officer, the organization, and the public.
    12. Discuss how ethical behavior promotes professionalism.
    13. Discuss the relationship between the use of discretion and ethical behavior as it applies to the enforcement of laws.
    14. Explain how behavior could result in compromising an officer’s credibility, public trust, and/or employment status.
    15. Describe some methods that will assist in making ethical decisions.
    16. Explain Title VII of the 1964 Civil Rights Act (18 USC 242).
    17. Identify the key elements of Michigan’s Elliott-Larsen Civil Rights Act (MCL 37.2103).
    18. Explain Title II of the Americans With Disabilities Act.
    19. Explain Michigan Handicapper’s Civil Rights Act (MHCRA) (MCL 37.1101).
    20. Explain Michigan’s Ethnic Intimidation Statute (MCL 750.147b; MSA 28.344 (2)).
    21. Describe the benefits of understanding diverse cultures that make up the officer’s living and working environment.
    22. Define a multi-cultural society.
    23. Discuss the basic nature of culture.
    24. Define stereotyping.
    25. Define the characteristics of prejudice.
    26. Discuss how prejudice influences behavior.
    27. Improve communication with community members by acknowledging cultural traits and values.
    28. Communicate across cultures effectively.
    29. Discuss barriers to cross-cultural communication.
    30. Interact in a non-prejudiced manner with co-workers and supervisors within the law enforcement organization.
    31. Explain the law regarding sexual harassment.
    32. Discuss causes of sexual harassment.
    33. Discuss costs associated with sexual harassment.
    34. Explain the responsibility assumed in preventing harassment.
    35. Explain the importance of effective communication in policing.
    36. Define the basics of communication.
    37. Apply techniques that will enhance listening skills.
    38. Identify verbal and non-verbal behavior that indicates potential hostility.
    39. Discuss methods for conflict resolution.
    40. Identify situations that are likely to cause severe stress or crisis for citizens.
    41. Describe the mental states that persons in crisis may exhibit.
    42. Discuss techniques used to communicate with persons in crisis.
    43. Discuss techniques used to communicate with deaf or hard of hearing persons.
    44. Deliver emergency messages (e.g., injuries, death).
    45. Establish rapport with people while on patrol approach the scene of a civil dispute.
    46. Manage a civil dispute.
    47. Resolve a civil dispute.
    48. Define the nature of victimization.
    49. Identify situations that are likely to cause severe stress or crisis for crime victims.
    50. Describe the mental stages that persons in severe crisis may experience.
    51. Advise victims of their rights under the Crime Victims’ Rights Act.
    52. Discuss an appropriate law enforcement response to the victims of crime.
    53. Define the role of the victim advocate.
    54. Deliver death notifications.
    55. Explain how to patrol in a vehicle using a variety of techniques.
    56. Patrol on foot.
    57. Patrol on bicycle.
    58. Check parks and school grounds.
    59. Search unlocked businesses and dwellings for signs of illegal entry.
    60. Secure buildings.
    61. Check individuals/businesses for compliance with licensing requirements.
    62. Advise property owners or agents of potentially hazardous conditions.
    63. Notify citizens of damage to their property.
    64. Secure vehicles.
    65. Investigate an unattended suspicious vehicle.
    66. Follow a suspicious vehicle.
    67. Investigate unusual odors and sounds.
    68. Identify wanted vehicles or persons.
    69. Interview suspicious persons.
    70. Participate in large scale area search parties.
    71. Escort money, valuables, or people to provide security.
    72. Develop informants using field contacts.
    73. Respond to crimes in progress.
    74. Conduct an initial investigation at a “crime in progress” scene.
    75. Secure “crime in progress” scene and begin an investigation.
    76. Direct actions of other officers at a scene of action.
    77. Advise victims of the procedures for prosecution.
    78. Discuss the law regarding the handling of abnormal persons.
    79. Recognize the signs and symptoms that may be indicative of mentally ill persons.
    80. Approach and handle a suspected mentally disturbed person.
    81. Transport the mentally disturbed subject using proper procedures.
    82. Take field notes.
    83. Obtain information for police report.
    84. Organize information for police report.
    85. Complete incident reports.
    86. Prepare narrative reports.
    87. Write summaries of witness and complainant interviews.
    88. Prepare a criminal case summary for prosecutor.
    89. Apprehend juvenile offenders.
    90. Detain and transport juvenile offenders.
    91. Notify parents/guardians and/or proper authorities of a juvenile apprehension.
    92. Inform juvenile offender of Miranda rights before interrogation.
    93. Counsel juveniles.
    94. Conduct parent-juvenile interview(s).
    95. Determine the course of action following parent/juvenile conference.
    96. Inform parent(s)/guardian of the status of the juvenile offender’s case at time of release.
    97. Confer with juvenile probation officer.
    98. Demonstrate competency in report writing.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate competency in detention and prosecution.

    Objectives:

    1. Conduct a custodial search.
    2. Explain the purpose and value of taking acceptable fingerprint and palm print impressions.
    3. Explain the methods used to obtain fingerprints and palm prints.
    4. Take fingerprints and palm pints during a classroom practical exercise.
    5. Provide proper care and treatment to prisoners.
    6. Investigate injuries to prisoners.
    7. Guard prisoners detained outside of a jail.
    8. Advise adult defendant or family regarding an arrest/detention.
    9. Identify proper court for case prosecution.
    10. Prepare request for warrant authorization.
    11. Confer with prosecutor or city attorney regarding warrant authorization.
    12. Review warrants for completeness and accuracy.
    13. Swear out complaints or warrants.
    14. Prepare to arraign a defendant.
    15. Arraign a defendant in court.
    16. Verify reliability and credibility of witnesses.
    17. Review a case with the prosecutor or city attorney to plan preparation of case.
    18. Check that witnesses are ready for court testimony.
    19. Prepare for testifying in a legal proceeding.
    20. Explain the proper demeanor prior to testifying in a legal proceeding.
    21. Present testimony in a legal proceeding.
    22. Review a case with prosecutors or city attorneys following a legal proceeding.
    23. Determine validity of civil process.
    24. Enforce a court issued order (e.g., writs).
    25. Serve probate orders (e.g., persons requiring treatment, juveniles, adult offenders).

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the required skills of a police officer.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the law and responsibilities related to a law enforcement officer administering first aid.
    2. Conduct a scene assessment.
    3. Demonstrate a working knowledge of the control and spread of blood borne pathogens.
    4. Control emotions at first aid scene.
    5. Conduct a patient survey to assess a victim’s medical status.
    6. Recognize normal body signs in order to be able to determine when abnormal signs are present.
    7. Administer first aid to treat for shock.
    8. Administer first aid to control bleeding.
    9. Administer first aid to treat for puncture wounds.
    10. Administer first aid to treat for gunshot wounds.
    11. Administer first aid to treat for amputation/avulsion.
    12. Administer first aid to treat for eye injuries.
    13. Administer first aid for skull, spine, neck, and pelvis injuries.
    14. Administer first aid to treat for broken bones.
    15. Administer rescue breathing.
    16. Administer first aid for choking.
    17. Apply first aid to treat for heart attack.
    18. Administer cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR).
    19. Administer first aid to treat for cold emergencies.
    20. Administer first aid to treat for heat exhaustion.
    21. Administer first aid to treat for heat stroke.
    22. Administer first aid to treat for burns.
    23. Administer first aid to treat for electric shock.
    24. Administer first aid to treat for stroke.
    25. Administer first aid to treat for diabetic reaction.
    26. Administer first aid to treat for seizures.
    27. Administer first aid to treat for poisoning.
    28. Administer first aid to treat for overdose.
    29. Assist in childbirth.
    30. Extricate an injured person trapped in a vehicle or cave-in with fear of fire, etc, using simple tools prior to application of first aid.
    31. Transport injured persons.
    32. Demonstrate proper first aid techniques and skills in a simulated first aid emergency.
    33. Use deadly force legally.
    34. Discuss firearms and ammunition.
    35. Handle firearms safely.
    36. Secure a firearm other than your own.
    37. Make a use-of-force decision in a potentially life-threatening situation.
    38. Manage a post-shooting scene.
    39. Complete post-shooting legal procedures.
    40. Prepare to testify in court related to a shooting incident.
    41. Discharge a firearm at targets other than a person (e.g., injured or vicious animals).
    42. Make appropriate off-duty firearms decisions.
    43. Explain the applicability of federal firearms laws to state and local firearms enforcement.
    44. Discuss controlling violent confrontation as a civilian.
    45. Demonstrate proficiency in basic marksmanship using a handgun and shotgun.
    46. Discharge a firearm in low light levels.
    47. Perform proper care and maintenance for firearms.
    48. Draw a firearm efficiently and safely.
    49. Holster a firearm effectively.
    50. Assess a threat level to self or others to determine if it is life threatening.
    51. Use cover/concealment in a life-threatening situation.
    52. Neutralize all threats to self or others.
    53. Demonstrate proficiency in tactical marksmanship.
    54. Demonstrate proficiency in firearms skills by attaining a passing score on all phases of the mandatory final assessment.
    55. Conduct a frisk or pat down.
    56. Execute the arrest of a person.
    57. Handcuff a suspect or prisoner.
    58. Conduct a field search of arrested persons.
    59. Conduct a custodial search.
    60. Pursue a fleeing suspect on foot.
    61. Break through a door using force.
    62. Use cover and concealment to ensure officer survival.
    63. Use light effectively.
    64. Protect handgun using weapons retention techniques.
    65. Explain the law as it relates to the use of force.
    66. Explain the Michigan law enforcement officer-subject control continuum.
    67. Discuss the relationship between the use of force and the Michigan law enforcement officer-subject control continuum.
    68. Define the decision-making process required to use the appropriate amount of force in gaining control of subject.
    69. Explain the concept of control.
    70. Write a report that documents the officer’s use of force.
    71. Discuss the liability attached when officers use force to control a subject.
    72. Explain the survival mindset.
    73. Define tactical communication.
    74. Discuss fear and anger management.
    75. Demonstrate effective subject control techniques.
    76. Explain post-force incident responsibility.
    77. Demonstrate the ability to manage subject encounters under circumstances that justify varying levels of force.
    78. Explain the legal issues regarding emergency vehicle operations.
    79. Explain liability issues that relate to emergency vehicle operations.
    80. Operate an emergency vehicle in non-emergency circumstances.
    81. Operate an emergency vehicle under emergency conditions.
    82. Engage in a pursuit.
    83. Discuss when to terminate a pursuit.
    84. Engage in post-incident operations.
    85. Demonstrate preparedness for emergency vehicle operations.
    86. Discuss the techniques of emergency vehicle operations in appropriate situations.
    87. Discuss operating an emergency vehicle under adverse environmental conditions.
    88. Operate an emergency vehicle using proper techniques in darkness.
    89. Demonstrate proficiency on the MCOLES emergency vehicle operations course or an MCOLES approved course that exceeds the standard.
    90. Establish physical fitness baseline with goals for improvement.
    91. Determine body fat by using a circumference technique and plots on the fitness profile chart.
    92. Explain the thresholds of training for cardiovascular fitness to improve and/or maintain cardiovascular fitness.
    93. Explain the thresholds of training for flexibility to improve and/or maintain appropriate range of motion.
    94. Discuss the benefits of circuit training and various designs of circuit prototypes.
    95. Explain the thresholds of training for muscle strength to improve and/or maintain muscle strength (absolute strength).
    96. Demonstrate the concept of interval training.
    97. Define polymeric exercise.
    98. Demonstrate fitness skills by participating in a variety of activities in a setting of friendly competition.
    99. Practice the 4-event physical fitness test items to adjust fitness goals for needed improvement.
    100. Discuss the fundamentals of fitness and wellness.
    101. Discuss the benefits of exercise using the exercise guidelines.
    102. Explain the seven major coronary risk factors.
    103. Define stress and its effect on the body and an officer’s performance.
    104. Define the role of basic nutrients and proper diet.
    105. Discuss the balance of energy needed to maintain proper weight through strategies that assist in weight loss and weight control.
    106. Discuss the factors that contribute to lower back pain.
    107. Recognize the factors in exercise adherence and strategies to increase adherence.
    108. Demonstrate close quarter combat tactics and techniques using a handgun.
    109. Demonstrate effective subject control techniques.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the various aspects of traffic control.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain how to use the Michigan Vehicle Code.
    2. Use appropriate words and phrases in the interpretation of the Michigan Vehicle Code.
    3. Identify different classifications of traffic related offenses.
    4. Determine where traffic laws can be enforced.
    5. Identify authority to take enforcement action outside employing jurisdiction.
    6. Identify elements and non-elements of a traffic violation.
    7. Determine if there was a violation of law.
    8. Identify elements relevant to specific traffic offenses.
    9. Conduct a license check for an operator of a motor vehicle.
    10. Determine the status of an operator’s auto insurance.
    11. Check a vehicle for proper registration.
    12. Identify driver and/or vehicle licensing violations.
    13. Monitor traffic for violations.
    14. Visually estimate the speed of vehicles.
    15. Determine the speed of a vehicle by using the pacing technique (i.e., using speedometer).
    16. Follow a suspect vehicle to observe for a traffic violation.
    17. Make a determination about the appropriate action to be taken for a traffic offense.
    18. Identify possible stolen motor vehicles.
    19. Investigate to verify if a vehicle is in fact stolen.
    20. Stop vehicles to investigate traffic violations.
    21. Stop vehicle to investigate possible felony.
    22. Interview driver on a traffic stop.
    23. Inspect vehicles for conformance with the Michigan Vehicle Code.
    24. Participate in roadblocks.
    25. Assist stranded motorists.
    26. Remove an unattended vehicle obstructing traffic.
    27. Determine proper method for directing traffic.
    28. Direct traffic safely.
    29. Explain to a traffic offender state traffic vehicle laws and procedures at a traffic stop.
    30. Issue verbal warnings to traffic violators.
    31. Complete a uniform law citation.
    32. Issue a citation and collect bond (if necessary) for a traffic violation.
    33. Make a custodial traffic arrest when appropriate.
    34. Determine what constitutes an OWI/OUID driving related offense.
    35. Identify those traffic related offenses where alcohol or controlled substances in the blood are admissible.
    36. Identify the elements necessary in order to obtain an OWI conviction.
    37. Determine if an arrest can be made for an OWI related driving offense at the scene of a traffic crash.
    38. Demonstrate knowledge of the implied consent law.
    39. Demonstrate knowledge of case law relevant to OWI.
    40. Establish reasonable suspicion of OWI violation prior to a traffic stop.
    41. Decide if a suspect is in violation of OWI law by checking for behavioral signs of intoxication.
    42. Administer the accepted field sobriety test.
    43. Arrest an OWI suspect using proper field procedures.
    44. Process an OWI/OUID suspect using proper stationhouse procedures.
    45. Process an OWI/OUID refusal suspect using proper stationhouse procedures.
    46. Test blood alcohol content using the evidentiary breath test instrument.
    47. Arrange for obtaining a blood or urine sample for a sobriety test.
    48. Complete an officer’s report of refusal to submit to chemical test form (DI-93) if the suspect refuses a chemical test.
    49. Complete an alcohol influence report form.
    50. Complete a blood, breath, urine test report form.
    51. Complete an OWI uniform law citation.
    52. Complete an OWI arrest report.
    53. Identify the elements of a motor vehicle crash.
    54. Determine if drivers have fulfilled their responsibilities as mandated by law.
    55. Determine whether an officer has authority to take enforcement action for a traffic crash.
    56. Take precautions to prevent additional crashes at traffic crash scene.
    57. Set priorities for action at a traffic crash scene.
    58. Request assistance at a traffic crash scene.
    59. Direct activities at the scene of a traffic crash investigation.
    60. Secure the traffic crash scene to protect evidence.
    61. Determine whether to photograph the traffic crash scene.
    62. Complete the state of Michigan Traffic Crash Report form (UD-l0).
    63. Identify persons involved in a traffic crash.
    64. Identify the owner of a vehicle involved in a traffic crash.
    65. Locate witnesses to a traffic crash.
    66. Interview persons involved in a traffic crash.
    67. Draw field sketch at scene of a traffic crash.
    68. Take measurements at a traffic crash scene for field sketch.
    69. Diagram a traffic crash scene.
    70. Search the traffic crash scene for physical evidence.
    71. Collect and document physical evidence from a traffic crash scene.
    72. Identify point(s) of impact at a traffic crash scene.
    73. Measure skid marks.
    74. Inspect vehicles for fresh damage.
    75. Test the operating condition of a traffic crash vehicle’s equipment.
    76. Demonstrate an understanding of the relationship between types of crashes and the injury/trauma occurring to unrestrained occupants.
    77. Follow up the extent of personal injuries resulting from a traffic crash.
    78. Review the traffic crash with crash investigator(s).
    79. Determine the contributing factors to a traffic crash.
    80. Determine fault in a traffic crash.
    81. Issue a citation(s) in a traffic crash.
    82. Demonstrate an understanding of the theory of RADAD and LIDAR.
    83. Demonstrate the ability to conduct a Standardized Field Sobriety Test.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate competency in special operations.

    Objectives:

    1. Patrol locations on beat that are potentially hazardous to citizens.
    2. Respond to a hazardous material incident safely and properly.
    3. Coordinate actions with public service personnel arriving to assist in an emergency (non-hazardous material) situation.
    4. Evacuate persons from a dangerous area.
    5. Secure accident and disaster scenes.
    6. Demonstrate an understanding of the common characteristics of explosive devices.
    7. Identify explosive devices.
    8. Demonstrate an understanding of the response protocols to a bomb threat.
    9. Respond to a bombing incident.
    10. Respond to labor/management disputes.
    11. Control non-violent crowds.
    12. Patrol areas containing marchers or demonstrators.
    13. Control hostile groups.
    14. Patrol riot-stricken or civil disturbance areas.
    15. Confront groups of agitated people in riot formation.
    16. Perform duties while wearing heavy equipment.
    17. Physically restrain crowds.
    18. Control non-violent crowds.
    19. Control hostile groups.
    20. Control groups of agitated people in riot formation.
    21. Recruit confidential informants.
    22. Conduct surveillance of individuals or locations.
    23. Execute raids.
    24. Respond to a barricaded gunman/hostage situation.
    25. Describe the benefits of understanding Michigan’s environmental laws.
    26. Identify an environmental crime.
    27. Use the Michigan penal code (MCLA/MSA) to identify environmental statutes.
    28. Make an appropriate and safe response when observing a violation of the environmental statutes.
    29. Explain why the best tools in investigating an environmental crime are standard investigative techniques.
    30. Define the purpose and structure of the incident command (ICS) system.
    31. Define the terminology associated with the incident command system.
    32. Describe the major functions of the incident command system.
    33. Describe the role of law enforcement as part of the incident command structure.
    34. Explain the key provisions of Michigan’s emergency management act.
    35. Participate in a classroom-facilitated discussion of a simulated emergency situation.
    36. Discuss the characteristics of modern terrorism.
    37. Identify domestic and international terrorist groups.
    38. Recognize local terrorist targets.
    39. Initiate practical measures for preventing terrorist attacks.
    40. Define terrorist pre-incident indicators.
    41. Recognize the importance of gathering information regarding potential terrorist activities.
    42. Explain the legal implications regarding terrorist activities.
    43. Define weapons of mass destruction (WMD).
    44. Identify the five types of WMD material.
    45. Define the characteristics of chemical agents as weapons of mass destruction.
    46. Define the characteristics of biological agents.
    47. Define the characteristics of nuclear/radiological materials as weapons of mass destruction.
    48. Discuss explosive devices within the context of terrorism awareness.
    49. Respond to a known or unknown WMD attack.
    50. Discuss the basic dynamics and issues involved in a rapid response to an ongoing act of violence.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Sessions and Topic:

    1. Investigation
      1. Introduction to Investigation
      2. Substantive Criminal Law
      3. Criminal Procedure
      4. Investigation
      5. Court Functions and Civil Law
      6. Crime Scene Process
      7. Special Investigations
    2. Patrol Procedures
      1. Patrol Operations
      2. Ethics In Policing and Interpersonal Relations
      3. Patrol Techniques
      4. Report Writing
      5. Juveniles
    3. Detention and Prosecution
      1. Receiving and Booking Process
      2. Case Prosecution
      3. Civil Process
    4. Police Skills
      1. First Aid
      2. Firearms
      3. Police Physical Skills
      4. Fitness and Wellness
      5. Emergency Vehicle Operation
    5. Traffic
      1. Motor Vehicle Law
      2. Vehicle Stops
      3. Traffic Control and Enforcement
      4. Operating While Intoxicated
      5. Motor Vehicle Traffic Crash Investigation
    6. Special Operations
      1. Emergency Preparedness/Disaster Control
      2. Civil Disorders
      3. Tactical Operations
      4. Environmental Crimes
      5. Terrorism Awareness

    Primary Faculty
    Hliebay, Eugene
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Lopez, Michael
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • LAWE 2815 - Basic Police Academy 1

    Credit Hours: 7.00


    Prerequisites: Consent of department; meet admissions standards of MCOLES; at least 18 years of age; valid Michigan driver’s license; no felony convictions; pass MCOLES reading, writing and physical fitness pre-employment tests.

    (replaces but does not equate to LAWE 2810)

    LAWE 2815 is the first of three courses that prepares students in the proper techniques of patrol procedures, criminal investigation, and crime scene process. Emphasis is on conflict resolution, report writing, and detention and prosecution of prisoners. First aid, investigations, evidence collection, disaster control, civil disorders, and tactical operations are also covered. This course meets the state-mandated requirements for preparing students to take the exam for State certifications for entry-level police officers. This course is graded on a pass/fail basis.

    Location: East Campus

    Contact Hours: 372
    Billable Contact Hours: 8
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate competency in investigative techniques.

    Objectives: The student will:
    Describe the features of our criminal justice system and explain how it is built upon constitutional law.

    1. Locate and describe specific provisions of the United States Constitution important to the operation of our form of government.
    2. Describe the Michigan Constitution and its relationship to law enforcement in Michigan and the United States Constitution.
    3. Identify the basic concepts of criminal law.
    4. Research and use the Michigan penal code (MCLA/MSA) to identify crimes against persons.
    5. Identify crimes against persons.
    6. Research and use the Michigan penal code (MCLA/MSA) to identify crimes against property.
    7. Identify crimes against property.
    8. Research and use the Michigan penal code (MCLA/MSA) to identify contraband and regulatory crimes.
    9. Identify contraband and regulatory crimes.
    10. Use the Michigan Penal Code (MCLA/MSA) to identify public order crimes.
    11. Identify public order crimes.
    12. Identify the integral relationship between investigative procedures and admissible evidence in court.
    13. Collect evidence in daily investigative activities applying the laws of evidence as defined by federal and state courts.
    14. Conduct investigations from the initial complaint to presentation of evidence in the courtroom in conformance with the Michigan rules of evidence.
    15. Define and explain juvenile law as it relates to law enforcement.
    16. Define and explain the special provisions in the statutes and court rules for juvenile offenses.
    17. Collect admissions and confessions as evidence, in accordance with federal and state laws regarding admissions and confessions.
    18. Prepare for an interrogation of a suspect.
    19. Advise persons of their constitutional rights.
    20. Instruct a suspect on the process for obtaining an attorney.
    21. Explain the nature of a complaint to a suspect.
    22. Conduct interrogation of a suspect.
    23. Record statements of suspects.
    24. Arrest persons in a lawful manner.
    25. Warn offenders in lieu of arrest or citation.
    26. Plan strategy for making arrests.
    27. Arrest persons with a warrant.
    28. Arrest persons without a warrant.
    29. Take into custody a person detained by citizen.
    30. Transport prisoner.
    31. Conduct searches with a warrant in a lawful manner.
    32. Obtain a search warrant.
    33. Exercise safety precautions when searching.
    34. Search premises or property with a warrant.
    35. Search persons with a warrant.
    36. Conduct searches without a warrant only under court recognized exceptions to the fourth amendment warrant requirement.
    37. Search premises, property, or passenger compartment of a vehicle incident to an arrest.
    38. Search a movable vehicle with probable cause and exigent circumstances.
    39. Search buildings in hot pursuit situations.
    40. Search premises or property with consent.
    41. Conduct corporeal lineups.
    42. Conduct photo lineups.
    43. Conduct a show up (immediate on-scene identification).
    44. Determine whether an incident is a criminal or civil matter.
    45. Handle complaints.
    46. Conduct a preliminary investigation by protecting a crime scene and locating witnesses.
    47. Evaluate information at a preliminary investigation to determine course of action.
    48. Track a person from a scene.
    49. Search for persons using proper techniques.
    50. Locate witnesses to a crime using various methods.
    51. Interview complainants and witnesses.
    52. Take statements of witnesses.
    53. Examine dead body for evidence of unnatural death.
    54. Search dead bodies for identification when death is determined to be natural.
    55. Verify the identity of deceased persons.
    56. Review with medical examiner circumstances relating to a death.
    57. Establish the modus operandi (M.O.) of a suspect.
    58. Analyze and compare incidents for similarity of modus operandi (M.O.).
    59. Utilize department records to assist in investigation.
    60. Review crime lab reports to guide an investigation.
    61. Review records and pictures to identify suspects.
    62. Organize and conduct a corporeal lineup.
    63. Organize and conduct photo lineups.
    64. Conduct a show up.
    65. Explain the civil law necessary for effective functioning as a law enforcement officer.
    66. Explain the court system at a level necessary for effective functioning as a law enforcement officer.
    67. Define legal terms and discuss issues related to the court system at a level necessary for effective functioning as a law enforcement officer.
    68. Explain legal processes of the court at a level necessary for effective functioning as a law enforcement officer.
    69. Plan strategy for a search.
    70. Search a crime scene for physical evidence.
    71. Diagram location of physical evidence at crime scene.
    72. Process a diagram of a crime scene as evidence.
    73. Photograph crime scenes.
    74. Collect information and evidence at scene of a preliminary investigation.
    75. Collect evidence and personal property from a crime scene.
    76. Cast impressions.
    77. Locate and evaluate latent fingerprints.
    78. Tag evidence and confiscated properties.
    79. Package evidence or personal property.
    80. Transport property or evidence.
    81. Document the chain of custody for evidence.
    82. Witness autopsies.
    83. Process impounded property.
    84. Determine if recovered property is linked with a previous crime.
    85. Trace stolen goods.
    86. Recover and inventory stolen property.
    87. Define the provisions of the child protection law.
    88. Recognize suspected cases of child abuse while responding to complaints related to and not related to child abuse.
    89. Investigate cases of suspected child abuse or neglect.
    90. Take child into protective custody.
    91. Define the criminal sexual conduct laws.
    92. Respond to a complaint of sexual assault.
    93. Investigate a complaint of a sexual assault.
    94. Define the controlled substances provisions of the public health code.
    95. Investigate violations of the controlled substances provisions of the public health code commonly encountered by the working patrol officer.
    96. Explain the historical context and changes in society’s understanding of domestic violence.
    97. Discuss the nature of domestic violence.
    98. Explain the behaviors used by domestic violent assailants.
    99. Classify assailant behavior officers might encounter at the domestic violence scene.
    100. Discuss victim behaviors officers might encounter at the scene of domestic violence.
    101. Explain the consequences victims may face as they consider leaving the assailants.
    102. Explain the consequences victims may face when participating in the criminal justice system.
    103. Define indicators that can assist officers in assessing when an assailant might kill.
    104. Explain why domestic violence is a law enforcement issue.
    105. Define substantive criminal law as it relates to domestic violence.
    106. Explain the options available to the court in sentencing and adjudication in domestic violence cases.
    107. Define the crime of stalking.
    108. Define the crime of aggravated stalking.
    109. Define the authority of a police officer in enforcing domestic violence laws.
    110. Explain a domestic relationship personal protection order.
    111. Explain a non-domestic stalking personal protection order.
    112. Explain court procedures related to personal protection orders.
    113. Explain enforcement of domestic relationship and non- domestic stalking personal protection orders.
    114. Discuss a personal protection order’s effect on firearm purchase or possession.
    115. Define probable cause (reasonable cause) as it relates to domestic violence.
    116. Explain procedural requirements in responding to a domestic violence incident.
    117. Respond to the scene of domestic violence.
    118. Make initial contact at the scene of domestic violence.
    119. Conduct a preliminary criminal investigation upon entry to the scene.
    120. Interview the suspected assailant as part of the complete criminal investigation at a domestic violence scene.
    121. Interview the victim as part of the complete criminal investigation at a domestic violence scene.
    122. Determine whether probable cause exists to make an arrest when responding to domestic violence.
    123. Arrest a domestic violence assailant after establishing probable cause that a crime has been committed.
    124. Arrest the assailant after establishing that a personal protection order (PPO) has been violated.
    125. Arrest a domestic violence assailant after establishing that a conditional release order (conditional bond) has been violated.
    126. Complete the criminal investigation at the domestic violence scene.
    127. Provide appropriate assistance to the domestic violence victim when an arrest has been made.
    128. Secure a domestic violence scene when an arrest cannot be made.
    129. Write a domestic violence report documenting the domestic violence investigation.
    130. Secure digital media evidence.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate competency in patrol procedures.

    Objectives:

    1. Inspect patrol vehicle for weapons and contraband.
    2. Prepare for patrol by becoming familiar with area.
    3. Use the LEIN system to support patrol and investigative operations.
    4. Receive and evaluate telephone requests for police service.
    5. Use police radio to communicate with dispatcher, LEIN operator, and other officers.
    6. Inform the dispatcher of status and needs.
    7. Take custody of lost and found property.
    8. Verify vehicle title information.
    9. Discuss the relationship between the police officer and the public in our form of government.
    10. Discuss the role of ethics in performing the duties of a police officer.
    11. Discuss the role of ethics in the relationship between the police officer, the organization, and the public.
    12. Discuss how ethical behavior promotes professionalism.
    13. Discuss the relationship between the use of discretion and ethical behavior as it applies to the enforcement of laws.
    14. Explain how behavior could result in compromising an officer’s credibility, public trust, and/or employment status.
    15. Describe some methods that will assist in making ethical decisions.
    16. Explain Title VII of the 1964 Civil Rights Act (18 USC 242).
    17. Identify the key elements of Michigan’s Elliott-Larsen Civil Rights Act (MCL 37.2103).
    18. Explain Title II of the Americans With Disabilities Act.
    19. Explain Michigan Handicapper’s Civil Rights Act (MHCRA) (MCL 37.1101).
    20. Explain Michigan’s Ethnic Intimidation Statute (MCL 750.147b; MSA 28.344 (2)).
    21. Describe the benefits of understanding diverse cultures that make up the officer’s living and working environment.
    22. Define a multi-cultural society.
    23. Discuss the basic nature of culture.
    24. Define stereotyping.
    25. Define the characteristics of prejudice.
    26. Discuss how prejudice influences behavior.
    27. Improve communication with community members by acknowledging cultural traits and values.
    28. Communicate across cultures effectively.
    29. Discuss barriers to cross-cultural communication.
    30. Interact in a non-prejudiced manner with co-workers and supervisors within the law enforcement organization.
    31. Explain the law regarding sexual harassment.
    32. Discuss causes of sexual harassment.
    33. Discuss costs associated with sexual harassment.
    34. Explain the responsibility assumed in preventing harassment.
    35. Explain the importance of effective communication in policing.
    36. Define the basics of communication.
    37. Apply techniques that will enhance listening skills.
    38. Identify verbal and non-verbal behavior that indicates potential hostility.
    39. Discuss methods for conflict resolution.
    40. Identify situations that are likely to cause severe stress or crisis for citizens.
    41. Describe the mental states that persons in crisis may exhibit.
    42. Discuss techniques used to communicate with persons in crisis.
    43. Discuss techniques used to communicate with deaf or hard of hearing persons.
    44. Deliver emergency messages (e.g., injuries, death).
    45. Establish rapport with people while on patrol approach the scene of a civil dispute.
    46. Manage a civil dispute.
    47. Resolve a civil dispute.
    48. Define the nature of victimization.
    49. Identify situations that are likely to cause severe stress or crisis for crime victims.
    50. Describe the mental stages that persons in severe crisis may experience.
    51. Advise victims of their rights under the Crime Victims’ Rights Act.
    52. Discuss an appropriate law enforcement response to the victims of crime.
    53. Define the role of the victim advocate.
    54. Deliver death notifications.
    55. Explain how to patrol in a vehicle using a variety of techniques.
    56. Patrol on foot.
    57. Patrol on bicycle.
    58. Check parks and school grounds.
    59. Search unlocked businesses and dwellings for signs of illegal entry.
    60. Secure buildings.
    61. Check individuals/businesses for compliance with licensing requirements.
    62. Advise property owners or agents of potentially hazardous conditions.
    63. Notify citizens of damage to their property.
    64. Secure vehicles.
    65. Investigate an unattended suspicious vehicle.
    66. Follow a suspicious vehicle.
    67. Investigate unusual odors and sounds.
    68. Identify wanted vehicles or persons.
    69. Interview suspicious persons.
    70. Participate in large scale area search parties.
    71. Escort money, valuables, or people to provide security.
    72. Develop informants using field contacts.
    73. Respond to crimes in progress.
    74. Conduct an initial investigation at a “crime in progress” scene.
    75. Secure “crime in progress” scene and begin an investigation.
    76. Direct actions of other officers at a scene of action.
    77. Advise victims of the procedures for prosecution.
    78. Discuss the law regarding the handling of abnormal persons.
    79. Recognize the signs and symptoms that may be indicative of mentally ill persons.
    80. Approach and handle a suspected mentally disturbed person.
    81. Transport the mentally disturbed subject using proper procedures.
    82. Take field notes.
    83. Obtain information for police report.
    84. Organize information for police report.
    85. Complete incident reports.
    86. Prepare narrative reports.
    87. Write summaries of witness and complainant interviews.
    88. Prepare a criminal case summary for prosecutor.
    89. Apprehend juvenile offenders.
    90. Detain and transport juvenile offenders.
    91. Notify parents/guardians and/or proper authorities of a juvenile apprehension.
    92. Inform juvenile offender of Miranda rights before interrogation.
    93. Counsel juveniles.
    94. Conduct parent-juvenile interview(s).
    95. Determine the course of action following parent/juvenile conference.
    96. Inform parent(s)/guardian of the status of the juvenile offender’s case at time of release.
    97. Confer with juvenile probation officer.
    98. Demonstrate competency in report writing.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate competency in detention and prosecution.

    Objectives:

    1. Conduct a custodial search.
    2. Explain the purpose and value of taking acceptable fingerprint and palm print impressions.
    3. Explain the methods used to obtain fingerprints and palm prints.
    4. Take fingerprints and palm pints during a classroom practical exercise.
    5. Provide proper care and treatment to prisoners.
    6. Investigate injuries to prisoners.
    7. Guard prisoners detained outside of a jail.
    8. Advise adult defendant or family regarding an arrest/detention.
    9. Identify proper court for case prosecution.
    10. Prepare request for warrant authorization.
    11. Confer with prosecutor or city attorney regarding warrant authorization.
    12. Review warrants for completeness and accuracy.
    13. Swear out complaints or warrants.
    14. Prepare to arraign a defendant.
    15. Arraign a defendant in court.
    16. Verify reliability and credibility of witnesses.
    17. Review a case with the prosecutor or city attorney to plan preparation of case.
    18. Check that witnesses are ready for court testimony.
    19. Prepare for testifying in a legal proceeding.
    20. Explain the proper demeanor prior to testifying in a legal proceeding.
    21. Present testimony in a legal proceeding.
    22. Review a case with prosecutors or city attorneys following a legal proceeding.
    23. Determine validity of civil process.
    24. Enforce a court issued order (e.g., writs).
    25. Serve probate orders (e.g., persons requiring treatment, juveniles, adult offenders).

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the required skills of a police officer.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the law and responsibilities related to a law enforcement officer administering first aid.
    2. Conduct a scene assessment.
    3. Demonstrate a working knowledge of the control and spread of blood borne pathogens.
    4. Control emotions at first aid scene.
    5. Conduct a patient survey to assess a victim’s medical status.
    6. Recognize normal body signs in order to be able to determine when abnormal signs are present.
    7. Administer first aid to treat for shock.
    8. Administer first aid to control bleeding.
    9. Administer first aid to treat for puncture wounds.
    10. Administer first aid to treat for gunshot wounds.
    11. Administer first aid to treat for amputation/avulsion.
    12. Administer first aid to treat for eye injuries.
    13. Administer first aid for skull, spine, neck, and pelvis injuries.
    14. Administer first aid to treat for broken bones.
    15. Administer rescue breathing.
    16. Administer first aid for choking.
    17. Apply first aid to treat for heart attack.
    18. Administer cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR).
    19. Administer first aid to treat for cold emergencies.
    20. Administer first aid to treat for heat exhaustion.
    21. Administer first aid to treat for heat stroke.
    22. Administer first aid to treat for burns.
    23. Administer first aid to treat for electric shock.
    24. Administer first aid to treat for stroke.
    25. Administer first aid to treat for diabetic reaction.
    26. Administer first aid to treat for seizures.
    27. Administer first aid to treat for poisoning.
    28. Administer first aid to treat for overdose.
    29. Assist in childbirth.
    30. Extricate an injured person trapped in a vehicle or cave-in with fear of fire, etc, using simple tools prior to application of first aid.
    31. Transport injured persons.
    32. Demonstrate proper first aid techniques and skills in a simulated first aid emergency.
    33. Use deadly force legally.
    34. Discuss firearms and ammunition.
    35. Handle firearms safely.
    36. Secure a firearm other than your own.
    37. Make a use-of-force decision in a potentially life-threatening situation.
    38. Manage a post-shooting scene.
    39. Complete post-shooting legal procedures.
    40. Prepare to testify in court related to a shooting incident.
    41. Discharge a firearm at targets other than a person (e.g., injured or vicious animals).
    42. Make appropriate off-duty firearms decisions.
    43. Explain the applicability of federal firearms laws to state and local firearms enforcement.
    44. Discuss controlling violent confrontation as a civilian.
    45. Demonstrate proficiency in basic marksmanship using a handgun and shotgun.
    46. Discharge a firearm in low light levels.
    47. Perform proper care and maintenance for firearms.
    48. Draw a firearm efficiently and safely.
    49. Holster a firearm effectively.
    50. Assess a threat level to self or others to determine if it is life threatening.
    51. Use cover/concealment in a life-threatening situation.
    52. Neutralize all threats to self or others.
    53. Demonstrate proficiency in tactical marksmanship.
    54. Demonstrate proficiency in firearms skills by attaining a passing score on all phases of the mandatory final assessment.
    55. Conduct a frisk or pat down.
    56. Execute the arrest of a person.
    57. Handcuff a suspect or prisoner.
    58. Conduct a field search of arrested persons.
    59. Conduct a custodial search.
    60. Pursue a fleeing suspect on foot.
    61. Break through a door using force.
    62. Use cover and concealment to ensure officer survival.
    63. Use light effectively.
    64. Protect handgun using weapons retention techniques.
    65. Explain the law as it relates to the use of force.
    66. Explain the Michigan law enforcement officer-subject control continuum.
    67. Discuss the relationship between the use of force and the Michigan law enforcement officer-subject control continuum.
    68. Define the decision-making process required to use the appropriate amount of force in gaining control of subject.
    69. Explain the concept of control.
    70. Write a report that documents the officer’s use of force.
    71. Discuss the liability attached when officers use force to control a subject.
    72. Explain the survival mindset.
    73. Define tactical communication.
    74. Discuss fear and anger management.
    75. Demonstrate effective subject control techniques.
    76. Explain post-force incident responsibility.
    77. Demonstrate the ability to manage subject encounters under circumstances that justify varying levels of force.
    78. Explain the legal issues regarding emergency vehicle operations.
    79. Explain liability issues that relate to emergency vehicle operations.
    80. Operate an emergency vehicle in non-emergency circumstances.
    81. Operate an emergency vehicle under emergency conditions.
    82. Engage in a pursuit.
    83. Discuss when to terminate a pursuit.
    84. Engage in post-incident operations.
    85. Demonstrate preparedness for emergency vehicle operations.
    86. Discuss the techniques of emergency vehicle operations in appropriate situations.
    87. Discuss operating an emergency vehicle under adverse environmental conditions.
    88. Operate an emergency vehicle using proper techniques in darkness.
    89. Demonstrate proficiency on the MCOLES emergency vehicle operations course or an MCOLES approved course that exceeds the standard.
    90. Establish physical fitness baseline with goals for improvement.
    91. Determine body fat by using a circumference technique and plots on the fitness profile chart.
    92. Explain the thresholds of training for cardiovascular fitness to improve and/or maintain cardiovascular fitness.
    93. Explain the thresholds of training for flexibility to improve and/or maintain appropriate range of motion.
    94. Discuss the benefits of circuit training and various designs of circuit prototypes.
    95. Explain the thresholds of training for muscle strength to improve and/or maintain muscle strength (absolute strength).
    96. Demonstrate the concept of interval training.
    97. Define polymeric exercise.
    98. Demonstrate fitness skills by participating in a variety of activities in a setting of friendly competition.
    99. Practice the 4-event physical fitness test items to adjust fitness goals for needed improvement.
    100. Discuss the fundamentals of fitness and wellness.
    101. Discuss the benefits of exercise using the exercise guidelines.
    102. Explain the seven major coronary risk factors.
    103. Define stress and its effect on the body and an officer’s performance.
    104. Define the role of basic nutrients and proper diet.
    105. Discuss the balance of energy needed to maintain proper weight through strategies that assist in weight loss and weight control.
    106. Discuss the factors that contribute to lower back pain.
    107. Recognize the factors in exercise adherence and strategies to increase adherence.
    108. Demonstrate close quarter combat tactics and techniques using a handgun.
    109. Demonstrate effective subject control techniques.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the various aspects of traffic control.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain how to use the Michigan Vehicle Code.
    2. Use appropriate words and phrases in the interpretation of the Michigan Vehicle Code.
    3. Identify different classifications of traffic related offenses.
    4. Determine where traffic laws can be enforced.
    5. Identify authority to take enforcement action outside employing jurisdiction.
    6. Identify elements and non-elements of a traffic violation.
    7. Determine if there was a violation of law.
    8. Identify elements relevant to specific traffic offenses.
    9. Conduct a license check for an operator of a motor vehicle.
    10. Determine the status of an operator’s auto insurance.
    11. Check a vehicle for proper registration.
    12. Identify driver and/or vehicle licensing violations.
    13. Monitor traffic for violations.
    14. Visually estimate the speed of vehicles.
    15. Determine the speed of a vehicle by using the pacing technique (i.e., using speedometer).
    16. Follow a suspect vehicle to observe for a traffic violation.
    17. Make a determination about the appropriate action to be taken for a traffic offense.
    18. Identify possible stolen motor vehicles.
    19. Investigate to verify if a vehicle is in fact stolen.
    20. Stop vehicles to investigate traffic violations.
    21. Stop vehicle to investigate possible felony.
    22. Interview driver on a traffic stop.
    23. Inspect vehicles for conformance with the Michigan Vehicle Code.
    24. Participate in roadblocks.
    25. Assist stranded motorists.
    26. Remove an unattended vehicle obstructing traffic.
    27. Determine proper method for directing traffic.
    28. Direct traffic safely.
    29. Explain to a traffic offender state traffic vehicle laws and procedures at a traffic stop.
    30. Issue verbal warnings to traffic violators.
    31. Complete a uniform law citation.
    32. Issue a citation and collect bond (if necessary) for a traffic violation.
    33. Make a custodial traffic arrest when appropriate.
    34. Determine what constitutes an OWI/OUID driving related offense.
    35. Identify those traffic related offenses where alcohol or controlled substances in the blood are admissible.
    36. Identify the elements necessary in order to obtain an OWI conviction.
    37. Determine if an arrest can be made for an OWI related driving offense at the scene of a traffic crash.
    38. Demonstrate knowledge of the implied consent law.
    39. Demonstrate knowledge of case law relevant to OWI.
    40. Establish reasonable suspicion of OWI violation prior to a traffic stop.
    41. Decide if a suspect is in violation of OWI law by checking for behavioral signs of intoxication.
    42. Administer the accepted field sobriety test.
    43. Arrest an OWI suspect using proper field procedures.
    44. Process an OWI/OUID suspect using proper stationhouse procedures.
    45. Process an OWI/OUID refusal suspect using proper stationhouse procedures.
    46. Test blood alcohol content using the evidentiary breath test instrument.
    47. Arrange for obtaining a blood or urine sample for a sobriety test.
    48. Complete an officer’s report of refusal to submit to chemical test form (DI-93) if the suspect refuses a chemical test.
    49. Complete an alcohol influence report form.
    50. Complete a blood, breath, urine test report form.
    51. Complete an OWI uniform law citation.
    52. Complete an OWI arrest report.
    53. Identify the elements of a motor vehicle crash.
    54. Determine if drivers have fulfilled their responsibilities as mandated by law.
    55. Determine whether an officer has authority to take enforcement action for a traffic crash.
    56. Take precautions to prevent additional crashes at traffic crash scene.
    57. Set priorities for action at a traffic crash scene.
    58. Request assistance at a traffic crash scene.
    59. Direct activities at the scene of a traffic crash investigation.
    60. Secure the traffic crash scene to protect evidence.
    61. Determine whether to photograph the traffic crash scene.
    62. Complete the state of Michigan Traffic Crash Report form (UD-l0).
    63. Identify persons involved in a traffic crash.
    64. Identify the owner of a vehicle involved in a traffic crash.
    65. Locate witnesses to a traffic crash.
    66. Interview persons involved in a traffic crash.
    67. Draw field sketch at scene of a traffic crash.
    68. Take measurements at a traffic crash scene for field sketch.
    69. Diagram a traffic crash scene.
    70. Search the traffic crash scene for physical evidence.
    71. Collect and document physical evidence from a traffic crash scene.
    72. Identify point(s) of impact at a traffic crash scene.
    73. Measure skid marks.
    74. Inspect vehicles for fresh damage.
    75. Test the operating condition of a traffic crash vehicle’s equipment.
    76. Demonstrate an understanding of the relationship between types of crashes and the injury/trauma occurring to unrestrained occupants.
    77. Follow up the extent of personal injuries resulting from a traffic crash.
    78. Review the traffic crash with crash investigator(s).
    79. Determine the contributing factors to a traffic crash.
    80. Determine fault in a traffic crash.
    81. Issue a citation(s) in a traffic crash.
    82. Demonstrate an understanding of the theory of RADAD and LIDAR.
    83. Demonstrate the ability to conduct a Standardized Field Sobriety Test.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate competency in special operations.

    Objectives:

    1. Patrol locations on beat that are potentially hazardous to citizens.
    2. Respond to a hazardous material incident safely and properly.
    3. Coordinate actions with public service personnel arriving to assist in an emergency (non-hazardous material) situation.
    4. Evacuate persons from a dangerous area.
    5. Secure accident and disaster scenes.
    6. Demonstrate an understanding of the common characteristics of explosive devices.
    7. Identify explosive devices.
    8. Demonstrate an understanding of the response protocols to a bomb threat.
    9. Respond to a bombing incident.
    10. Respond to labor/management disputes.
    11. Control non-violent crowds.
    12. Patrol areas containing marchers or demonstrators.
    13. Control hostile groups.
    14. Patrol riot-stricken or civil disturbance areas.
    15. Confront groups of agitated people in riot formation.
    16. Perform duties while wearing heavy equipment.
    17. Physically restrain crowds.
    18. Control non-violent crowds.
    19. Control hostile groups.
    20. Control groups of agitated people in riot formation.
    21. Recruit confidential informants.
    22. Conduct surveillance of individuals or locations.
    23. Execute raids.
    24. Respond to a barricaded gunman/hostage situation.
    25. Describe the benefits of understanding Michigan’s environmental laws.
    26. Identify an environmental crime.
    27. Use the Michigan penal code (MCLA/MSA) to identify environmental statutes.
    28. Make an appropriate and safe response when observing a violation of the environmental statutes.
    29. Explain why the best tools in investigating an environmental crime are standard investigative techniques.
    30. Define the purpose and structure of the incident command (ICS) system.
    31. Define the terminology associated with the incident command system.
    32. Describe the major functions of the incident command system.
    33. Describe the role of law enforcement as part of the incident command structure.
    34. Explain the key provisions of Michigan’s emergency management act.
    35. Participate in a classroom-facilitated discussion of a simulated emergency situation.
    36. Discuss the characteristics of modern terrorism.
    37. Identify domestic and international terrorist groups.
    38. Recognize local terrorist targets.
    39. Initiate practical measures for preventing terrorist attacks.
    40. Define terrorist pre-incident indicators.
    41. Recognize the importance of gathering information regarding potential terrorist activities.
    42. Explain the legal implications regarding terrorist activities.
    43. Define weapons of mass destruction (WMD).
    44. Identify the five types of WMD material.
    45. Define the characteristics of chemical agents as weapons of mass destruction.
    46. Define the characteristics of biological agents.
    47. Define the characteristics of nuclear/radiological materials as weapons of mass destruction.
    48. Discuss explosive devices within the context of terrorism awareness.
    49. Respond to a known or unknown WMD attack.
    50. Discuss the basic dynamics and issues involved in a rapid response to an ongoing act of violence.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Sessions and Topic:

    1. Investigation
      1. Introduction to Investigation
      2. Substantive Criminal Law
      3. Criminal Procedure
      4. Investigation
      5. Court Functions and Civil Law
      6. Crime Scene Process
      7. Special Investigations
    2. Patrol Procedures
      1. Patrol Operations
      2. Ethics In Policing and Interpersonal Relations
      3. Patrol Techniques
      4. Report Writing
      5. Juveniles
    3. Detention and Prosecution
      1. Receiving and Booking Process
      2. Case Prosecution
      3. Civil Process
    4. Police Skills
      1. First Aid
      2. Firearms
      3. Police Physical Skills
      4. Fitness and Wellness
      5. Emergency Vehicle Operation
    5. Traffic
      1. Motor Vehicle Law
      2. Vehicle Stops
      3. Traffic Control and Enforcement
      4. Operating While Intoxicated
      5. Motor Vehicle Traffic Crash Investigation
    6. Special Operations
      1. Emergency Preparedness/Disaster Control
      2. Civil Disorders
      3. Tactical Operations
      4. Environmental Crimes
      5. Terrorism Awareness

    Primary Faculty
    Hliebay, Eugene
    Secondary Faculty
    Hliebay, Eugene
    Associate Dean
    Lopez, Michael
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • LAWE 2816 - Basic Police Academy 2

    Credit Hours: 7.00


    Prerequisites: LAWE 2815 and Consent of department; meet admissions standards of MCOLES; at least 18 years of age; valid Michigan driver’s license; no felony convictions; pass MCOLES reading, writing and physical fitness pre-employment tests.

    (replaces but does not equate to LAWE 2810)

    LAWE 2816 is the second of three courses that prepares students in the proper techniques of patrol procedures, criminal investigation, and crime scene process. Emphasis is on conflict resolution, report writing, and detention and prosecution of prisoners. First aid, investigations, evidence collection, disaster control, civil disorders, and tactical operations are also covered. This course meets the state-mandated requirements for preparing students to take the exam for State certifications for entry-level police officers. This course is graded on a pass/fail basis.

    Location: East Campus

    Contact Hours: 372
    Billable Contact Hours: 8
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate competency in investigative techniques.
     
    Objectives: The student will:
    Describe the features of our criminal justice system and explain how it is built upon constitutional law.

    1. Locate and describe specific provisions of the United States Constitution important to the operation of our form of government.
    2. Describe the Michigan Constitution and its relationship to law enforcement in Michigan and the United States Constitution.
    3. Identify the basic concepts of criminal law.
    4. Research and use the Michigan penal code (MCLA/MSA) to identify crimes against persons.
    5. Identify crimes against persons.
    6. Research and use the Michigan penal code (MCLA/MSA) to identify crimes against property.
    7. Identify crimes against property.
    8. Research and use the Michigan penal code (MCLA/MSA) to identify contraband and regulatory crimes.
    9. Identify contraband and regulatory crimes.
    10. Use the Michigan Penal Code (MCLA/MSA) to identify public order crimes.
    11. Identify public order crimes.
    12. Identify the integral relationship between investigative procedures and admissible evidence in court.
    13. Collect evidence in daily investigative activities applying the laws of evidence as defined by federal and state courts.
    14. Conduct investigations from the initial complaint to presentation of evidence in the courtroom in conformance with the Michigan rules of evidence.
    15. Define and explain juvenile law as it relates to law enforcement.
    16. Define and explain the special provisions in the statutes and court rules for juvenile offenses.
    17. Collect admissions and confessions as evidence, in accordance with federal and state laws regarding admissions and confessions.
    18. Prepare for an interrogation of a suspect.
    19. Advise persons of their constitutional rights.
    20. Instruct a suspect on the process for obtaining an attorney.
    21. Explain the nature of a complaint to a suspect.
    22. Conduct interrogation of a suspect.
    23. Record statements of suspects.
    24. Arrest persons in a lawful manner.
    25. Warn offenders in lieu of arrest or citation.
    26. Plan strategy for making arrests.
    27. Arrest persons with a warrant.
    28. Arrest persons without a warrant.
    29. Take into custody a person detained by citizen.
    30. Transport prisoner.
    31. Conduct searches with a warrant in a lawful manner.
    32. Obtain a search warrant.
    33. Exercise safety precautions when searching.
    34. Search premises or property with a warrant.
    35. Search persons with a warrant.
    36. Conduct searches without a warrant only under court recognized exceptions to the fourth amendment warrant requirement.
    37. Search premises, property, or passenger compartment of a vehicle incident to an arrest.
    38. Search a movable vehicle with probable cause and exigent circumstances.
    39. Search buildings in hot pursuit situations.
    40. Search premises or property with consent.
    41. Conduct corporeal lineups.
    42. Conduct photo lineups.
    43. Conduct a show up (immediate on-scene identification).
    44. Determine whether an incident is a criminal or civil matter.
    45. Handle complaints.
    46. Conduct a preliminary investigation by protecting a crime scene and locating witnesses.
    47. Evaluate information at a preliminary investigation to determine course of action.
    48. Track a person from a scene.
    49. Search for persons using proper techniques.
    50. Locate witnesses to a crime using various methods.
    51. Interview complainants and witnesses.
    52. Take statements of witnesses.
    53. Examine dead body for evidence of unnatural death.
    54. Search dead bodies for identification when death is determined to be natural.
    55. Verify the identity of deceased persons.
    56. Review with medical examiner circumstances relating to a death.
    57. Establish the modus operandi (M.O.) of a suspect.
    58. Analyze and compare incidents for similarity of modus operandi (M.O.).
    59. Utilize department records to assist in investigation.
    60. Review crime lab reports to guide an investigation.
    61. Review records and pictures to identify suspects.
    62. Organize and conduct a corporeal lineup.
    63. Organize and conduct photo lineups.
    64. Conduct a show up.
    65. Explain the civil law necessary for effective functioning as a law enforcement officer.
    66. Explain the court system at a level necessary for effective functioning as a law enforcement officer.
    67. Define legal terms and discuss issues related to the court system at a level necessary for effective functioning as a law enforcement officer.
    68. Explain legal processes of the court at a level necessary for effective functioning as a law enforcement officer.
    69. Plan strategy for a search.
    70. Search a crime scene for physical evidence.
    71. Diagram location of physical evidence at crime scene.
    72. Process a diagram of a crime scene as evidence.
    73. Photograph crime scenes.
    74. Collect information and evidence at scene of a preliminary investigation.
    75. Collect evidence and personal property from a crime scene.
    76. Cast impressions.
    77. Locate and evaluate latent fingerprints.
    78. Tag evidence and confiscated properties.
    79. Package evidence or personal property.
    80. Transport property or evidence.
    81. Document the chain of custody for evidence.
    82. Witness autopsies.
    83. Process impounded property.
    84. Determine if recovered property is linked with a previous crime.
    85. Trace stolen goods.
    86. Recover and inventory stolen property.
    87. Define the provisions of the child protection law.
    88. Recognize suspected cases of child abuse while responding to complaints related to and not related to child abuse.
    89. Investigate cases of suspected child abuse or neglect.
    90. Take child into protective custody.
    91. Define the criminal sexual conduct laws.
    92. Respond to a complaint of sexual assault.
    93. Investigate a complaint of a sexual assault.
    94. Define the controlled substances provisions of the public health code.
    95. Investigate violations of the controlled substances provisions of the public health code commonly encountered by the working patrol officer.
    96. Explain the historical context and changes in society’s understanding of domestic violence.
    97. Discuss the nature of domestic violence.
    98. Explain the behaviors used by domestic violent assailants.
    99. Classify assailant behavior officers might encounter at the domestic violence scene.
    100. Discuss victim behaviors officers might encounter at the scene of domestic violence.
    101. Explain the consequences victims may face as they consider leaving the assailants.
    102. Explain the consequences victims may face when participating in the criminal justice system.
    103. Define indicators that can assist officers in assessing when an assailant might kill.
    104. Explain why domestic violence is a law enforcement issue.
    105. Define substantive criminal law as it relates to domestic violence.
    106. Explain the options available to the court in sentencing and adjudication in domestic violence cases.
    107. Define the crime of stalking.
    108. Define the crime of aggravated stalking.
    109. Define the authority of a police officer in enforcing domestic violence laws.
    110. Explain a domestic relationship personal protection order.
    111. Explain a non-domestic stalking personal protection order.
    112. Explain court procedures related to personal protection orders.
    113. Explain enforcement of domestic relationship and non- domestic stalking personal protection orders.
    114. Discuss a personal protection order’s effect on firearm purchase or possession.
    115. Define probable cause (reasonable cause) as it relates to domestic violence.
    116. Explain procedural requirements in responding to a domestic violence incident.
    117. Respond to the scene of domestic violence.
    118. Make initial contact at the scene of domestic violence.
    119. Conduct a preliminary criminal investigation upon entry to the scene.
    120. Interview the suspected assailant as part of the complete criminal investigation at a domestic violence scene.
    121. Interview the victim as part of the complete criminal investigation at a domestic violence scene.
    122. Determine whether probable cause exists to make an arrest when responding to domestic violence.
    123. Arrest a domestic violence assailant after establishing probable cause that a crime has been committed.
    124. Arrest the assailant after establishing that a personal protection order (PPO) has been violated.
    125. Arrest a domestic violence assailant after establishing that a conditional release order (conditional bond) has been violated.
    126. Complete the criminal investigation at the domestic violence scene.
    127. Provide appropriate assistance to the domestic violence victim when an arrest has been made.
    128. Secure a domestic violence scene when an arrest cannot be made.
    129. Write a domestic violence report documenting the domestic violence investigation.
    130. Secure digital media evidence.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate competency in patrol procedures.

    Objectives:

    1. Inspect patrol vehicle for weapons and contraband.
    2. Prepare for patrol by becoming familiar with area.
    3. Use the LEIN system to support patrol and investigative operations.
    4. Receive and evaluate telephone requests for police service.
    5. Use police radio to communicate with dispatcher, LEIN operator, and other officers.
    6. Inform the dispatcher of status and needs.
    7. Take custody of lost and found property.
    8. Verify vehicle title information.
    9. Discuss the relationship between the police officer and the public in our form of government.
    10. Discuss the role of ethics in performing the duties of a police officer.
    11. Discuss the role of ethics in the relationship between the police officer, the organization, and the public.
    12. Discuss how ethical behavior promotes professionalism.
    13. Discuss the relationship between the use of discretion and ethical behavior as it applies to the enforcement of laws.
    14. Explain how behavior could result in compromising an officer’s credibility, public trust, and/or employment status.
    15. Describe some methods that will assist in making ethical decisions.
    16. Explain Title VII of the 1964 Civil Rights Act (18 USC 242).
    17. Identify the key elements of Michigan’s Elliott-Larsen Civil Rights Act (MCL 37.2103).
    18. Explain Title II of the Americans With Disabilities Act.
    19. Explain Michigan Handicapper’s Civil Rights Act (MHCRA) (MCL 37.1101).
    20. Explain Michigan’s Ethnic Intimidation Statute (MCL 750.147b; MSA 28.344 (2)).
    21. Describe the benefits of understanding diverse cultures that make up the officer’s living and working environment.
    22. Define a multi-cultural society.
    23. Discuss the basic nature of culture.
    24. Define stereotyping.
    25. Define the characteristics of prejudice.
    26. Discuss how prejudice influences behavior.
    27. Improve communication with community members by acknowledging cultural traits and values.
    28. Communicate across cultures effectively.
    29. Discuss barriers to cross-cultural communication.
    30. Interact in a non-prejudiced manner with co-workers and supervisors within the law enforcement organization.
    31. Explain the law regarding sexual harassment.
    32. Discuss causes of sexual harassment.
    33. Discuss costs associated with sexual harassment.
    34. Explain the responsibility assumed in preventing harassment.
    35. Explain the importance of effective communication in policing.
    36. Define the basics of communication.
    37. Apply techniques that will enhance listening skills.
    38. Identify verbal and non-verbal behavior that indicates potential hostility.
    39. Discuss methods for conflict resolution.
    40. Identify situations that are likely to cause severe stress or crisis for citizens.
    41. Describe the mental states that persons in crisis may exhibit.
    42. Discuss techniques used to communicate with persons in crisis.
    43. Discuss techniques used to communicate with deaf or hard of hearing persons.
    44. Deliver emergency messages (e.g., injuries, death).
    45. Establish rapport with people while on patrol approach the scene of a civil dispute.
    46. Manage a civil dispute.
    47. Resolve a civil dispute.
    48. Define the nature of victimization.
    49. Identify situations that are likely to cause severe stress or crisis for crime victims.
    50. Describe the mental stages that persons in severe crisis may experience.
    51. Advise victims of their rights under the Crime Victims’ Rights Act.
    52. Discuss an appropriate law enforcement response to the victims of crime.
    53. Define the role of the victim advocate.
    54. Deliver death notifications.
    55. Explain how to patrol in a vehicle using a variety of techniques.
    56. Patrol on foot.
    57. Patrol on bicycle.
    58. Check parks and school grounds.
    59. Search unlocked businesses and dwellings for signs of illegal entry.
    60. Secure buildings.
    61. Check individuals/businesses for compliance with licensing requirements.
    62. Advise property owners or agents of potentially hazardous conditions.
    63. Notify citizens of damage to their property.
    64. Secure vehicles.
    65. Investigate an unattended suspicious vehicle.
    66. Follow a suspicious vehicle.
    67. Investigate unusual odors and sounds.
    68. Identify wanted vehicles or persons.
    69. Interview suspicious persons.
    70. Participate in large scale area search parties.
    71. Escort money, valuables, or people to provide security.
    72. Develop informants using field contacts.
    73. Respond to crimes in progress.
    74. Conduct an initial investigation at a “crime in progress” scene.
    75. Secure “crime in progress” scene and begin an investigation.
    76. Direct actions of other officers at a scene of action.
    77. Advise victims of the procedures for prosecution.
    78. Discuss the law regarding the handling of abnormal persons.
    79. Recognize the signs and symptoms that may be indicative of mentally ill persons.
    80. Approach and handle a suspected mentally disturbed person.
    81. Transport the mentally disturbed subject using proper procedures.
    82. Take field notes.
    83. Obtain information for police report.
    84. Organize information for police report.
    85. Complete incident reports.
    86. Prepare narrative reports.
    87. Write summaries of witness and complainant interviews.
    88. Prepare a criminal case summary for prosecutor.
    89. Apprehend juvenile offenders.
    90. Detain and transport juvenile offenders.
    91. Notify parents/guardians and/or proper authorities of a juvenile apprehension.
    92. Inform juvenile offender of Miranda rights before interrogation.
    93. Counsel juveniles.
    94. Conduct parent-juvenile interview(s).
    95. Determine the course of action following parent/juvenile conference.
    96. Inform parent(s)/guardian of the status of the juvenile offender’s case at time of release.
    97. Confer with juvenile probation officer.
    98. Demonstrate competency in report writing.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate competency in detention and prosecution.

    Objectives:

    1. Conduct a custodial search.
    2. Explain the purpose and value of taking acceptable fingerprint and palm print impressions.
    3. Explain the methods used to obtain fingerprints and palm prints.
    4. Take fingerprints and palm pints during a classroom practical exercise.
    5. Provide proper care and treatment to prisoners.
    6. Investigate injuries to prisoners.
    7. Guard prisoners detained outside of a jail.
    8. Advise adult defendant or family regarding an arrest/detention.
    9. Identify proper court for case prosecution.
    10. Prepare request for warrant authorization.
    11. Confer with prosecutor or city attorney regarding warrant authorization.
    12. Review warrants for completeness and accuracy.
    13. Swear out complaints or warrants.
    14. Prepare to arraign a defendant.
    15. Arraign a defendant in court.
    16. Verify reliability and credibility of witnesses.
    17. Review a case with the prosecutor or city attorney to plan preparation of case.
    18. Check that witnesses are ready for court testimony.
    19. Prepare for testifying in a legal proceeding.
    20. Explain the proper demeanor prior to testifying in a legal proceeding.
    21. Present testimony in a legal proceeding.
    22. Review a case with prosecutors or city attorneys following a legal proceeding.
    23. Determine validity of civil process.
    24. Enforce a court issued order (e.g., writs).
    25. Serve probate orders (e.g., persons requiring treatment, juveniles, adult offenders).

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the required skills of a police officer.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the law and responsibilities related to a law enforcement officer administering first aid.
    2. Conduct a scene assessment.
    3. Demonstrate a working knowledge of the control and spread of blood borne pathogens.
    4. Control emotions at first aid scene.
    5. Conduct a patient survey to assess a victim’s medical status.
    6. Recognize normal body signs in order to be able to determine when abnormal signs are present.
    7. Administer first aid to treat for shock.
    8. Administer first aid to control bleeding.
    9. Administer first aid to treat for puncture wounds.
    10. Administer first aid to treat for gunshot wounds.
    11. Administer first aid to treat for amputation/avulsion.
    12. Administer first aid to treat for eye injuries.
    13. Administer first aid for skull, spine, neck, and pelvis injuries.
    14. Administer first aid to treat for broken bones.
    15. Administer rescue breathing.
    16. Administer first aid for choking.
    17. Apply first aid to treat for heart attack.
    18. Administer cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR).
    19. Administer first aid to treat for cold emergencies.
    20. Administer first aid to treat for heat exhaustion.
    21. Administer first aid to treat for heat stroke.
    22. Administer first aid to treat for burns.
    23. Administer first aid to treat for electric shock.
    24. Administer first aid to treat for stroke.
    25. Administer first aid to treat for diabetic reaction.
    26. Administer first aid to treat for seizures.
    27. Administer first aid to treat for poisoning.
    28. Administer first aid to treat for overdose.
    29. Assist in childbirth.
    30. Extricate an injured person trapped in a vehicle or cave-in with fear of fire, etc, using simple tools prior to application of first aid.
    31. Transport injured persons.
    32. Demonstrate proper first aid techniques and skills in a simulated first aid emergency.
    33. Use deadly force legally.
    34. Discuss firearms and ammunition.
    35. Handle firearms safely.
    36. Secure a firearm other than your own.
    37. Make a use-of-force decision in a potentially life-threatening situation.
    38. Manage a post-shooting scene.
    39. Complete post-shooting legal procedures.
    40. Prepare to testify in court related to a shooting incident.
    41. Discharge a firearm at targets other than a person (e.g., injured or vicious animals).
    42. Make appropriate off-duty firearms decisions.
    43. Explain the applicability of federal firearms laws to state and local firearms enforcement.
    44. Discuss controlling violent confrontation as a civilian.
    45. Demonstrate proficiency in basic marksmanship using a handgun and shotgun.
    46. Discharge a firearm in low light levels.
    47. Perform proper care and maintenance for firearms.
    48. Draw a firearm efficiently and safely.
    49. Holster a firearm effectively.
    50. Assess a threat level to self or others to determine if it is life threatening.
    51. Use cover/concealment in a life-threatening situation.
    52. Neutralize all threats to self or others.
    53. Demonstrate proficiency in tactical marksmanship.
    54. Demonstrate proficiency in firearms skills by attaining a passing score on all phases of the mandatory final assessment.
    55. Conduct a frisk or pat down.
    56. Execute the arrest of a person.
    57. Handcuff a suspect or prisoner.
    58. Conduct a field search of arrested persons.
    59. Conduct a custodial search.
    60. Pursue a fleeing suspect on foot.
    61. Break through a door using force.
    62. Use cover and concealment to ensure officer survival.
    63. Use light effectively.
    64. Protect handgun using weapons retention techniques.
    65. Explain the law as it relates to the use of force.
    66. Explain the Michigan law enforcement officer-subject control continuum.
    67. Discuss the relationship between the use of force and the Michigan law enforcement officer-subject control continuum.
    68. Define the decision-making process required to use the appropriate amount of force in gaining control of subject.
    69. Explain the concept of control.
    70. Write a report that documents the officer’s use of force.
    71. Discuss the liability attached when officers use force to control a subject.
    72. Explain the survival mindset.
    73. Define tactical communication.
    74. Discuss fear and anger management.
    75. Demonstrate effective subject control techniques.
    76. Explain post-force incident responsibility.
    77. Demonstrate the ability to manage subject encounters under circumstances that justify varying levels of force.
    78. Explain the legal issues regarding emergency vehicle operations.
    79. Explain liability issues that relate to emergency vehicle operations.
    80. Operate an emergency vehicle in non-emergency circumstances.
    81. Operate an emergency vehicle under emergency conditions.
    82. Engage in a pursuit.
    83. Discuss when to terminate a pursuit.
    84. Engage in post-incident operations.
    85. Demonstrate preparedness for emergency vehicle operations.
    86. Discuss the techniques of emergency vehicle operations in appropriate situations.
    87. Discuss operating an emergency vehicle under adverse environmental conditions.
    88. Operate an emergency vehicle using proper techniques in darkness.
    89. Demonstrate proficiency on the MCOLES emergency vehicle operations course or an MCOLES approved course that exceeds the standard.
    90. Establish physical fitness baseline with goals for improvement.
    91. Determine body fat by using a circumference technique and plots on the fitness profile chart.
    92. Explain the thresholds of training for cardiovascular fitness to improve and/or maintain cardiovascular fitness.
    93. Explain the thresholds of training for flexibility to improve and/or maintain appropriate range of motion.
    94. Discuss the benefits of circuit training and various designs of circuit prototypes.
    95. Explain the thresholds of training for muscle strength to improve and/or maintain muscle strength (absolute strength).
    96. Demonstrate the concept of interval training.
    97. Define polymeric exercise.
    98. Demonstrate fitness skills by participating in a variety of activities in a setting of friendly competition.
    99. Practice the 4-event physical fitness test items to adjust fitness goals for needed improvement.
    100. Discuss the fundamentals of fitness and wellness.
    101. Discuss the benefits of exercise using the exercise guidelines.
    102. Explain the seven major coronary risk factors.
    103. Define stress and its effect on the body and an officer’s performance.
    104. Define the role of basic nutrients and proper diet.
    105. Discuss the balance of energy needed to maintain proper weight through strategies that assist in weight loss and weight control.
    106. Discuss the factors that contribute to lower back pain.
    107. Recognize the factors in exercise adherence and strategies to increase adherence.
    108. Demonstrate close quarter combat tactics and techniques using a handgun.
    109. Demonstrate effective subject control techniques.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the various aspects of traffic control.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain how to use the Michigan Vehicle Code.
    2. Use appropriate words and phrases in the interpretation of the Michigan Vehicle Code.
    3. Identify different classifications of traffic related offenses.
    4. Determine where traffic laws can be enforced.
    5. Identify authority to take enforcement action outside employing jurisdiction.
    6. Identify elements and non-elements of a traffic violation.
    7. Determine if there was a violation of law.
    8. Identify elements relevant to specific traffic offenses.
    9. Conduct a license check for an operator of a motor vehicle.
    10. Determine the status of an operator’s auto insurance.
    11. Check a vehicle for proper registration.
    12. Identify driver and/or vehicle licensing violations.
    13. Monitor traffic for violations.
    14. Visually estimate the speed of vehicles.
    15. Determine the speed of a vehicle by using the pacing technique (i.e., using speedometer).
    16. Follow a suspect vehicle to observe for a traffic violation.
    17. Make a determination about the appropriate action to be taken for a traffic offense.
    18. Identify possible stolen motor vehicles.
    19. Investigate to verify if a vehicle is in fact stolen.
    20. Stop vehicles to investigate traffic violations.
    21. Stop vehicle to investigate possible felony.
    22. Interview driver on a traffic stop.
    23. Inspect vehicles for conformance with the Michigan Vehicle Code.
    24. Participate in roadblocks.
    25. Assist stranded motorists.
    26. Remove an unattended vehicle obstructing traffic.
    27. Determine proper method for directing traffic.
    28. Direct traffic safely.
    29. Explain to a traffic offender state traffic vehicle laws and procedures at a traffic stop.
    30. Issue verbal warnings to traffic violators.
    31. Complete a uniform law citation.
    32. Issue a citation and collect bond (if necessary) for a traffic violation.
    33. Make a custodial traffic arrest when appropriate.
    34. Determine what constitutes an OWI/OUID driving related offense.
    35. Identify those traffic related offenses where alcohol or controlled substances in the blood are admissible.
    36. Identify the elements necessary in order to obtain an OWI conviction.
    37. Determine if an arrest can be made for an OWI related driving offense at the scene of a traffic crash.
    38. Demonstrate knowledge of the implied consent law.
    39. Demonstrate knowledge of case law relevant to OWI.
    40. Establish reasonable suspicion of OWI violation prior to a traffic stop.
    41. Decide if a suspect is in violation of OWI law by checking for behavioral signs of intoxication.
    42. Administer the accepted field sobriety test.
    43. Arrest an OWI suspect using proper field procedures.
    44. Process an OWI/OUID suspect using proper stationhouse procedures.
    45. Process an OWI/OUID refusal suspect using proper stationhouse procedures.
    46. Test blood alcohol content using the evidentiary breath test instrument.
    47. Arrange for obtaining a blood or urine sample for a sobriety test.
    48. Complete an officer’s report of refusal to submit to chemical test form (DI-93) if the suspect refuses a chemical test.
    49. Complete an alcohol influence report form.
    50. Complete a blood, breath, urine test report form.
    51. Complete an OWI uniform law citation.
    52. Complete an OWI arrest report.
    53. Identify the elements of a motor vehicle crash.
    54. Determine if drivers have fulfilled their responsibilities as mandated by law.
    55. Determine whether an officer has authority to take enforcement action for a traffic crash.
    56. Take precautions to prevent additional crashes at traffic crash scene.
    57. Set priorities for action at a traffic crash scene.
    58. Request assistance at a traffic crash scene.
    59. Direct activities at the scene of a traffic crash investigation.
    60. Secure the traffic crash scene to protect evidence.
    61. Determine whether to photograph the traffic crash scene.
    62. Complete the state of Michigan Traffic Crash Report form (UD-l0).
    63. Identify persons involved in a traffic crash.
    64. Identify the owner of a vehicle involved in a traffic crash.
    65. Locate witnesses to a traffic crash.
    66. Interview persons involved in a traffic crash.
    67. Draw field sketch at scene of a traffic crash.
    68. Take measurements at a traffic crash scene for field sketch.
    69. Diagram a traffic crash scene.
    70. Search the traffic crash scene for physical evidence.
    71. Collect and document physical evidence from a traffic crash scene.
    72. Identify point(s) of impact at a traffic crash scene.
    73. Measure skid marks.
    74. Inspect vehicles for fresh damage.
    75. Test the operating condition of a traffic crash vehicle’s equipment.
    76. Demonstrate an understanding of the relationship between types of crashes and the injury/trauma occurring to unrestrained occupants.
    77. Follow up the extent of personal injuries resulting from a traffic crash.
    78. Review the traffic crash with crash investigator(s).
    79. Determine the contributing factors to a traffic crash.
    80. Determine fault in a traffic crash.
    81. Issue a citation(s) in a traffic crash.
    82. Demonstrate an understanding of the theory of RADAD and LIDAR.
    83. Demonstrate the ability to conduct a Standardized Field Sobriety Test.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate competency in special operations.

    Objectives:

    1. Patrol locations on beat that are potentially hazardous to citizens.
    2. Respond to a hazardous material incident safely and properly.
    3. Coordinate actions with public service personnel arriving to assist in an emergency (non-hazardous material) situation.
    4. Evacuate persons from a dangerous area.
    5. Secure accident and disaster scenes.
    6. Demonstrate an understanding of the common characteristics of explosive devices.
    7. Identify explosive devices.
    8. Demonstrate an understanding of the response protocols to a bomb threat.
    9. Respond to a bombing incident.
    10. Respond to labor/management disputes.
    11. Control non-violent crowds.
    12. Patrol areas containing marchers or demonstrators.
    13. Control hostile groups.
    14. Patrol riot-stricken or civil disturbance areas.
    15. Confront groups of agitated people in riot formation.
    16. Perform duties while wearing heavy equipment.
    17. Physically restrain crowds.
    18. Control non-violent crowds.
    19. Control hostile groups.
    20. Control groups of agitated people in riot formation.
    21. Recruit confidential informants.
    22. Conduct surveillance of individuals or locations.
    23. Execute raids.
    24. Respond to a barricaded gunman/hostage situation.
    25. Describe the benefits of understanding Michigan’s environmental laws.
    26. Identify an environmental crime.
    27. Use the Michigan penal code (MCLA/MSA) to identify environmental statutes.
    28. Make an appropriate and safe response when observing a violation of the environmental statutes.
    29. Explain why the best tools in investigating an environmental crime are standard investigative techniques.
    30. Define the purpose and structure of the incident command (ICS) system.
    31. Define the terminology associated with the incident command system.
    32. Describe the major functions of the incident command system.
    33. Describe the role of law enforcement as part of the incident command structure.
    34. Explain the key provisions of Michigan’s emergency management act.
    35. Participate in a classroom-facilitated discussion of a simulated emergency situation.
    36. Discuss the characteristics of modern terrorism.
    37. Identify domestic and international terrorist groups.
    38. Recognize local terrorist targets.
    39. Initiate practical measures for preventing terrorist attacks.
    40. Define terrorist pre-incident indicators.
    41. Recognize the importance of gathering information regarding potential terrorist activities.
    42. Explain the legal implications regarding terrorist activities.
    43. Define weapons of mass destruction (WMD).
    44. Identify the five types of WMD material.
    45. Define the characteristics of chemical agents as weapons of mass destruction.
    46. Define the characteristics of biological agents.
    47. Define the characteristics of nuclear/radiological materials as weapons of mass destruction.
    48. Discuss explosive devices within the context of terrorism awareness.
    49. Respond to a known or unknown WMD attack.
    50. Discuss the basic dynamics and issues involved in a rapid response to an ongoing act of violence.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Sessions and Topic:

    1. Investigation
      1. Introduction to Investigation
      2. Substantive Criminal Law
      3. Criminal Procedure
      4. Investigation
      5. Court Functions and Civil Law
      6. Crime Scene Process
      7. Special Investigations
    2. Patrol Procedures
      1. Patrol Operations
      2. Ethics In Policing and Interpersonal Relations
      3. Patrol Techniques
      4. Report Writing
      5. Juveniles
    3. Detention and Prosecution
      1. Receiving and Booking Process
      2. Case Prosecution
      3. Civil Process
    4. Police Skills
      1. First Aid
      2. Firearms
      3. Police Physical Skills
      4. Fitness and Wellness
      5. Emergency Vehicle Operation
    5. Traffic
      1. Motor Vehicle Law
      2. Vehicle Stops
      3. Traffic Control and Enforcement
      4. Operating While Intoxicated
      5. Motor Vehicle Traffic Crash Investigation
    6. Special Operations
      1. Emergency Preparedness/Disaster Control
      2. Civil Disorders
      3. Tactical Operations
      4. Environmental Crimes
      5. Terrorism Awareness

    Primary Faculty
    Hliebay, Eugene
    Secondary Faculty
    Hliebay, Eugene
    Associate Dean
    Lopez, Michael
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • LAWE 2817 - Basic Police Academy 3

    Credit Hours: 1.00


    Prerequisites: LAWE 2816 and Consent of department; meet admissions standards of MCOLES; at least 18 years of age; valid Michigan driver’s license; no felony convictions; pass MCOLES reading, writing and physical fitness pre-employment tests.

    (replaces but does not equate to LAWE 2810)

    LAWE 2817 is the last of three courses that prepares students in the proper techniques of patrol procedures, criminal investigation, and crime scene process. Emphasis is on conflict resolution, report writing, and detention and prosecution of prisoners. First aid, investigations, evidence collection, disaster control, civil disorders, and tactical operations are also covered. This course meets the state-mandated requirements for preparing students to take the exam for State certifications for entry-level police officers.

    Location: East Campus

    Contact Hours: 52
    Billable Contact Hours: 2
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate competency in investigative techniques.
     
    Objectives: The student will:
    Describe the features of our criminal justice system and explain how it is built upon constitutional law.

    1. Locate and describe specific provisions of the United States Constitution important to the operation of our form of government.
    2. Describe the Michigan Constitution and its relationship to law enforcement in Michigan and the United States Constitution.
    3. Identify the basic concepts of criminal law.
    4. Research and use the Michigan penal code (MCLA/MSA) to identify crimes against persons.
    5. Identify crimes against persons.
    6. Research and use the Michigan penal code (MCLA/MSA) to identify crimes against property.
    7. Identify crimes against property.
    8. Research and use the Michigan penal code (MCLA/MSA) to identify contraband and regulatory crimes.
    9. Identify contraband and regulatory crimes.
    10. Use the Michigan Penal Code (MCLA/MSA) to identify public order crimes.
    11. Identify public order crimes.
    12. Identify the integral relationship between investigative procedures and admissible evidence in court.
    13. Collect evidence in daily investigative activities applying the laws of evidence as defined by federal and state courts.
    14. Conduct investigations from the initial complaint to presentation of evidence in the courtroom in conformance with the Michigan rules of evidence.
    15. Define and explain juvenile law as it relates to law enforcement.
    16. Define and explain the special provisions in the statutes and court rules for juvenile offenses.
    17. Collect admissions and confessions as evidence, in accordance with federal and state laws regarding admissions and confessions.
    18. Prepare for an interrogation of a suspect.
    19. Advise persons of their constitutional rights.
    20. Instruct a suspect on the process for obtaining an attorney.
    21. Explain the nature of a complaint to a suspect.
    22. Conduct interrogation of a suspect.
    23. Record statements of suspects.
    24. Arrest persons in a lawful manner.
    25. Warn offenders in lieu of arrest or citation.
    26. Plan strategy for making arrests.
    27. Arrest persons with a warrant.
    28. Arrest persons without a warrant.
    29. Take into custody a person detained by citizen.
    30. Transport prisoner.
    31. Conduct searches with a warrant in a lawful manner.
    32. Obtain a search warrant.
    33. Exercise safety precautions when searching.
    34. Search premises or property with a warrant.
    35. Search persons with a warrant.
    36. Conduct searches without a warrant only under court recognized exceptions to the fourth amendment warrant requirement.
    37. Search premises, property, or passenger compartment of a vehicle incident to an arrest.
    38. Search a movable vehicle with probable cause and exigent circumstances.
    39. Search buildings in hot pursuit situations.
    40. Search premises or property with consent.
    41. Conduct corporeal lineups.
    42. Conduct photo lineups.
    43. Conduct a show up (immediate on-scene identification).
    44. Determine whether an incident is a criminal or civil matter.
    45. Handle complaints.
    46. Conduct a preliminary investigation by protecting a crime scene and locating witnesses.
    47. Evaluate information at a preliminary investigation to determine course of action.
    48. Track a person from a scene.
    49. Search for persons using proper techniques.
    50. Locate witnesses to a crime using various methods.
    51. Interview complainants and witnesses.
    52. Take statements of witnesses.
    53. Examine dead body for evidence of unnatural death.
    54. Search dead bodies for identification when death is determined to be natural.
    55. Verify the identity of deceased persons.
    56. Review with medical examiner circumstances relating to a death.
    57. Establish the modus operandi (M.O.) of a suspect.
    58. Analyze and compare incidents for similarity of modus operandi (M.O.).
    59. Utilize department records to assist in investigation.
    60. Review crime lab reports to guide an investigation.
    61. Review records and pictures to identify suspects.
    62. Organize and conduct a corporeal lineup.
    63. Organize and conduct photo lineups.
    64. Conduct a show up.
    65. Explain the civil law necessary for effective functioning as a law enforcement officer.
    66. Explain the court system at a level necessary for effective functioning as a law enforcement officer.
    67. Define legal terms and discuss issues related to the court system at a level necessary for effective functioning as a law enforcement officer.
    68. Explain legal processes of the court at a level necessary for effective functioning as a law enforcement officer.
    69. Plan strategy for a search.
    70. Search a crime scene for physical evidence.
    71. Diagram location of physical evidence at crime scene.
    72. Process a diagram of a crime scene as evidence.
    73. Photograph crime scenes.
    74. Collect information and evidence at scene of a preliminary investigation.
    75. Collect evidence and personal property from a crime scene.
    76. Cast impressions.
    77. Locate and evaluate latent fingerprints.
    78. Tag evidence and confiscated properties.
    79. Package evidence or personal property.
    80. Transport property or evidence.
    81. Document the chain of custody for evidence.
    82. Witness autopsies.
    83. Process impounded property.
    84. Determine if recovered property is linked with a previous crime.
    85. Trace stolen goods.
    86. Recover and inventory stolen property.
    87. Define the provisions of the child protection law.
    88. Recognize suspected cases of child abuse while responding to complaints related to and not related to child abuse.
    89. Investigate cases of suspected child abuse or neglect.
    90. Take child into protective custody.
    91. Define the criminal sexual conduct laws.
    92. Respond to a complaint of sexual assault.
    93. Investigate a complaint of a sexual assault.
    94. Define the controlled substances provisions of the public health code.
    95. Investigate violations of the controlled substances provisions of the public health code commonly encountered by the working patrol officer.
    96. Explain the historical context and changes in society’s understanding of domestic violence.
    97. Discuss the nature of domestic violence.
    98. Explain the behaviors used by domestic violent assailants.
    99. Classify assailant behavior officers might encounter at the domestic violence scene.
    100. Discuss victim behaviors officers might encounter at the scene of domestic violence.
    101. Explain the consequences victims may face as they consider leaving the assailants.
    102. Explain the consequences victims may face when participating in the criminal justice system.
    103. Define indicators that can assist officers in assessing when an assailant might kill.
    104. Explain why domestic violence is a law enforcement issue.
    105. Define substantive criminal law as it relates to domestic violence.
    106. Explain the options available to the court in sentencing and adjudication in domestic violence cases.
    107. Define the crime of stalking.
    108. Define the crime of aggravated stalking.
    109. Define the authority of a police officer in enforcing domestic violence laws.
    110. Explain a domestic relationship personal protection order.
    111. Explain a non-domestic stalking personal protection order.
    112. Explain court procedures related to personal protection orders.
    113. Explain enforcement of domestic relationship and non- domestic stalking personal protection orders.
    114. Discuss a personal protection order’s effect on firearm purchase or possession.
    115. Define probable cause (reasonable cause) as it relates to domestic violence.
    116. Explain procedural requirements in responding to a domestic violence incident.
    117. Respond to the scene of domestic violence.
    118. Make initial contact at the scene of domestic violence.
    119. Conduct a preliminary criminal investigation upon entry to the scene.
    120. Interview the suspected assailant as part of the complete criminal investigation at a domestic violence scene.
    121. Interview the victim as part of the complete criminal investigation at a domestic violence scene.
    122. Determine whether probable cause exists to make an arrest when responding to domestic violence.
    123. Arrest a domestic violence assailant after establishing probable cause that a crime has been committed.
    124. Arrest the assailant after establishing that a personal protection order (PPO) has been violated.
    125. Arrest a domestic violence assailant after establishing that a conditional release order (conditional bond) has been violated.
    126. Complete the criminal investigation at the domestic violence scene.
    127. Provide appropriate assistance to the domestic violence victim when an arrest has been made.
    128. Secure a domestic violence scene when an arrest cannot be made.
    129. Write a domestic violence report documenting the domestic violence investigation.
    130. Secure digital media evidence.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate competency in patrol procedures.

    Objectives:

    1. Inspect patrol vehicle for weapons and contraband.
    2. Prepare for patrol by becoming familiar with area.
    3. Use the LEIN system to support patrol and investigative operations.
    4. Receive and evaluate telephone requests for police service.
    5. Use police radio to communicate with dispatcher, LEIN operator, and other officers.
    6. Inform the dispatcher of status and needs.
    7. Take custody of lost and found property.
    8. Verify vehicle title information.
    9. Discuss the relationship between the police officer and the public in our form of government.
    10. Discuss the role of ethics in performing the duties of a police officer.
    11. Discuss the role of ethics in the relationship between the police officer, the organization, and the public.
    12. Discuss how ethical behavior promotes professionalism.
    13. Discuss the relationship between the use of discretion and ethical behavior as it applies to the enforcement of laws.
    14. Explain how behavior could result in compromising an officer’s credibility, public trust, and/or employment status.
    15. Describe some methods that will assist in making ethical decisions.
    16. Explain Title VII of the 1964 Civil Rights Act (18 USC 242).
    17. Identify the key elements of Michigan’s Elliott-Larsen Civil Rights Act (MCL 37.2103).
    18. Explain Title II of the Americans With Disabilities Act.
    19. Explain Michigan Handicapper’s Civil Rights Act (MHCRA) (MCL 37.1101).
    20. Explain Michigan’s Ethnic Intimidation Statute (MCL 750.147b; MSA 28.344 (2)).
    21. Describe the benefits of understanding diverse cultures that make up the officer’s living and working environment.
    22. Define a multi-cultural society.
    23. Discuss the basic nature of culture.
    24. Define stereotyping.
    25. Define the characteristics of prejudice.
    26. Discuss how prejudice influences behavior.
    27. Improve communication with community members by acknowledging cultural traits and values.
    28. Communicate across cultures effectively.
    29. Discuss barriers to cross-cultural communication.
    30. Interact in a non-prejudiced manner with co-workers and supervisors within the law enforcement organization.
    31. Explain the law regarding sexual harassment.
    32. Discuss causes of sexual harassment.
    33. Discuss costs associated with sexual harassment.
    34. Explain the responsibility assumed in preventing harassment.
    35. Explain the importance of effective communication in policing.
    36. Define the basics of communication.
    37. Apply techniques that will enhance listening skills.
    38. Identify verbal and non-verbal behavior that indicates potential hostility.
    39. Discuss methods for conflict resolution.
    40. Identify situations that are likely to cause severe stress or crisis for citizens.
    41. Describe the mental states that persons in crisis may exhibit.
    42. Discuss techniques used to communicate with persons in crisis.
    43. Discuss techniques used to communicate with deaf or hard of hearing persons.
    44. Deliver emergency messages (e.g., injuries, death).
    45. Establish rapport with people while on patrol approach the scene of a civil dispute.
    46. Manage a civil dispute.
    47. Resolve a civil dispute.
    48. Define the nature of victimization.
    49. Identify situations that are likely to cause severe stress or crisis for crime victims.
    50. Describe the mental stages that persons in severe crisis may experience.
    51. Advise victims of their rights under the Crime Victims’ Rights Act.
    52. Discuss an appropriate law enforcement response to the victims of crime.
    53. Define the role of the victim advocate.
    54. Deliver death notifications.
    55. Explain how to patrol in a vehicle using a variety of techniques.
    56. Patrol on foot.
    57. Patrol on bicycle.
    58. Check parks and school grounds.
    59. Search unlocked businesses and dwellings for signs of illegal entry.
    60. Secure buildings.
    61. Check individuals/businesses for compliance with licensing requirements.
    62. Advise property owners or agents of potentially hazardous conditions.
    63. Notify citizens of damage to their property.
    64. Secure vehicles.
    65. Investigate an unattended suspicious vehicle.
    66. Follow a suspicious vehicle.
    67. Investigate unusual odors and sounds.
    68. Identify wanted vehicles or persons.
    69. Interview suspicious persons.
    70. Participate in large scale area search parties.
    71. Escort money, valuables, or people to provide security.
    72. Develop informants using field contacts.
    73. Respond to crimes in progress.
    74. Conduct an initial investigation at a “crime in progress” scene.
    75. Secure “crime in progress” scene and begin an investigation.
    76. Direct actions of other officers at a scene of action.
    77. Advise victims of the procedures for prosecution.
    78. Discuss the law regarding the handling of abnormal persons.
    79. Recognize the signs and symptoms that may be indicative of mentally ill persons.
    80. Approach and handle a suspected mentally disturbed person.
    81. Transport the mentally disturbed subject using proper procedures.
    82. Take field notes.
    83. Obtain information for police report.
    84. Organize information for police report.
    85. Complete incident reports.
    86. Prepare narrative reports.
    87. Write summaries of witness and complainant interviews.
    88. Prepare a criminal case summary for prosecutor.
    89. Apprehend juvenile offenders.
    90. Detain and transport juvenile offenders.
    91. Notify parents/guardians and/or proper authorities of a juvenile apprehension.
    92. Inform juvenile offender of Miranda rights before interrogation.
    93. Counsel juveniles.
    94. Conduct parent-juvenile interview(s).
    95. Determine the course of action following parent/juvenile conference.
    96. Inform parent(s)/guardian of the status of the juvenile offender’s case at time of release.
    97. Confer with juvenile probation officer.
    98. Demonstrate competency in report writing.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate competency in detention and prosecution.

    Objectives:

    1. Conduct a custodial search.
    2. Explain the purpose and value of taking acceptable fingerprint and palm print impressions.
    3. Explain the methods used to obtain fingerprints and palm prints.
    4. Take fingerprints and palm pints during a classroom practical exercise.
    5. Provide proper care and treatment to prisoners.
    6. Investigate injuries to prisoners.
    7. Guard prisoners detained outside of a jail.
    8. Advise adult defendant or family regarding an arrest/detention.
    9. Identify proper court for case prosecution.
    10. Prepare request for warrant authorization.
    11. Confer with prosecutor or city attorney regarding warrant authorization.
    12. Review warrants for completeness and accuracy.
    13. Swear out complaints or warrants.
    14. Prepare to arraign a defendant.
    15. Arraign a defendant in court.
    16. Verify reliability and credibility of witnesses.
    17. Review a case with the prosecutor or city attorney to plan preparation of case.
    18. Check that witnesses are ready for court testimony.
    19. Prepare for testifying in a legal proceeding.
    20. Explain the proper demeanor prior to testifying in a legal proceeding.
    21. Present testimony in a legal proceeding.
    22. Review a case with prosecutors or city attorneys following a legal proceeding.
    23. Determine validity of civil process.
    24. Enforce a court issued order (e.g., writs).
    25. Serve probate orders (e.g., persons requiring treatment, juveniles, adult offenders).

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the required skills of a police officer.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the law and responsibilities related to a law enforcement officer administering first aid.
    2. Conduct a scene assessment.
    3. Demonstrate a working knowledge of the control and spread of blood borne pathogens.
    4. Control emotions at first aid scene.
    5. Conduct a patient survey to assess a victim’s medical status.
    6. Recognize normal body signs in order to be able to determine when abnormal signs are present.
    7. Administer first aid to treat for shock.
    8. Administer first aid to control bleeding.
    9. Administer first aid to treat for puncture wounds.
    10. Administer first aid to treat for gunshot wounds.
    11. Administer first aid to treat for amputation/avulsion.
    12. Administer first aid to treat for eye injuries.
    13. Administer first aid for skull, spine, neck, and pelvis injuries.
    14. Administer first aid to treat for broken bones.
    15. Administer rescue breathing.
    16. Administer first aid for choking.
    17. Apply first aid to treat for heart attack.
    18. Administer cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR).
    19. Administer first aid to treat for cold emergencies.
    20. Administer first aid to treat for heat exhaustion.
    21. Administer first aid to treat for heat stroke.
    22. Administer first aid to treat for burns.
    23. Administer first aid to treat for electric shock.
    24. Administer first aid to treat for stroke.
    25. Administer first aid to treat for diabetic reaction.
    26. Administer first aid to treat for seizures.
    27. Administer first aid to treat for poisoning.
    28. Administer first aid to treat for overdose.
    29. Assist in childbirth.
    30. Extricate an injured person trapped in a vehicle or cave-in with fear of fire, etc, using simple tools prior to application of first aid.
    31. Transport injured persons.
    32. Demonstrate proper first aid techniques and skills in a simulated first aid emergency.
    33. Use deadly force legally.
    34. Discuss firearms and ammunition.
    35. Handle firearms safely.
    36. Secure a firearm other than your own.
    37. Make a use-of-force decision in a potentially life-threatening situation.
    38. Manage a post-shooting scene.
    39. Complete post-shooting legal procedures.
    40. Prepare to testify in court related to a shooting incident.
    41. Discharge a firearm at targets other than a person (e.g., injured or vicious animals).
    42. Make appropriate off-duty firearms decisions.
    43. Explain the applicability of federal firearms laws to state and local firearms enforcement.
    44. Discuss controlling violent confrontation as a civilian.
    45. Demonstrate proficiency in basic marksmanship using a handgun and shotgun.
    46. Discharge a firearm in low light levels.
    47. Perform proper care and maintenance for firearms.
    48. Draw a firearm efficiently and safely.
    49. Holster a firearm effectively.
    50. Assess a threat level to self or others to determine if it is life threatening.
    51. Use cover/concealment in a life-threatening situation.
    52. Neutralize all threats to self or others.
    53. Demonstrate proficiency in tactical marksmanship.
    54. Demonstrate proficiency in firearms skills by attaining a passing score on all phases of the mandatory final assessment.
    55. Conduct a frisk or pat down.
    56. Execute the arrest of a person.
    57. Handcuff a suspect or prisoner.
    58. Conduct a field search of arrested persons.
    59. Conduct a custodial search.
    60. Pursue a fleeing suspect on foot.
    61. Break through a door using force.
    62. Use cover and concealment to ensure officer survival.
    63. Use light effectively.
    64. Protect handgun using weapons retention techniques.
    65. Explain the law as it relates to the use of force.
    66. Explain the Michigan law enforcement officer-subject control continuum.
    67. Discuss the relationship between the use of force and the Michigan law enforcement officer-subject control continuum.
    68. Define the decision-making process required to use the appropriate amount of force in gaining control of subject.
    69. Explain the concept of control.
    70. Write a report that documents the officer’s use of force.
    71. Discuss the liability attached when officers use force to control a subject.
    72. Explain the survival mindset.
    73. Define tactical communication.
    74. Discuss fear and anger management.
    75. Demonstrate effective subject control techniques.
    76. Explain post-force incident responsibility.
    77. Demonstrate the ability to manage subject encounters under circumstances that justify varying levels of force.
    78. Explain the legal issues regarding emergency vehicle operations.
    79. Explain liability issues that relate to emergency vehicle operations.
    80. Operate an emergency vehicle in non-emergency circumstances.
    81. Operate an emergency vehicle under emergency conditions.
    82. Engage in a pursuit.
    83. Discuss when to terminate a pursuit.
    84. Engage in post-incident operations.
    85. Demonstrate preparedness for emergency vehicle operations.
    86. Discuss the techniques of emergency vehicle operations in appropriate situations.
    87. Discuss operating an emergency vehicle under adverse environmental conditions.
    88. Operate an emergency vehicle using proper techniques in darkness.
    89. Demonstrate proficiency on the MCOLES emergency vehicle operations course or an MCOLES approved course that exceeds the standard.
    90. Establish physical fitness baseline with goals for improvement.
    91. Determine body fat by using a circumference technique and plots on the fitness profile chart.
    92. Explain the thresholds of training for cardiovascular fitness to improve and/or maintain cardiovascular fitness.
    93. Explain the thresholds of training for flexibility to improve and/or maintain appropriate range of motion.
    94. Discuss the benefits of circuit training and various designs of circuit prototypes.
    95. Explain the thresholds of training for muscle strength to improve and/or maintain muscle strength (absolute strength).
    96. Demonstrate the concept of interval training.
    97. Define polymeric exercise.
    98. Demonstrate fitness skills by participating in a variety of activities in a setting of friendly competition.
    99. Practice the 4-event physical fitness test items to adjust fitness goals for needed improvement.
    100. Discuss the fundamentals of fitness and wellness.
    101. Discuss the benefits of exercise using the exercise guidelines.
    102. Explain the seven major coronary risk factors.
    103. Define stress and its effect on the body and an officer’s performance.
    104. Define the role of basic nutrients and proper diet.
    105. Discuss the balance of energy needed to maintain proper weight through strategies that assist in weight loss and weight control.
    106. Discuss the factors that contribute to lower back pain.
    107. Recognize the factors in exercise adherence and strategies to increase adherence.
    108. Demonstrate close quarter combat tactics and techniques using a handgun.
    109. Demonstrate effective subject control techniques.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the various aspects of traffic control.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain how to use the Michigan Vehicle Code.
    2. Use appropriate words and phrases in the interpretation of the Michigan Vehicle Code.
    3. Identify different classifications of traffic related offenses.
    4. Determine where traffic laws can be enforced.
    5. Identify authority to take enforcement action outside employing jurisdiction.
    6. Identify elements and non-elements of a traffic violation.
    7. Determine if there was a violation of law.
    8. Identify elements relevant to specific traffic offenses.
    9. Conduct a license check for an operator of a motor vehicle.
    10. Determine the status of an operator’s auto insurance.
    11. Check a vehicle for proper registration.
    12. Identify driver and/or vehicle licensing violations.
    13. Monitor traffic for violations.
    14. Visually estimate the speed of vehicles.
    15. Determine the speed of a vehicle by using the pacing technique (i.e., using speedometer).
    16. Follow a suspect vehicle to observe for a traffic violation.
    17. Make a determination about the appropriate action to be taken for a traffic offense.
    18. Identify possible stolen motor vehicles.
    19. Investigate to verify if a vehicle is in fact stolen.
    20. Stop vehicles to investigate traffic violations.
    21. Stop vehicle to investigate possible felony.
    22. Interview driver on a traffic stop.
    23. Inspect vehicles for conformance with the Michigan Vehicle Code.
    24. Participate in roadblocks.
    25. Assist stranded motorists.
    26. Remove an unattended vehicle obstructing traffic.
    27. Determine proper method for directing traffic.
    28. Direct traffic safely.
    29. Explain to a traffic offender state traffic vehicle laws and procedures at a traffic stop.
    30. Issue verbal warnings to traffic violators.
    31. Complete a uniform law citation.
    32. Issue a citation and collect bond (if necessary) for a traffic violation.
    33. Make a custodial traffic arrest when appropriate.
    34. Determine what constitutes an OWI/OUID driving related offense.
    35. Identify those traffic related offenses where alcohol or controlled substances in the blood are admissible.
    36. Identify the elements necessary in order to obtain an OWI conviction.
    37. Determine if an arrest can be made for an OWI related driving offense at the scene of a traffic crash.
    38. Demonstrate knowledge of the implied consent law.
    39. Demonstrate knowledge of case law relevant to OWI.
    40. Establish reasonable suspicion of OWI violation prior to a traffic stop.
    41. Decide if a suspect is in violation of OWI law by checking for behavioral signs of intoxication.
    42. Administer the accepted field sobriety test.
    43. Arrest an OWI suspect using proper field procedures.
    44. Process an OWI/OUID suspect using proper stationhouse procedures.
    45. Process an OWI/OUID refusal suspect using proper stationhouse procedures.
    46. Test blood alcohol content using the evidentiary breath test instrument.
    47. Arrange for obtaining a blood or urine sample for a sobriety test.
    48. Complete an officer’s report of refusal to submit to chemical test form (DI-93) if the suspect refuses a chemical test.
    49. Complete an alcohol influence report form.
    50. Complete a blood, breath, urine test report form.
    51. Complete an OWI uniform law citation.
    52. Complete an OWI arrest report.
    53. Identify the elements of a motor vehicle crash.
    54. Determine if drivers have fulfilled their responsibilities as mandated by law.
    55. Determine whether an officer has authority to take enforcement action for a traffic crash.
    56. Take precautions to prevent additional crashes at traffic crash scene.
    57. Set priorities for action at a traffic crash scene.
    58. Request assistance at a traffic crash scene.
    59. Direct activities at the scene of a traffic crash investigation.
    60. Secure the traffic crash scene to protect evidence.
    61. Determine whether to photograph the traffic crash scene.
    62. Complete the state of Michigan Traffic Crash Report form (UD-l0).
    63. Identify persons involved in a traffic crash.
    64. Identify the owner of a vehicle involved in a traffic crash.
    65. Locate witnesses to a traffic crash.
    66. Interview persons involved in a traffic crash.
    67. Draw field sketch at scene of a traffic crash.
    68. Take measurements at a traffic crash scene for field sketch.
    69. Diagram a traffic crash scene.
    70. Search the traffic crash scene for physical evidence.
    71. Collect and document physical evidence from a traffic crash scene.
    72. Identify point(s) of impact at a traffic crash scene.
    73. Measure skid marks.
    74. Inspect vehicles for fresh damage.
    75. Test the operating condition of a traffic crash vehicle’s equipment.
    76. Demonstrate an understanding of the relationship between types of crashes and the injury/trauma occurring to unrestrained occupants.
    77. Follow up the extent of personal injuries resulting from a traffic crash.
    78. Review the traffic crash with crash investigator(s).
    79. Determine the contributing factors to a traffic crash.
    80. Determine fault in a traffic crash.
    81. Issue a citation(s) in a traffic crash.
    82. Demonstrate an understanding of the theory of RADAD and LIDAR.
    83. Demonstrate the ability to conduct a Standardized Field Sobriety Test.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate competency in special operations.

    Objectives:

    1. Patrol locations on beat that are potentially hazardous to citizens.
    2. Respond to a hazardous material incident safely and properly.
    3. Coordinate actions with public service personnel arriving to assist in an emergency (non-hazardous material) situation.
    4. Evacuate persons from a dangerous area.
    5. Secure accident and disaster scenes.
    6. Demonstrate an understanding of the common characteristics of explosive devices.
    7. Identify explosive devices.
    8. Demonstrate an understanding of the response protocols to a bomb threat.
    9. Respond to a bombing incident.
    10. Respond to labor/management disputes.
    11. Control non-violent crowds.
    12. Patrol areas containing marchers or demonstrators.
    13. Control hostile groups.
    14. Patrol riot-stricken or civil disturbance areas.
    15. Confront groups of agitated people in riot formation.
    16. Perform duties while wearing heavy equipment.
    17. Physically restrain crowds.
    18. Control non-violent crowds.
    19. Control hostile groups.
    20. Control groups of agitated people in riot formation.
    21. Recruit confidential informants.
    22. Conduct surveillance of individuals or locations.
    23. Execute raids.
    24. Respond to a barricaded gunman/hostage situation.
    25. Describe the benefits of understanding Michigan’s environmental laws.
    26. Identify an environmental crime.
    27. Use the Michigan penal code (MCLA/MSA) to identify environmental statutes.
    28. Make an appropriate and safe response when observing a violation of the environmental statutes.
    29. Explain why the best tools in investigating an environmental crime are standard investigative techniques.
    30. Define the purpose and structure of the incident command (ICS) system.
    31. Define the terminology associated with the incident command system.
    32. Describe the major functions of the incident command system.
    33. Describe the role of law enforcement as part of the incident command structure.
    34. Explain the key provisions of Michigan’s emergency management act.
    35. Participate in a classroom-facilitated discussion of a simulated emergency situation.
    36. Discuss the characteristics of modern terrorism.
    37. Identify domestic and international terrorist groups.
    38. Recognize local terrorist targets.
    39. Initiate practical measures for preventing terrorist attacks.
    40. Define terrorist pre-incident indicators.
    41. Recognize the importance of gathering information regarding potential terrorist activities.
    42. Explain the legal implications regarding terrorist activities.
    43. Define weapons of mass destruction (WMD).
    44. Identify the five types of WMD material.
    45. Define the characteristics of chemical agents as weapons of mass destruction.
    46. Define the characteristics of biological agents.
    47. Define the characteristics of nuclear/radiological materials as weapons of mass destruction.
    48. Discuss explosive devices within the context of terrorism awareness.
    49. Respond to a known or unknown WMD attack.
    50. Discuss the basic dynamics and issues involved in a rapid response to an ongoing act of violence.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Sessions and Topic:

    1. Investigation
      1. Introduction to Investigation
      2. Substantive Criminal Law
      3. Criminal Procedure
      4. Investigation
      5. Court Functions and Civil Law
      6. Crime Scene Process
      7. Special Investigations
    2. Patrol Procedures
      1. Patrol Operations
      2. Ethics In Policing and Interpersonal Relations
      3. Patrol Techniques
      4. Report Writing
      5. Juveniles
    3. Detention and Prosecution
      1. Receiving and Booking Process
      2. Case Prosecution
      3. Civil Process
    4. Police Skills
      1. First Aid
      2. Firearms
      3. Police Physical Skills
      4. Fitness and Wellness
      5. Emergency Vehicle Operation
    5. Traffic
      1. Motor Vehicle Law
      2. Vehicle Stops
      3. Traffic Control and Enforcement
      4. Operating While Intoxicated
      5. Motor Vehicle Traffic Crash Investigation
    6. Special Operations
      1. Emergency Preparedness/Disaster Control
      2. Civil Disorders
      3. Tactical Operations
      4. Environmental Crimes
      5. Terrorism Awareness

    Primary Faculty
    Hliebay, Eugene
    Secondary Faculty
    Hliebay, Eugene
    Associate Dean
    Lopez, Michael
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


Legal Assistant

  
  • LEGA 2010 - Michigan Legal System & Ethics

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: None

    This course provides a general orientation to the Michigan Legal Systems: its courts, processes, and procedures. The Federal Court system is also reviewed. Also included are an in-depth study of the Michigan Rules of Professional Conduct and their application to attorneys and legal assistants; review of the Code of Judicial Conduct and its application to all Michigan judges; ethical responsibilities of legal assistants arising from the Rules and Judicial Canons.

    Contact Hours: 2
    Billable Contact Hours: 2
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to distinguish the differences in the names, jurisdictions and locations of Michigan and federal court systems:

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. explain the Michigan Supreme Court.
    2. explain the Michigan Court of Appeals.
    3. explain the Michigan Circuit Courts.
    4. explain the Michigan Family Courts.
    5. explain the Michigan Probate Courts.
    6. explain the Michigan District Courts.
    7. explain the U.S. Supreme Court.
    8. explain the Circuit Courts of Appeal.
    9. explain the Federal District Courts.
    10. explain the Federal Specialty Courts.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able explain the names, jurisdiction, and locations of the following Michigan and federal court systems.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Identify the Michigan Supreme Court.
    2. Identify the Michigan Court of Appeals.
    3. Identify the Michigan Circuit Courts.
    4. Identify the Michigan Family Courts.
    5. Identify the Michigan Probate Courts.
    6. Identify the Michigan District Courts.
    7. Identify the U.S. Supreme Court.
    8. Identify the Circuit Courts of Appeal.
    9. Identify the Federal District Courts.
    10. Identify the Federal Specialty Courts.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to apply the Michigan Rules of Professional Conduct to real-life situations.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Identify the rules of professional conduct and their applications to real life situations.
    2. Identify the rationale for the rules of professional conduct.
    3. Explain how the rules of professional conduct apply to real life situations.
    4. Explain the rationale for the rules of professional conduct.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to e-file a document on a training platform in a court system.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Create a document.
    2. Submit the document.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to distinguish types of substantive law.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Identify the types of substantive law.
    2. Select appropriate responses to substantive law situations.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Session and Topic:

    1.  
      1. Introduction to the Study of Law
      2. The Role of the Paralegal
      3. Sources of the Law
      4. Classification of the Law
      5. Structure of the Court System
      6. Civil Litigation
    2.  
      1. Finding and Interpreting Statutory Law
      2. Finding and Interpreting Court Opinions
      3. Finding the Law
      4. Applying the Law
      5. Legal Ethics
    3.  
      1. Tort
      2. Contract Law
      3. Property and Estate Law
      4. Laws Affecting Business
      5. Family Law
      6. Criminal Law and Procedure

    Primary Faculty
    Manatine, Jennifer R.
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Johnson, Elise
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • LEGA 2030 - Legal Research & Writing 1

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: BLAW 1090 and LEGA 2010

    LEGA 2030 provides students with the necessary skills in utilizing a law library and conducting legal research, including computer-assisted research. Students will analyze facts to determine legal issues and apply the law to discuss these issues by preparing a legal memorandum. Using “Plain English” in drafting the legal written product and ethical issues in good legal writing are emphasized.

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to distinguish between primary authorities and secondary authorities at a state level.

    Objectives:

    1. Define primary authorities and secondary authorities.
    2. Identify the types of primary authorities and secondary authorities.
    3. Distinguish between “official” publications and “unofficial” publications.
    4. Differentiate between the state court systems.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to prepare a legal memorandum of law based on factual situation.

    Objectives:

    1. Write a statement of facts based on a client’s factual situation.
    2. Formulate issue(s) based upon those facts.
    3. Answer those issue(s) with a brief statement of the rule of law.
    4. Analyze the legal authorities to the factual situation.
    5. Summarize the legal conclusion.
    6. Verify authorities used are still valid law.
    7. Use proper citation format.
    8. Define a legal memorandum

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to answer legal questions by using books in a law library.

    Objectives:

    1. Locate state legal authorities.
    2. Distinguish between primary authorities and secondary authorities.
    3. Identify if issue(s) is/are one(s) of federal law or state law.
    4. Identify if issue(s) is/are criminal law or civil law.
    5. Gather documents from a citation.
    6. Use a “Descriptive Word Approach”, “Title/Topic Approach”, or “Popular Name Approach” to locate statutory law.
    7. Use a “Descriptive Word Approach”, “Topic Approach”, “Table of Case Approach”, and “Case of Point Approach” to locate case law in the digest.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to answer legal questions through use of computer assisted research.

    Objectives:

    1. Locate state legal authorities
    2. Gather documents from a state citation.
    3. Differentiate between Boolean or freestyle (natural language) searches.
    4. Choose appropriate jurisdiction database for finding legal authorities.
    5. Distinguish between primary authorities and secondary authorities.
    6. Verify legal authorities are still valid law.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, given a legal issue the students will be able locate appropriate case(s).

    Objectives:

    1. Identify an issue from a given factual situation.
    2. List the steps used in case research.
    3. Utilize “IRAC” method.
    4. Verify that the case is still valid (Shepardizing).

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Session and Topic:

    1. Finding the Law
      1. Law libraries
      2. Sources of law
      3. Primary and secondary sources
      4. Law book publishers
    2. State Court Systems
      1. State court system
      2. Jurisdiction
      3. Standing requirement
    3. Statutory Law
      1. State legislation
      2. Descriptive word approach
      3. Title/topic approach
      4. Popular name approach
    4. Case Law and Judicial Opinions
      1. Elements of a case
      2. Publication of State cases
      3. Star paging
      4. National Reporter System sets
      5. Parallel citations
      6. Briefing cases
    5. Use of Digests, Annotated Law Reports, and Words and Phrases
      1. West’s topic name and key numbering system
      2. Topic and key number by using the “descriptive word” approach, topic approach, “table of cases” approach, or “case on point” approach
      3. State digests and special digests
      4. American Law Reports
      5. Words and Phrases
    6. Updating and Validating Your Research
      1. Shepardizing cases, statutes, constitutions, administrative regulations, local ordinances, and court rules
      2. Electronic updating of legal authorities
    7. Overview of the Research Process
      1. The beginning research stages
      2. Formulating issues and thinking things through
      3. Use of the TAPP rule and asking the Who, What, Where, When, Why, and How questions
    8. Computer Training
      1. Research using Boolean or freestyle (natural language) searches, including statutory and case law
      2. Shepardizing electronically
      3. Obtaining documents from a citation
    9. Legal Memoranda
      1. Definition
      2. Format
      3. Preparation
    10. Secondary Authorities
      1. Encyclopedias, periodicals, treatises, and restatements
      2. Attorneys general opinions, legal dictionaries, directories, form books, uniform laws, loose-leaf services, and jury instructions
      3. Conducting research
      4. Updating
      5. How they are kept current
    11. Special Research Issues
      1. State legislative history
      2. Compiling legislative history
      3. Obtaining documents
      4. Administrative law
      5. Municipal research
      6. State court rules
    12. Legal Citation Form
      1. Bluebook and ALWD citation system
      2. Citation rules for both primary and secondary authorities
      3. Special citation issues
      4. Cite-checking

    Primary Faculty
    Manatine, Jennifer R.
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Johnson, Elise
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • LEGA 2040 - Legal Research & Writing 2

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: LEGA 2030

    LEGA 2040 is a continuation of Legal Research & Writing 1. Students will further develop skills in utilizing a law library and conducting legal research, including computer-assisted research. Students will also analyze facts to determine legal arguments and apply the law to discuss these arguments by preparing a legal brief.

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to distinguish between primary authorities and secondary authorities at a federal level.

    Objectives: the student will:

    1. Define primary authorities and secondary authorities.
    2. Identify the types of primary authorities and secondary authorities.
    3. Distinguish between “official” publications and “unofficial” publications.
    4. Differentiate between the various federal court systems.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to prepare a legal brief based on a factual situation.

    Objectives: the student will:

    1. Define a legal brief.
    2. Write a statement of facts based on a client’s factual situation.
    3. Formulate legal arguments based upon those facts.
    4. Discuss the legal arguments in a persuasive manner.
    5. Analyze the legal authorities to the factual situation.
    6. Summarize the legal conclusion.
    7. Verify authorities used are still valid law.
    8. Use proper citation format.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to answer legal questions by using books in a law library.

    Objectives: the student will:

    1. Locate federal legal authorities
    2. Distinguish between primary authorities and secondary authorities.
    3. Identify if issue(s) is/are one(s) of federal law or state law.
    4. Identify if issue(s) is/are one(s) of criminal law or civil law.
    5. Gather documents from a citation.
    6. Use a “Descriptive Word Approach,” “Title/Topic Approach,” or “Popular Name Approach” to locate statutory law.
    7. Use a “Descriptive Word Approach,” “Topic Approach,” “Table of Case Approach,” and “Case of Point Approach” to locate case law.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to answer legal questions through use of computer-assisted research.

    Objectives: the student will:

    1. Locate federal legal authorities
    2. Gather documents from a federal citation.
    3. Differentiate between Boolean or freestyle (natural language) searches.
    4. Choose appropriate jurisdiction database for finding legal authorities.
    5. Distinguish between primary authorities and secondary authorities.
    6. Verify legal authorities are still valid law.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to draft a legal brief.

    Objectives: the student will:

    1. Distinguish between the various legal documents, such as memorandums of law or briefs of law that an attorney may need.
    2. Define the various legal documents, memorandums of law, or briefs of law.
    3. Identify the various legal documents, memorandums of law, or briefs of law.
    4. Differentiate between the various legal documents, memorandums of law, or briefs of law.
    5. Explain what sections are needed in the various documents, memorandums of law, or briefs of law.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Session and Topic:

    1. Finding the Law
      1. Law libraries
      2. Sources of law
      3. Primary and secondary sources
      4. Law book publishers
    2. Federal Court Systems
      1. Federalism
      2. Federal court structure
      3. Jurisdiction
      4. Standing requirement
      5. Federal courts
      6. Updating
    3. Statutory Law
      1. Federal legislation
      2. Descriptive word approach
      3. Title/topic approach
      4. Popular name approach
    4. Case Law and Judicial Opinions
      1. Elements of a case
      2. Publication of Federal cases
      3. Star paging
      4. Parallel citations
      5. Briefing cases
    5. Use of Digests, Annotated Law Reports, and Words and Phrases
      1. West’s topic name and key numbering system
      2. Topic and key number by using the “descriptive word” approach, topic approach, “table of cases” approach, or “case on point” approach
      3. Special digests and Federal digests
      4. American Law Reports
      5. Words and Phrases
    6. Updating and Validating Your Research
      1. Shepardizing cases, statutes, constitutions, administrative regulations, local ordinances, and court rules
      2. Electronic updating of legal authorities
    7. Overview of the Research Process
      1. The beginning research stages
      2. Formulating issues and thinking things through
      3. Use of the TAPP rule and asking the Who, What, Where, When, Why, and How questions
    8. Computer Training
      1. Research using Boolean or freestyle (natural language) searches, including statutory and case law
      2. Shepardizing electronically
      3. Obtaining documents from a citation
    9. Legal Brief
      1. Definition
      2. Format
      3. Preparation
    10. Secondary Authorities
      1. Encyclopedias, periodicals, treatises, and restatements
      2. Attorneys general opinions, legal dictionaries, directories, form books, uniform laws, loose-leaf services, and jury instructions
      3. Conducting research
      4. Updating
      5. How they are kept current
    11. Special Research Issues
      1. Federal legislative history
      2. Compiling legislative history
      3. Obtaining documents
      4. Presidential proclamations and executive orders
      5. Administrative law
      6. International law and its sources
      7. Treaties
      8. Municipal research
      9. Federal court rules
    12. Legal Citation Form
      1. Bluebook and ALWD citation system
      2. Citation rules for both primary and secondary authorities
      3. Special citation issues
      4. Cite-checking

    Primary Faculty
    Manatine, Jennifer R.
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Johnson, Elise
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • LEGA 2090 - Legal Procedure

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: LEGA 2010

    This course covers the step-by-step process on how to assist the lawyer in a civil lawsuit. It introduces the students to investigating and planning the litigation; pre-trial litigation; settlement, trial, and post-trial proceedings utilizing federal and state court rules.

    Contact Hours: 4
    Billable Contact Hours: 4
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to distinguish between federal and state court systems as it pertains to civil law.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Identify the federal court system.
    2. Identify the state court system.
    3. Explain the duties and powers of the judicial branch.
    4. Distinguish between civil and criminal law.

    Outcome 2: Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to distinguish between civil law and civil procedure.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Define civil law and civil procedure.
    2. Distinguish between the different types of civil actions.
    3. Identify the different types of civil actions.
    4. Explain the different types of civil actions.
    5. Identify the Michigan Court Rules of Procedure.
    6. Explain the different Michigan Court Rules of procedure.
    7. Analyze the Michigan Court Rules of Procedure.

    Outcome 3: Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to differentiate between the different types of Alternative Dispute Resolution.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Define the different types of Alternative Dispute Resolution.
    2. Identify the different types of Alternative Dispute Resolution.
    3. Explain the different types of Alternative Dispute Resolution.
    4. Distinguish between the different types of Alternative Dispute Resolution.

    Outcome 4: Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to distinguish between the provisional remedies clients may obtain in a civil matter.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Define the different types of remedies clients may receive in a civil matter.
    2. Identify the different types of remedies clients may receive in a civil matter.
    3. Discuss the different types of remedies clients may receive in a civil matter.
    4. Explain the different types of remedies clients may receive in a civil matter.
    5. Distinguish the different types of remedies clients may receive in a civil matter.

    Outcome 5: Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to prepare legal documents for trial, for appeal, or for alternative dispute resolution.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Gather information or evidence concerning a client’s factual situation in a civil matter.
    2. Identify the necessary documents needed for trial, for appeal, or for an alternative dispute resolution that involve a civil matter.
    3. Explain the necessary documents needed for trial, for appeal, or for an alternative dispute resolution that involve a civil matter.
    4. Compose the necessary documents needed for trial, for appeal, or for an alternative dispute resolution that involve a civil matter.
    5. Analyze the documents needed for trial, for appeal, or for an alternative dispute resolution that involve a civil matter.
    6. Assist attorneys in preparing a client for trial, for appeal, or for an alternative dispute resolution involving a civil matter.
    7. Apply the Michigan Court Rules of Procedure.
    8. Apply the different types of Alternative Dispute Resolution.
    9. Apply the different types of remedies clients may receive in a civil matter.

    Outcome 6: Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to organize evidence and factual information for trial, for appeal, or for alternative dispute resolution.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Gather information or evidence concerning a client’s factual situation in a civil matter.
    2. Identify the necessary documents needed for trial, for appeal, or for an alternative dispute resolution that involve a civil matter.
    3. Explain the necessary documents needed for trial, for appeal, or for an alternative dispute resolution that involve a civil matter.
    4. Compose the necessary documents needed for trial, for appeal, or for an alternative dispute resolution that involve a civil matter.
    5. Analyze the documents needed for trial, for appeal, or for an alternative dispute resolution that involve a civil matter.
    6. Assist attorneys in preparing a client for trial, for appeal, or for an alternative dispute resolution involving a civil matter.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Session and Topic:

    1. Introduction to Litigation and Pleadings
      1. The Litigation Process
      2. The Paralegal’s Role
      3. Computers and Litigation
      4. Ethical Considerations
    2. Informal Fact Gathering and Investigation
      1. Structuring Fact Investigations
      2. Client Interviews
      3. Exhibit Acquisition
      4. Witness Interviews
      5. Expert Reviews
      6. Computerized Fact Gathering
    3. Case Evaluation and Strategy
      1. Attorney-Client Agreement
      2. Planning Litigation
      3. Prefiling Requirements
    4. Parties and Jurisdiction
      1. Parties
      2. Joinder of Parties
      3. Subject Matier Jurisdiction
      4. Personal Jurisdiction
      5. Venue
    5. Pleadings
      1. Pleading Requirements
      2. Complaints
      3. Answers
      4. Counterclaims
      5. Replies
      6. Cross Claims
      7. Third Party Practice
    6. Law and Motions
      1. Motion Requirements
      2. Continuances
      3. Substitutions of Parties
      4. Removal
    7. Motion Practice
      1. Summary Judgment
      2. Dismissals and Defaults
      3. Consolidation
    8. Provisional Remedies
      1. TROs and Preliminary Injunctions
      2. Writs of Attachment
      3. Writs of Possession
      4. Lis Pendens
    9. Evidence
      1. The Paralegal’s Role
      2. Relevance
      3. Hearsay
      4. Exceptions
      5. Witnesses, Exhibits, etc.
      6. Privileges
    10. Discovery
      1. Scope of Discovery
      2. Interrogatories
      3. Request for Production
      4. Depositions
      5. Discovery Motions
    11. Settlements
      1. Introduction
      2. Settlement Contracts
    12. Trial Preparation, Trial and Appeal
      1. The Paralegal’s Role
      2. Pretrial
      3. Trial Organization
      4. Preparation of Witnesses
      5. Exhibits
      6. Appeal
    13. Enforcement of Judgments
      1. Demand Letter
      2. Writs of Execution
      3. Garnishment
    14. Alternative Dispute Resolution
      1. Mediation
      2. Arbitration

    Primary Faculty
    Manatine, Jennifer R.
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Johnson, Elise
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • LEGA 2100 - Mechanics of Real Estate Law

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: LEGA 2010

    This course covers the law of real property. It emphasizes the preparation of various real estate documents such as deeds, leases, closing statements, etc.

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify the characteristics of Michigan Real Property.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. List and explain the characteristics of real property.
    2. Explain the characteristics of real property
    3. Differentiate between real property and personal property.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to distinguish between the different types of ownership for real property.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Identify the different types of ownership for real property.
    2. Explain the different types of ownership for real property.
    3. Define the different types of ownership for real property.
    4. Analyze the different types of ownership for real property.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain the ways to acquire title to real property.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Identify the different ways to transfer title to real property.
    2. Define the various ways to acquire title to real property.
    3. List the various ways to transfer title to real property.
    4. Distinguish between the different ways to transfer title to real property.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain the different types of burdens on land.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the different types of burdens on land.
    2. Define the different types of burdens on land.
    3. Distinguish between the different types of burdens on land.
    4. Describe the different types of burdens on land.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain the different types of leasehold estates (landlord/tenant matters).

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Identify the different types of leasehold estates.
    2. Define the different types of leasehold estates.
    3. Differentiate the different types of leasehold estates.
    4. Describe the rights or duties a tenant or landlord has in leasehold estates.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to prepare Michigan Real Property documents or forms for a client’s situation.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Gather information needed to formulate appropriate forms or documents concerning a client’s situation.
    2. Locate appropriate Michigan Real Property documents or forms for a client’s situation.
    3. Identify appropriate Michigan Real Property documents or forms for a client’s situation.
    4. Distinguish between the various Michigan Real Property documents or forms for a client’s situation.
    5. Analyze characteristics of real property, which affect the value of real property.
    6. Analyze appropriate Michigan Real Property documents or forms for a client’s situation.
    7. Use appropriate Michigan Real Property documents or forms for a client’s situation.
    8. Apply the different types of ownership for real property to legal situations.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Session and Topic:

    1. Definition and Nature of Real Property
    2. Fixtures
    3. Forms of Ownership
    4. Burdens on Land - easements, liens, restrictive, covenants, government regulations, profits, air and mineral rights, riparian rights
    5. Agency Relationships in Real Estate
    6. Real Estate Contracts (Law & Forms)
    7. Transfer of Title (Law & Forms)
    8. Real Estate Financing - Mortgage, promissory note, foreclosure forfeiture
    9. Real Estate Closing (Forms & Procedures)
    10. Land Use Controls - zoning, building codes, private restrictions
    11. Leaseholds (Landlord/Tenant Matters)

    Primary Faculty
    Manatine, Jennifer R.
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Johnson, Elise
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • LEGA 2110 - Principles of Family Law

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: LEGA 2010

    This course provides a study of the marriage relationship; legal problems with children; dissolution of marriage; custody; legitimacy; adoption; change of name; guardianship; support; court procedures; and separation agreements.

    Contact Hours: 2
    Billable Contact Hours: 2
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain the family law court structure and procedures.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Identify Circuit Court (Family Division) and Friend of the Court structure and procedures.
    2. Identify and apply Friend of the Court structure and procedures.
    3. Define mediation and arbitration.
    4. Distinguish between mediation and arbitration.
    5. Describe the mediation process as well as the arbitration process.
    6. Apply Circuit Court (Family Division) and Friend of the Court structure and procedures to legal situations.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain the differences between marital rights and responsibilities and legal recognition of non-marital families.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Differentiate between marital and non-marital families.
    2. Identify marital rights and responsibilities and non-marital families’ rights and responsibilities.
    3. Define the legal concepts of dower, domicile, spousal elective rights, and tenancy by the entirety.
    4. List the elements for a common law marriage.
    5. Identify the requirements in Michigan for a valid marriage.
    6. Define a prenuptial agreement.
    7. List the elements that establish a valid prenuptial agreement.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain the difference between a divorce, a judicial separation, and an annulment.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Define a divorce, a judicial separation, or an annulment.
    2. Distinguish between a divorce, a judicial separation, or an annulment.
    3. Identify the procedures for filing for a divorce, a judicial separation, or an annulment.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to analyze appropriate family law concerning termination of or emancipation of parental rights and responsibilities and restoration of parental rights.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Apply the Parental Responsibility Act and the Parental Rights Restoration Act to a legal situation.
    2. Explain the Paternity Act and the Parental Rights Restoration Act.
    3. Compile documents needed for filing a paternity action.
    4. Explain the rights of a putative father.
    5. Identify situations involving termination of or emancipation of parental rights and responsibilities.
    6. Explain emancipation, paternity, order of affiliation, affidavit of paternity, and child born-out-of-wedlock.
    7. Apply Michigan law concerning test tube conception to a legal scenario.
    8. Apply Michigan law concerning surrogate parenting to a legal scenario.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to analyze the differences between child custody, visitation, adoption, and child support matters.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Define child custody, visitation, adoption, and child support.
    2. Identify matters concerning child custody, visitation, adoption, or child support.
    3. Locate appropriate Michigan family law pertaining to child custody, visitation, adoption, or child support matters.
    4. Apply appropriate Michigan family law pertaining to child custody, visitation, adoption, or child support matters.
    5. Distinguish between legal and physical custody and joint legal and physical custody.
    6. Explain legal and physical custody and joint legal and physical custody.
    7. Distinguish between the different types of adoption.
    8. Explain the procedures necessary for obtaining modification of child custody or child support orders.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to prepare documents involving family law for a divorce, for trial, or for Friend of the Court.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Gather information or evidence concerning a client’s factual situation concerning a family dilemma.
    2. Identify the necessary documents needed for a divorce, for trial, or for Friend of the Court that involve family matters.
    3. Compose the necessary documents needed for a divorce, for trial, or for Friend of the Court that involve family matters.
    4. Assist attorneys in preparing a client for a divorce, for trial, or for a matter before the Friend of the Court.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Session and Topic:

    1. Marriage rights and responsibilities, ante nuptial agreements, Dower Family Support Act, Family Counseling Act
    2. Paternity, blood-testing, rights of putative fathers, test-tube conception, Surrogate Parenting Act
    3. Adoption law and procedures
    4. Legal recognition of non-marital families
    5. Divorce, judicial separation, annulment, filing, and initial procedures
    6. Child custody, visitation, grandparent visitation
    7. Child support and support collection procedures
    8. Friend of the Court structure and procedures
    9. Discovery, alimony, property settlement
    10. Mediation and court rules and the divorce process
    11. Motions, judgments, QDROS, QMSO, post judgment procedures
    12. Parental Rights Restoration Act, emancipation, Parental Responsibility Act
    13. Torts - legal status of women, personal protection orders, domestic violence laws

    Primary Faculty
    Manatine, Jennifer R.
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Johnson, Elise
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • LEGA 2130 - Proceedings Under the Federal Bankruptcy Code & Debt Collection

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: LEGA 2010

    This course covers the law of debt collection practice and procedure in Michigan and a study of the Federal Bankruptcy Code. It emphasizes the many forms and procedures used by attorneys in Michigan debt collection practice and Federal Bankruptcy practice. Students prepare a practice set of bankruptcy forms for a liquidation case.

    Contact Hours: 2
    Billable Contact Hours: 2
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to explain the difference between collection law and bankruptcy law.

    Objectives:

    1. Define collection law and bankruptcy law.
    2. Differentiate between a collection matter and a bankruptcy matter.
    3. Identify a client’s situation involving a bankruptcy matter or a collection matter.
    4. Identify the office systems in a collection case.
    5. Identify the bankruptcy court.
    6. Explain the duties and powers of the bankruptcy court.

    Outcome 2: Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to analyze the different ways that debtors may file for bankruptcy under the Federal Bankruptcy Code.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the different ways that debtors may file for bankruptcy under the Federal Bankruptcy Code.
    2. Define the different ways that debtors may file for bankruptcy under the Federal Bankruptcy Code.
    3. Differentiate between the different ways that debtors may file for bankruptcy under the Federal Bankruptcy Code.
    4. Analyze the different ways that debtors may file for bankruptcy under the Federal Bankruptcy Code.
    5. Explain the different ways that debtors may file for bankruptcy under the Federal Bankruptcy Code.

    Outcome 3: Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to prepare Bankruptcy forms for a liquidation case or a Chapter 13 Plan under the Federal Bankruptcy Code.

    Objectives:

    1. Gather information needed to formulate appropriate forms or documents concerning a client’s bankruptcy situation.
    2. Locate appropriate Bankruptcy documents or forms for a client’s liquidation matter or a Chapter 13 Plan.
    3. Identify appropriate Bankruptcy documents or forms for a client’s liquidation matter or a Chapter 13 Plan.
    4. Distinguish between the various Bankruptcy documents or forms for a client’s liquidation matter or a Chapter 13 Plan.
    5. Analyze appropriate Bankruptcy documents or forms for a client’s liquidation matter or a Chapter 13 Plan.
    6. Use appropriate Bankruptcy documents or forms for a client’s liquidation matter or a Chapter 13 Plan.
    7. Assist attorneys in preparing debtors for bankruptcy court.
    8. Communicate with a Trustee involving a debtor client’s situation.

    Outcome 4: Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to prepare court forms for a debtor client’s collection case in a state arena.

    Objectives:

    1. Gather information needed to formulate appropriate forms or documents concerning a client’s collection situation.
    2. Locate appropriate documents or forms for a client’s collection matter.
    3. Identify appropriate documents or forms for a client’s collection matter.
    4. Distinguish between the various documents or forms for a client’s collection matter.
    5. Analyze appropriate documents or forms for a client’s collection matter.
    6. Use appropriate documents or forms for a client’s collection matter.
    7. Assist attorneys in preparing debtors for a collection case.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Session and Topic:

    1. Overview of Bankruptcy process
    2. Common questions for Debtor’s Counsel from clients
    3. Preparation of a Chapter 7 bankruptcy case and commence preparing schedules
    4. Filing the case, Debtor’s obligations in filing the case, Meeting of creditor’s and examination, Debtor’s rights, Amendments, Reaffirmation Redemption, Surrender of collateral
    5. Discharge of debt’s, continue preparing schedules and application of information to schedules
    6. Chapter 13 bankruptcy
    7. Overview of debt collection process and the anatomy of a lawsuit in the Michigan Courts
    8. Debt Collection Process
      1. Fair Debt Collection Practice Act (Federal)
      2. Collection Practices Act (State)
      3. Collection Letters
      4. Role of the Legal Assistant
      5. Initiation of office procedures
      6. Commencement of Litigation - Michigan court rules, summons, complaint, affidavit of account default and consent judgments, answers and offer of judgment
      7. Discover, interrogatories, depositions, requests for admissions subpoenas and other discovery measures
      8. Trial Burden of proof, exhibits and witnesses
    9. Post Judgment Remedies
      1. Garnishments
      2. Executions
      3. Discovery subpoenas
      4. Creditors exams
      5. Obtaining appropriate financial information
      6. Orders to show cause and bench warrants

    Primary Faculty
    Manatine, Jennifer R.
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Johnson, Elise
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • LEGA 2140 - Estate Administration & Elder Law in Michigan

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: LEGA 2010

    (replaces but does not equate to LEGA 2120)

    This course presents information and procedures with respect to wills, trusts, estates, probate proceedings, conservatorships, administration of testate and intestate estates, analysis of the Estates and Protected Individuals Code (EPIC), will execution, life insurance, elder law, and estate planning.

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain the impact of elder law on estate planning.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the components of elder law.
    2. Define the components of elder law.
    3. Classify the components of elder law.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to categorize the different types of classes of property.

    Objectives:

    1. Define real property, personal property, tangible property, and intangible property.
    2. Distinguish the differences between real property, personal property, tangible property and intangible property.
    3. Classify characteristics between tangible property and intangible property.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain the differences between the passage of real property by operation of law, by will, by trust, and by court proceedings.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the passage of real property by operation of law (intestate succession), by will (testate succession), by trust (living and testamentary), and by probate court proceedings (decedent’s estates and conservatorships).
    2. Distinguish between the passage of real property by operation of law (intestate succession), by will (testate succession), by trust (living and testamentary), and by probate court proceedings (decedent’s estates and conservatorships).
    3. Define concepts of passage of real property by operation of law (intestate succession), by will (testate succession), by trust (living and testamentary), and by probate court proceedings (decedent’s estates and conservatorships).

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain the differences between the passage of personal property by operation of law, by will, by trust, and by court proceedings.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the passage of personal property by operation of law (intestate succession), by will (testate succession), by trust (living and testamentary), and by probate court proceedings (decedent’s estates and conservatorships).
    2. Distinguish between the passage of personal property by operation of law (intestate succession), by will (testate succession), by trust (living and testamentary), and by probate court proceedings (decedent’s estates and conservatorships).
    3. Define concepts of passage of personal property by operation of law (intestate succession), by will (testate succession), by trust (living and testamentary), and by probate court proceedings (decedent’s estates and conservatorships).

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to analyze the process of estate planning under the Estates and Protected Individuals Code (EPIC).

    Objectives:

    1. Identify Michigan law under EPIC.
    2. Apply Michigan law under EPIC to a client’s situation.
    3. Explain Michigan law under EPIC.
    4. Explain various components of probate law.
    5. Explain various components of elder law.
    6. Apply probate law to various scenarios.
    7. Apply elder law to various scenarios.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to prepare documents for estate planning in probate and in elder law situations.

    Objectives:

    1. Define estate planning.
    2. Gather client’s information concerning his/her estate.
    3. Locate appropriate forms for preparing an estate plan.
    4. Discuss ethical issues in estate planning.
    5. Identify ethical issues in estate planning.
    6. Explain the purposes of the estate planning documents.

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to prepare documents for probate court proceedings and elder law estate planning.

    Objectives:

    1. Gather client’s information.
    2. Locate appropriate forms for preparing petitions applications for probate proceedings.
    3. Differentiate between informal and formal probate proceedings.
    4. Organize documents for probate court proceedings.
    5. Organize documents for estate planning for elders.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Session and Topic:

    1. General Overview of Estate Planning and Estate Administration
    • Estate and Protected Individuals Code (EPIC)
    • Definitions of terms used in EPIC
    • Probate law
    1. General Overview of Elder Law
    • Competency
    • Cultural and generational issues
    • End of life decisions
    • Physical and financial abuse of elderly individuals
    • Medicare and Medicaid
    1. Sources of Property Real and Personal
    • Distinction between real and personal property
    • Distinction between tangible personal property and intangible personal property
    • Identification of personal property and real property
    1. The Laws of Succession
    • Distinction between intestate succession and testate succession
    • Passage by operation of law
    • Passage by will
    • Passage by trust
    • Passage by court proceedings
    1. Trusts
    • Types of trust
    • Elements of a trust
    • Distinction between revocable and irrevocable trusts
    1. Wills
    • Types of wills
    • Elements for holographic wills
    • Requirements/clauses for formal wills
    1. Estate Administration
    • Formal versus informal proceedings for estate administration
    • Probate forms required
    • Probate proceedings
    1. Taxation
    • Tax aspects in decedent’s estates
    • Various forms that may be needed in estate proceedings
    • Various forms that may be needed in elder law

    Primary Faculty
    Manatine, Jennifer R.
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Johnson, Elise
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • LEGA 2160 - Proceedings Under Administrative Agencies

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: LEGA 2010

    This course presents procedures for preparing cases for hearings before an administrative agency including researching appropriate regulations, preparing complaints and other phases of pleading, applying for execution of an order by the administrator, preparing claims for preliminary examination, providing data sought by administrative subpoena, taking depositions, and making discovery orders for preliminary examination.

    Contact Hours: 2
    Billable Contact Hours: 2
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain the importance of various federal and state administrative agencies.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Define administrative law.
    2. Identify federal administrative agencies and state administrative agencies.
    3. Differentiate between federal administrative agencies and state administrative agencies.
    4. Explain the origin of administrative law and agencies.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain the function federal or state administrative agencies serve in regulating certain professional businesses’ and private citizen’s activities.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Discuss the nature, formation, powers, and operation of state and federal agencies.
    2. Describe the investigative powers that can be exerted by federal or state administrative agencies.
    3. Identify the investigative powers that can be exerted by federal or state administrative agencies.
    4. Identify restrictive legislation to curb administrative agencies’ powers.
    5. Explain restrictive legislation to curb administrative agencies’ powers.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to prepare a case before state and federal administrative agencies.

    Objectives:: The student will:

    1. Identify the rules of procedure in preparing cases and practicing before state or federal administrative agencies.
    2. Apply the rules of procedure in practicing before state or federal administrative agencies.
    3. Discuss the remedies available to a private citizen or a professional business within the administrative arena.
    4. Identify the scope of judicial review.
    5. Explain the scope of judicial review.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to prepare documents for hearings before state administrative agencies that have most active litigation in the State of Michigan.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Identify certain state administrative agencies that have the most active litigation in the State of Michigan.
    2. Distinguish between certain state administrative agencies that have the most active litigation in the State of Michigan.
    3. Discuss those state administrative agencies that have the most active litigation in the State of Michigan.
    4. Apply the rules of procedure in preparing a case and in practicing before those state administrative agencies.
    5. Gather information from private citizens or from professional businesses to assist in preparing the necessary documents for hearings before the state administrative agencies.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Session and Topic:

    1. Origin of Administrative Law and Agencies
    2. Powers, Junctions, and Jurisdiction of Administrative Agencies
    3. Scope of Juridical Review
    4. Agency’s Investigative Powers
    5. Agencies Adoption of Informal Pretrial Systems and Procedures
    6. Administrative Procedures Act
    7. Open Meetings Act
    8. Freedom of Information Act
    9. Michigan Liquor Control Commission
    10. Michigan Unemployment Agency
    11. Bureau of Worker’s Disability Compensation
    12. Appellate Courts Authority to Review an Agency’s Decision

    Primary Faculty
    Manatine, Jennifer R.
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Johnson, Elise
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • LEGA 2170 - Criminal Law & Procedures

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: LEGA 2010

    This course covers Michigan and Federal criminal law principles and procedures. It examines the role and responsibilities of the Legal Assistant in aiding the attorney representing the criminally accused person in pre-trial, trial, and appellate proceedings.

    Contact Hours: 2
    Billable Contact Hours: 2
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon successful completion of this course, the students will be able to explain the duties and powers of the federal and state judicial branch.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Identify the federal and state court system.
    2. Distinguish between federal and state court systems as it pertains to both civil and criminal law.
    3. Distinguish between civil and criminal law.
    4. Identify the duties and powers of the judicial branch.

    Outcome 2: Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to explain the different aspects of criminal law and criminal procedure.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Define criminal law and criminal procedure.
    2. Distinguish between criminal law and criminal procedure.
    3. Distinguish between the different types of crimes and defenses.
    4. Identify the different types of crimes and defenses.
    5. Identify the constitutional aspects of criminal procedure.
    6. Explain the constitutional aspects of criminal procedure.
    7. Identify the constitutional defenses.

    Outcome 3: Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to explain the criminal justice system.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Identify the criminal justice system.
    2. Identify the major elements of a criminal offense.
    3. Explain the major elements of a criminal offense.
    4. Define criminal law and criminal procedure.
    5. Explain criminal procedures.
    6. Identify the duties of defense counsel and the paralegals that assist them.
    7. Explain the duties of defense counsel and the paralegals that assist them.

    Outcome 4: Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to prepare documents for either a trial or for the juvenile justice system.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Gather information or evidence concerning a client’s factual situation in a criminal matter.
    2. Compose the necessary documents needed for trial or for the juvenile justice system that involve a criminal matter.
    3. Identify the necessary documents needed for trial or for the juvenile justice system that involve a criminal matter.
    4. Assist attorneys in preparing a client for trial or for a matter before the juvenile justice system.
    5. Explain the duties of defense counsel and paralegals assisting them in a trial or before the juvenile justice system.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Session and Topic:

    1. U.S. Legal System
      1. Federalism
      2. Separation of Powers
      3. Structure of Court System
      4. Duties and Powers of Judicial Branch
      5. Compare Civil and Criminal
    2. Criminal Law
      1. Distinction between Criminal Law and Criminal Procedure
      2. Power of Government to Regulate Behavior
      3. Purpose of Punishing Criminal Law Violators
      4. Mens Rea
      5. Actus Rea
    3. Crimes Against the Person
      1. Studying Crimes
      2. Homicide
      3. Assault and Battery
      4. Mayhem
      5. Sex Crimes
      6. Kidnapping and False Imprisonment
      7. Stalking
      8. Civil Rights and Hate Crimes
    4. Crimes Against Property and Habitation
      1. Arson
      2. Burglary
      3. Theft Crimes
      4. Crimes against Public Morality
      5. Crimes against Public Order
      6. Crimes against Admin. of Government
      7. Crimes against Sovereignty and Security
      8. Crimes against Environment
    5. Parties and Inchoate Offenses
      1. Parties to Crimes
      2. Inchoate Crimes
    6. Factual and Statutory Defenses
      1. Defenses Defined and Aff. Defenses
      2. Insanity
      3. Duress and Necessity
      4. Use of Force
      5. Infancy, Intoxication, Mistake
      6. Entrapment, Alibi and Consent, Statute of Limitations
    7. Constitutional Defenses
      1. Double Jeopardy
      2. Fifth Amendment Defenses
      3. Due Process and Equal Protection
      4. Vagueness and Overbreadth
      5. Ex Post Facto, etc.
      6. 1st Amendment and Religion
      7. 1st Amendment and Speech
      8. Privacy and Other Rights
    8. Criminal Procedure
      1. Common Law, Adversarial and Accusatorial System
      2. Due Process Model
      3. Participants
      4. Liab. of Government and Officials
    9. Const. Aspects of Criminal Procedures
      1. Incorporation
      2. Expansion of Rights
      3. Exclusionary Rule
      4. Fruit of Poisonous Tree
      5. Standing
      6. State Const. and New Federalism
    10. Searches, Seizures and Arrests
      1. 4th Amendment
      2. Probable Cause
      3. Searches and Seizures
      4. Arrests
    11. Interrogation and Other Law Enforcement Practices
      1. Interrogations, Confessions and Admissions
      2. Electronic Surveillance
      3. Pretrial ID Procedures
    12. Pretrial Process
      1. Discovery and Investigation
      2. Arrest
      3. Complaint
      4. Initial Appearance
      5. Pretrial Release and Detention
      6. Preliminary Hearing
      7. Formal Charge
      8. Arraignment
      9. Pretrial Activity
      10. Extradition and Detainers
      11. Removal
    13. Trial
      1. Trial Rights of Defendants
      2. Trial Procedure
    14. Sentencing and Appeal
      1. Sentencing
      2. Post Conviction Remedies

    Primary Faculty
    Manatine, Jennifer R.
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Johnson, Elise
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • LEGA 2210 - Electronic Evidence & Discovery

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: LEGA 2010 and LEGA 2090

    This course provides a general orientation of the Laws of Evidence as it pertains to the Michigan Legal System. It examines the role and responsibility of the Legal Assistant in the identification and preservation of electronic evidence in pre- and post-trial settings.

    Location: Online only

    Contact Hours: 4
    Billable Contact Hours: 4
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to apply various federal and state court rules in pretrial and post trial settings as it pertains to electronic evidence.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Identify the fundamental elements of electronic evidence discovery.
    2. Integrate the fundamental elements of electronic evidence discovery in an electronic trial setting.
    3. Explain the federal and state court rules.
    4. Distinguish between federal and state court rules in pretrial and post trial settings as it pertains to electronic evidence.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to analyze various types/forms of electronic evidence.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Identify various types/forms of electronic evidence.
    2. Distinguish between various types/forms of electronic evidence.
    3. Differentiate between electronic evidence in its natural format versus conversion to image.
    4. Describe the methods for converting and maintaining evidence from third party sources.
    5. Describe electronic evidence in its natural/metadata format.
    6. Describe electronic evidence in its conversion to image.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to analyze the fundamental elements of the role of evidence as it applies to authentication, relevancy, weight, and prejudice.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Identify the fundamental elements of the role of evidence as it applies to authentication, relevancy, weight, and prejudice.
    2. Explain the fundamental elements of the role of evidence as it applies to authentication, relevancy, weight, and prejudice.
    3. Explain the mechanics and challenges associated with the admissibility of evidence.
    4. Demonstrate how the fundamental elements of evidence apply to authentication, relevancy, weight, and prejudice.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to build case structures, strategies, and database design considerations for the gathering of evidence.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Identify case structures, strategies, and database design considerations for the gathering of evidence.
    2. Apply guidelines for the preservation and authentication of electronic evidence.
    3. Apply guidelines for the incorporation of the usage of electronic evidence.
    4. Compose guidelines for the incorporation of the usage of electronic evidence.
    5. Define case structures, strategies, and database design considerations for the gathering of evidence.
    6. Create guidelines for the preservation and authentication of electronic evidence.
    7. Create guidelines for the incorporation and usage of electronic evidence.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, globa l society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Topic & Session:

    1. Electronic Information in Litigation
      1. Transition to Electronic Information
      2. Unique Characteristics (metadata)
      3. Importance of Understanding Electronic Discovery
      4. Evidentiary Value of Electronic Evidence
      5. Ethnical Obligations
      6. Judicial Role
    2. Creation and Storage of Electronic Information
      1. Creating Electronic Information
      2. Storage and Retrieval of Electronic Information
      3. Storage Media
      4. Storage Devices
      5. Storage Locations
    3. Structure and Type of Electronic Information
      1. Underlying Computer Setup
      2. Organizational Structure and Positions for Handling Information
      3. Technology d. Business Software Applications
      4. Directories, Files and File Formats
      5. Special Issues - Electronic Information
      6. Data Types
      7. Metadata, Hidden or Embedded Information
      8. E Mail
      9. Internet
      10. Database
      11. Spreadsheets
      12. Text Documents (Word Processing)
      13. Faxes
      14. Graphics
      15. Multimedia
      16. Presentation
      17. Video
      18. Conferencing - Text, Audio, Data and Video
      19. Audio Files
    4. Computer Forensics, Experts and Service Bureaus
      1. Computer Forensics
      2. Experts, Consultants and Service Bureaus
      3. Type of Experts, Consultants and Service Bureaus
      4. Services and Scope of Work - Forensic Specialists
      5. Locating and Selecting Experts and Consultants
    5. Collecting, Processing and Searching Electronic Information
      1. Value of Collecting Information in an Electronic Format
      2. Electronic Data Formats
      3. Searching Electronic Information
      4. Collecting and Producing
      5. Security of Electronic Information
      6. Extraction and Conversion
      7. Filtering and Reduplication
      8. Categorizing and Reviewing
      9. Types of Electronic Discovery Software
    6. Discovery and Production Process
      1. Discovery Process
      2. Production Process
    7. Court Procedural Rules and Case Law
      1. Federal Court Procedural Rules
      2. Promote Efficiency and Reasonable Inquiry
      3. Court Management Tools
      4. Production and Protection of Case Information
      5. Depositions
      6. Interrogatories to Party
      7. Request to Product and Inspect
      8. Request for Admissions
      9. Sanctions
      10. Obtaining Data from Third Parties
      11. Special Masters and Court Appointed Experts
      12. Injunctions
      13. Net Trials and Amendments of Judgments
    8. Admissibility of Electronic Evidence
      1. Evidentiary Rules
      2. Federal Rules of Evidence
      3. Preliminary questions
      4. Remainder of or Related Writings or Recorded Statements
      5. Judicial Notice
      6. Relevancy
      7. Testimony and Opinion by Experts and Lay Witnesses
      8. Hearsay
      9. Requirement of Authentication or Identification
      10. Best Evidence Rules
      11. E Mail
      12. Computerized Business Records
      13. Chat Rooms, Newsgroup and List Serves
      14. Web Page Content
      15. Photographs
      16. Specific Computer Devices (GPS, Hard Drive, Fax and Caller ID)

    Primary Faculty
    Manatine, Jennifer R.
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Johnson, Elise
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

 

Page: 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10